Home

Avaya Configuring Dial Services User's Manual

1. 192 32 15 0 oe Circuit 2 192 32 15 2 3 f Dial n im 79 Line 2 2 32 7 Chicago amp 0 Configuration of the New York router Circuit 3 192 32 16 2 Circuit 1 192 32 14 1 nel J the local interface to Los Angeles device Circuit 2 192 32 15 1 Dallas the local interface to Chicago Circuit 3 192 32 16 1 the local interface to Dallas DS0014A Figure 2 3 Example of Demand Lines Pools and Circuits 2 6 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview In Figure 2 3 three circuits share two physical lines that make up Demand pool 1 Note that only two of the circuits using Demand pool 1 can be active simultaneously because only two modems are available The IP addresses are associated with each circuit not with the physical line In addition to assigning a demand pool ID to each circuit you can assign protocol interfaces and configure phone lists for use with V 25bis Hayes and ISDN signaling Refer to Chapter 12 for more information Demand Circuit Protocols Router A Router B g J a BRI A ee ee Z Relay The protocol for a demand circuit can be either PPP or Frame Relay A Frame Relay demand circuit may have any number of service records and PVCs Typically Frame Relay connections are used with ISDN lines PPP and Frame Rela
2. A Primary PPP i or Bay Networks Standard Backup line Raise DTR Router 1 IP addresses Router 2 IP address Ethernet line E11 129 122 1 1 Sync line S331 129 122 3 2 Sync line S11 129 122 3 1 DS0022A Figure B 3 Dial Backup Configuration with PPP Configuration of Router 1 To configure Router 1 1 Configure a leased synchronous interface named S11 2 Select PPP as the WAN protocol 3 Select IP RIP as the LAN protocol and configure the interface as follows e JP Address 129 122 3 1 e IP Adjacent Host Address 129 122 3 2 B 12 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples 4 From the Configuration Manager window click on a COM connector 5 Follow the path to the configuration windows and set the parameters according to Tables B 18 through B 22 Configuration of Router 2 To configure Router 2 1 Configure a leased synchronous interface named 331 2 Select PPP as the WAN protocol 3 Select IP RIP as the LAN protocol and configure the interface as follows e JP Address 129 122 3 2 e IP Adjacent Host Address 129 122 3 1 4 From the Configuration Manager window click on a COM connector 5 Follow the path to the configuration windows and set the parameters according to Tables B 18 through B 22 Note These tables list only the parameter defaults you must change Backup Pool Con
3. amp Q0 amp Q1 amp Q4 The modem performs soft reset amp Q5 amp Q6 amp Q2 amp Q3 The modem hangs up amp FO Restore factory configuration 0 amp F1 Restore factory configuration 1 amp GO Disable guard tone amp G1 Disable guard tone amp G2 Enable 1800 Hz guard tone amp JO Set S Register response only for compatibility amp J1 Set S Register response only for compatibility amp KO Disable DTE DCE flow control amp K3 Enable RTS CTS DTE DCE flow control amp K4 Enable XON XOFF DTE DCE flow control amp K5 Enable transparent XON XOFF flow control amp K6 Enable both RTS CTS and XON XOFF flow control amp LO Select dial up line operation amp MO Select direct asynchronous mode amp M1 Select sync connect with async off line command mode amp M2 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR dialing of directory zero amp M3 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR to act as Talk Data switch continued E 4 117353 A Rev A AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function amp PO Set 10 p s pulse dial with 39 61 make break amp P1 Set 10 p s pulse dial with 33 67 make break amp P2 Set 20 p s pulse dial with 39 61 make break amp
4. DS0010A l I I I I NTI Digital line i I Non ISDN router l DS0011A Figure 3 5 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Non ISDN Devices 117353 A Rev A 3 7 Configuring Dial Services For More Information about ISDN For detailed information about ISDN protocol design and implementation refer to the following Deming R ISDN The Network Architecture of the Future Bell Communication Research Technical Education Center New Jersey Goldstein F ISDN in Perspective Reading Mass Addison Wesley 1992 Kessler G ISDN 2d ed New York McGraw Hill 1993 Motorola University Press The Basics Book of ISDN Network Information Center NIC SRI International Reading Mass Addison Wesley third printing January 1994 Newton H Newton s Telecom Dictionary 10th ed New York Flatiron Publishing 1996 Stallings W ISDN and Broadband ISDN 3rd ed New York Macmillan 1995 Stallings W ISDN An Introduction New York Macmillan 1989 3 8 117353 A Rev A Chapter 4 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services This chapter describes Bay Networks implementations for all three dial services Point to Point Protocol You can use Point to Point Protocol PPP across dial up lines for any dial service Site Manager automatically configures PPP on lines in a bandwidth pool For lines in a demand
5. cccccsssceeeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 13 5 Dial on Demand Configuration with PPP ccscccsseeeeeeeeeseteeeeeneeeees B 2 Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeee B 6 Dial Backup Configuration with PPP cccsseesseeeeeceeeeeeeeseseeeseneees B 12 Dial Backup over an ISDN Network ccccccceceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeessnaeeeeneees B 18 xix Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 5 1 Table 6 1 Table 7 1 Table 8 1 Table 9 1 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 12 1 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table B 5 Table B 6 Table B 7 Table B 8 Table B 9 Table B 10 117353 A Rev A Tables Dial Service NAMES mmaa e aaa iaae dearena aani ea 1 2 Setting Up a Default Modem or ISDN Configuration ccccsscceeeeeee 1 4 Dial Service Names eccccececceenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseaeeeeeaaeeeseeeeetaeeeeanes 2 2 Primary and Backup neS eisereen kia ee ie eee REE KEEN EEk e 2 13 Primary and Backup Circuit Protocols sssessseseseeeseeeeeeerresrresrrnssnsses 2 13 Time of Day Schedules for Standby Circuit 1 5 6 Configuration Requirements for Routers A and C sssssssssssernrrernen 6 4 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service 7 1 Modem Interface WINGOWS cccceeeeeceeeeeeennteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaees 8 6 Customizing
6. Site Manager WAN Serial Interface Type parameter page A 4 If you plan to use Asynchronous PPP for your dial connections you may want to select Async for the WAN serial interface type After selecting an interface type Site Manager displays the Sync Line Media Type window Figure 1 6 or the Async Line Media Type window Figure 1 7 1 8 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Liri Milia Tuji Cable Tiape Priority Hoima prem Shor irg Figure 1 6 Sync Line Media Type Window Lins Badia Tupa Priority Aue Coma Siring Figure 1 7 Async Line Media Type Window 117353 A Rev A 1 9 Configuring Dial Services 6 Click on OK to accept the line media default Raise DTR At this point you may want to select V 25bis or Hayes as the line media type rather than accept the default For Hayes signaling you need to specify a modem initialization string for modem dialing refer to Chapter 8 to modify modem parameters For both options you need to configure an outgoing phone list refer to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 1 36 Site Manager Line Media Type parameter page A 5 You return to the Lines Definition window The letter D demand B backup or W bandwidth appears next to the COM port to indicate what type of line it is Note that the router can use the same line for all three types of pools Asynchronous ports have an at sign next to the connector name
7. 5 Enter a new pool ID and click on Apply The new pool appears at the top of the window 6 Click on Done 8 2 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Deleting Pools Before you can delete a pool you must first delete all circuits associated with that pool Site Manager will not let you delete a pool otherwise Refer to the appropriate circuit customizing chapter to learn how to delete circuits 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays the Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Pools window refer to Figure 8 1 Select a pool entry at the top of the window Click on Delete Site Manager asks if you are sure you want to delete the pool Click on OK Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 3 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the WAN Serial Interface Type and Line Media Type You should have already configured the WAN serial interface type and line media type in Chapter 1 To modify the WAN serial interface type and the line media type 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on the COM connector whose interface you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it Site Manager displays the Edit Connector window Figure 8 2 Edit Modem Edit Line Done Figure 8 2 Edit Connector Window 3 Click on Edit Line Site Manager displays the Edit SYNC Paramete
8. 8 Click on OK You return to the Lines Definition window 9 Select File gt Exit 10 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 17 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the ISDN Switch Type If you change the switch type the router disconnects any existing calls as the ISDN software makes changes to account for the new switch Once the changes are made the software restarts and you can reconnect To modify the switch type 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters Site Manager displays the ISDN Configured Switches window Figure 8 11 Sao Tupa Tremi Filter ending Complete IE Ciabal Adaptor Rara Gioball 2 25 mer TDH channa Figure 8 11 ISDN Configured Switches Window The Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter does not appear for PRI 3 Enter a new switch type Site Manager Switch Type parameter page A 16 4 Click on Apply then click on Done 8 18 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Enabling Incoming Call Filtering Incoming call filtering enables you to use caller ID service which identifies the incoming caller By enabling incoming call filtering the router rejects any unauthorized caller Refer to Chapter 4 for more information To enable incoming call filtering 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters Site Manager displays the ISDN Configured S
9. ccccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeseeaeeeeeaeeteeeeesnaaeeee 1 5 Creating Line Pools with ISDN Lines eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seer eeeeaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeeeees 1 11 Configuring BRI Lines ceccceeesceceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeaeeeeceeeeseaaesegaeeeeeaaeseseeeeessaeeeeeaeees 1 11 Configuring PRI Lines ceccceeesceeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeesseeeeessaeeeseneees 1 12 Adding ISDN Lines to a Poole ea eeraa i a iaaea a a aaa a a ia i aia 1 16 Configuring Circuits 0 cceeeeceeeeee cents eeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseeeessaeeseeeeeeesaeeetenes 1 19 Creating Demand Circuits ceceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeceaeeeesaaeeseeeessaaeeseneeeetsaeessenes 1 19 Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information cccccceseeeeeeeeeesteeeeeneeees 1 22 Specifying the Connection Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeeeaeeneeeeess 1 22 Enabling a Protocol searing ieee aati Aliens 1 23 Creating Backup Circuits ecccececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeceaeeeeeaaeeseneeeeeaeeseneeeeenaeeesines 1 25 Specifying the Backup Mode cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaaaeseeeeeesiaaeeeeneeees 1 27 Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information cccceceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeneeees 1 27 Creating Bandwidth Circuits 0 cecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeesaaeeseneeeeseaeeeseneeeeeas 1 28 Configuring Leased Circuits as Bandwidth
10. 117353 A Rev A A 89 Configuring Dial Services Outgoing Phone List Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Outgoing Phone Number Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Up to 25 numeric characters Specifies the telephone number of the remote router Enter the telephone number of the remote router Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 4 A 90 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phon
11. 2 Click on Schedule in the Primary Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 10 3 or the FR Primary Interface Definition window refer to Figure 10 6 Site Manager displays the first Circuit Time of Day Schedule window Figure 10 12 Daren tart Time Emi Titi Brid labi lity Hode Figure 10 12 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window 3 Click on Add Site Manager displays the second Circuit Time of Day Schedule window Figure 10 13 117353 A Rev A 10 15 Configuring Dial Services Figure 10 13 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window 4 Accept the parameter defaults or specify a new schedule according to the parameter descriptions in Appendix A then click on OK You return to the completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule window Figure 10 14 MEF KD 1060 1700 Thar jin tart Tise Emi Tiss TEE TERE tay Figure 10 14 Completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window 10 16 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits You can revise the schedule by changing the parameters values and clicking on Apply Refer to Appendix A for parameter descriptions Click on Done Removing PPP or Frame Relay Backup Service To remove backup service 1 3 Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay Site Manager displays the Primary Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 10 3 or the FR Primary Interface Definition window refer to Figure 10 4 Click on either Cct Type
12. BRI T3 Timer ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 10 seconds 1 to 30 seconds Indicates the amount of time that the router has to try and activate the ISDN S T or U interface ARN only The router starts this timer while the ISDN interface is deactivated and the router tries to activate it for example when the router wants to send data During this period the router sends INFO 1 frames across the ISDN interface until the network responds with a signal or the timer expires This timer prevents the router from attempting to activate the ISDN interface interminably Enter a time limit that is sufficient for the router to activate the ISDN S T or U interface This value should be greater than the time it would take to activate the ISDN interface under normal conditions You may want to ask your ISDN provider for guidelines regarding the subscriber loop transmission which might affect the value you enter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 14 A 22 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters BRI T4 Timer ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 750 milliseconds 500 to 1000 milliseconds Indicates the amount of time the router waits for the line to recover from a deactivated
13. ES Sranane Tree E rative Rode LAN EGP or sore So Figure 1 19 Select Protocols Window 2 Click on IP for this demand circuit and click on OK Site Manager displays the IP Configuration window 3 Enter an IP address and click on OK Site Manager IP Address parameter see Configuring IP Services Site Manager displays the IP Adjacent Host Configuration window 117353 A Rev A 1 23 Configuring Dial Services 4 Enter an IP adjacent host address and click on OK Site Manager IP Adjacent Host parameter see Configuring IP Services Site Manager displays the IP Adjacent Host Route window 5 Click on OK to accept the defaults You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window refer to Figure 1 18 Note You cannot configure protocol prioritization for demand circuits running PPP multilink Protocol prioritization modifies the order in which packets are sent across the line This could change the multilink assigned order of packets and cause problems with the data 6 Do one of the following If you have ISDN lines in the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 1 36 If you have only Raise DTR lines in the pool click on Done in the PPP Demand Circuits window and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 1 40 1 24 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Creating Backup Circuits To create a PPP backup circuit you designate a singl
14. Edit Line Done Figure 8 3 Edit Connector Window 3 Click on Edit Modem The WAN Serial Interface Type and the Line Media Type parameter values determine which Modem Interface window Site Manager displays Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Modem Interface Windows WAN Serial P i Interface Type Line Media Type Modem Interface Window Displayed Sync Raise DTR or V 25bis Sync Modem Interface Figure 8 4 Async Raise DTR or V 25bis_ Async Modem Interface Figure 8 4 Async Hayes Async Hayes Modem Interface Figure 8 5 a The Async Modem and Sync Modem Interface windows are the same except for the title 8 6 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Ruli Daily Fimillail Comat Ring nati carte Cng Movie Rode Cossmaj Stor ling Figure 8 4 Sync Modem Interface Window Fart Dal ay Redial Count Dig Poke Pode Tipa Aee Init String Speaker Volums Sonker Control No of Binge to nemer Figure 8 5 Async Hayes Modem Interface Window The following sections instruct you how to modify your modem configuration 117353 A Rev A 8 7 Configuring Dial Services Selecting a Modem Hayes only For asynchronous interfaces using Hayes signaling you can specify a particular modem for your network Refer to Modifying Modem Configurations on page 8 6 to access the Modem Interface window To select a modem 1 Begin at the Async Hayes Modem Interface window refer to Figur
15. If only one Frame Relay PVC is being backed up by PPP the router performs circuit backup For circuit backup the Frame Relay service provider must support A bit notification which tells the router the status of the PVC This enables the router to back up the PVC if it fails Without A bit notification the remote side of the PVC is never notified when the local side of the PVC has terminated making dial backup service impossible Backup Lines and Pools A backup line is an alternate line that carries data if the primary line fails It is advantageous therefore to have one or more backup lines to ensure data transmission To assign one or more backup lines to a primary line you establish a backup pool A backup pool is a collection of lines that the primary circuits can use Each backup pool is identified by a backup pool ID The lines in a backup pool can reside in any slot on the router that supports WAN lines therefore the pool can span multiple slots Lines in a backup pool can connect to a modem directly to a PSTN using the ARN with the V 34 Modem Adapter Module or directly to an ISDN network using a router with integral ISDN capability You can combine asynchronous synchronous and ISDN interfaces in a single pool The synchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR or V 25bis signaling for modem connections The asynchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling for modem connections Hayes signaling require
16. If you purchased selective PRI service from your ISDN provider you can select individual timeslots Select only the timeslots that the service provider assigns to you For example if your provider assigns you timeslots 1 through 10 select slots 1 through 10 in the Timeslots window When you select a timeslot a menu appears with two options Figure 1 13 Timeslot Logical Line Timeslot Logical Line 1 Unused 13 Unused a B Channel 14 Unused a 3 l Unused 15 Unused Figure 1 13 Menu for PRI Timeslot 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Select B Channel from the menu The configured timeslot should read B channel Repeat the procedure for each timeslot you want to configure Click on OK You return to the PRI Logical Lines window Accept the default MTU size Click on Done Adding ISDN Lines to a Pool To add ISDN BRI or PRI lines to a pool 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 Select Dialup gt Demand Pools Backup Pools or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays a Pools window similar to Figure 1 2 on page 1 6 Click on Add Site Manager displays the Pool Configuration window refer to Figure 1 3 on page 1 6 Enter a pool ID and click on OK Site Manager Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID parameter page A 4 5 Site Manager displays the Lines Definition window refer to Figure 1 4 Click on a previously configured ISDN
17. Set to Active to indicate to a Frame Relay switch that the PVC is available for use Set to Inactive to indicate that the PVC is configured but not available for use for example before your switch provider actually activates the PVC Choose Invalid if the PVC is configured but the switch is unaware of it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 7 Multicast Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List Unicast Unicast Multicast Indicates whether this PVC is multicast or unicast Set to unicast or multicast according to PVC type as the Frame Relay switch provider instructs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 19 117353 A Rev A A 73 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Hybrid Mode Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Fra
18. COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters On For Call Off On For Call Always On On For Answer Controls the modem speaker Select one of the following Off Turns the speaker off entirely On For Call Turns the speaker on only when a call is established and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Always On Keeps the modem speaker on at all times On For Answering Turns the speaker on only when the modem is answering a call and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Not applicable Set Pulse Tone Dial Default COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Tone Pulse Tone Selects pulse or tone signals for the modem Select Pulse only if your telephone line does not support tone dialing Not applicable A 14 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters BRI Port Application Mode Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Port Application Mode Configuration Manager gt ISDN Connector gt Port Application Dialup 2B D Dialup 2B D Dialup 1B D Dialup Floating B Leased 2X64K Leased 1X64K Leased 128K Determines how the BRI service operates The options are as follows Dialup 2B D Specifies that this is an ISDN switched line that provides two B channels and call setup occurs between the router and an ISDN switch Dialup 1B D
19. Configuring Dial Services BayRS Version 12 00 Site Manager Software Version 6 00 Part No 117353 A Rev A September 1997 Bay Networks Bay Networks 4401 Great America Parkway 8 Federal Street Santa Clara CA 95054 Billerica MA 01821 Copyright 1997 Bay Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA September 1997 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Bay Networks Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Trademarks ACE AFN AN BCN BLN BN BNX CN FN FRE GAME LN and Bay Networks are registered trademarks and Advanced Remote Node ANH ARN ASN BayeSIS BayStack EZ Install Switch Node System 5000 Bay Networks Press and the Bay Networks logo are trademarks of Bay Networks Inc Microsoft MS MS DOS Win32 Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective ow
20. Lackup Poot I0 Hasimia bigs Ti Mas Tise Termination UpTime Tors RERET Priory iar Tam libe Backes biterfare Filtera Figure 10 4 FR Primary Interface Definition Window 3 Click on Intf Type Site Manager displays the FR Interface window Figure 10 5 117353 A Rev A 10 5 Configuring Dial Services LICEE Iitera Tupe Pool To Figure 10 5 FR Interface Window 4 Select Primary Shared or Primary Secondary for the Interface Type parameter The interface type determines whether the backup circuit shares the Frame Relay primary circuit s configuration or uses a unique configuration Site Manager Interface Type parameter page A 59 If you select Primary Secondary as the interface type Site Manager informs you that you need to enable the Frame Relay interface To do this set the FR Service Control parameter to Enable Refer to the following section Modifying the Frame Relay Backup Interface to learn how to access this parameter 5 Enter the pool ID that you want this primary circuit to use Site Manager Pool ID parameter page A 60 6 Click on OK You return to the FR Primary Interface Definition window which has four new buttons Backup Def Schedule Phone Out and Apply Figure 10 6 10 6 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits TR Slot 4 Mod 4 OOM Phone Mort Fp Ly Walim Beckug Pook 10 Hainimia lip The Mae Up
21. Switched 56 Kb s X 56 Kb s ISDN Router connection Router DS0016A Figure 4 8 Rate Adaption for a Switched 56 Kb s Network 117353 A Rev A 4 17 Configuring Dial Services X 25 Service over an ISDN D Channel BRI only For routers used in France and Germany you can send X 25 packets over an ISDN D channel to an X 25 network This feature reduces the cost of X 25 network access because you do not have to use expensive leased lines While the D channel is in use you can use the B channels for other dial service applications This feature is based on ITU T recommendation X 31 which specifies how an X 25 DTE communicates with an ISDN network With the router s ISDN functionality you dial into the ISDN network and send X 25 packets These packets are directed to the packet handling PH function in the ISDN network which processes an X 25 call and acts as a gateway between the ISDN network and the X 25 network X 25 service over the D channel is available only for BRI interfaces on the AN ANH ASN and ARN using the single or quad ISDN BRI module A minimum of 8 Mb of memory is required to use this feature on these routers Recommendation X 31 states that packets sent over the D channel can travel at a maximum of 9600 bps If you use a higher baud rate you lose data X 25 calls are made to the destination device using X 25 addresse
22. When you select PPP or Frame Relay for the backup circuit you determine whether the router performs circuit backup or link backup Circuit backup is a point to point backup connection One circuit is backed up at a time instead of an entire interface When you back up a point to point primary circuit Standard PPP or a single Frame Relay PVC the protocol for the backup circuit is PPP Figures 2 6 and 2 7 show examples of circuit backup Figure 2 6 shows a Standard primary circuit aided by a PPP backup circuit Figure 2 7 shows a PPP primary circuit aided by a PPP backup circuit Note For circuit backup of a single Frame Relay PVC the backup line passes through the switched network only bypassing the Frame Relay network If either primary line fails the modem at Central site A can connect to router B or C via a backup circuit Central site A Remote site B CL X mi J mp e co C co Key Remote site C Primary line _ _ Backup line DS0020A Figure 2 6 PPP Backup over a PSTN 2 14 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Router Router SS co Primary leased line
23. 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 29 Auto Demand Term Reset Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 60 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Specifies the amount of time in minutes that the router waits before reestablishing the demand circuit after an auto demand termination Once the router reestablishes the demand circuit the protocols readvertise the static routes for this demand circuit Specify an amount of time that allows the network to recover or that allows your network administrator to resolve the problem You must enter a value for this parameter if you configured the Auto Demand Termination parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 30 117353 A Rev A A 29 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Circuit Name Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits None Any valid demand circuit name Identifies the name of the demand circuit Site Manager supplies this name based on the available circuit names To modify this parameter value enter a new name then click on Apply 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 3 1 3 Dial Optimized Routing Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disabled Disabled Enable
24. 117353 A Rev A 9 5 Configuring Dial Services Modifying Frame Relay Service Records A Frame Relay service record is a data structure that allows flexible grouping and characterization of PVCs Each record can contain one or more PVCs The router creates the first service record automatically when you select Frame Relay as the WAN protocol This is the default service record If a PVC is not included in a configured service record it uses the default service record To modify the default service record or add service records 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window refer to Figure 9 1 Click on FR Circuits Site Manager displays the FR Demand Circuits window refer to Figure 9 2 Click on Demand Intf Site Manager displays the FR Demand Interface List window refer to Figure 9 4 Click on Services Site Manager displays the Frame Relay Demand Service List window Figure 9 5 Figure 9 5 Frame Relay Demand Service List Window 9 6 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits 6 Site Manager supplies the service name Modify it only if you are sure the new name is unique for the router Site Manager Service Name parameter page A 71 7 Click on Add to create a service record or go to step 8 8 Click on PVCs to configure PVCs for the service record or go to step 9 Site Manager displays
25. 5 5 Configuring Dial Services Using Schedules to Manage Standby Circuit Availability Part of the standby circuit configuration is to schedule the circuit s availability The Time of Day schedule defines the interval that the standby circuit is available It also determines how the router uses the primary and standby circuits when they are both active You may configure several Time of Day schedules for a circuit in a 24 hour period If you do not set up a schedule for the circuit the circuit s availability defaults to 24 hours a day The Failback Time parameter is part of the Time of Day schedule Depending on how you set this parameter there may be a delay between the time the standby circuit is disconnected and the time traffic returns to the primary circuit Therefore it is important to balance the use of the primary and standby circuits to ensure that data reaches the remote destination Be aware that the router monitors the primary circuit during the failback time If the primary circuit fails the router continues to use the standby circuit To configure a circuit s schedule refer to Chapter 9 Configuring Multiple Time of Day Schedules Configuring multiple Time of Day schedules for a circuit can cause schedule conflicts This section provides two examples of when this happens If the failback time for the active Time of Day schedule overlaps the failback time of the next schedule the router uses the failback time o
26. Bandwidth on Demand Lines and Pools ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaees 2 23 How Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together cccccecsssseceeesesneeeeeessteeeeeseaees 2 24 Activating Dial up Lines to Relieve Congestion ccceceessceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeessaeesenes 2 24 Terminating Secondary Lines cccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeaeeseeaeeeseaeeneaes 2 25 Sample Bandwidth on Demand Application cccccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetseeeteneees 2 25 vi 117353 A Rev A Using the Same Line for All Dial Services ccecceeeseeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeeeeneeess 2 26 Chapter 3 ISDN Overview ISDN Standard Siei tai Pes esl iced a Maecenas a ne 3 2 Basic Rate Nie a O a eeinictiect A aoe ee TEN 3 2 Primary Rate Ite mace sccecicceicccssnenesat sadateecesdaceeeadesieaseicabsaau dened Sfacnavacetsnaualacaasaueowaaas 3 3 The BEGHannel EEE A E E E AE 3 3 Link Access Proced re D arepe aeae ai arn Pa aaaea eaa dnek raai iir i 3 3 Call Control on the D Channel irsini i a a i a 3 5 ISDN Interfaces gate ates Att eatae a iat ee te tat ately te ton tak tone 3 5 FUNCTIONAL Groups asri aE aa a sanbabednenaebenda deacemneted aA 3 5 Reterence Points 22 2028 2 8 Rae a a ed ee 3 6 For More Information about ISDN cccccccseceeceeececesessesenaecaeeeeeeeseescseeesesaeseeeeeeeeeeess 3 8 Chapter 4 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services Point tozPoint Prot
27. C1 Return OK message Dn Dial modifier E0 Turn off command echo E1 Turn on command echo FO Select auto detect mode equivalent to N1 RC 144 F1 Select V 21 or Bell 103 RC144 F2 Reserved RC144 F3 Select V 23 line modulation RC144 F4 Select V 22 or Bell 212A 1200 b s line speed RC144 F5 Select V 22bis line modulation RC144 F6 Select V 32bis or V 32 4800 line modulation RC144 F7 Select V 32bis 7200 line modulation RC144 F8 Select V 32bis or V 32 9600 line modulation RC144 continued 117353 A Rev A E 1 Configuring Dial Services Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function F9 Select V 32bis 12000 line modulation RC144 F10 Select V 32bis 14400 line modulation RC144 HO Initiate a hang up sequence H1 If on hook go off hook and enter command mode 10 Report product code l1 Report precomputed checksum 12 Report OK 13 Report firmware revision model and interface type 14 Report response programmed by an OEM I5 Report the country code parameter l6 Report modem data pump model and code revision I7 Reports the DAA code W class models only LO Set low speaker volume L1 Set low speaker volume L2 Set medium speaker volume L3 Set high speaker volume MO Turn speaker off M1 Turn speaker on during handshaking and off while receiving carrier M2 Tu
28. Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables data compression for this service record Accept the default Enable or select Disable if you decide not to use data compression for this service record 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 29 A 76 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Options Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Circuit Type Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Normal Normal Bandwidth on Demand Specifies whether the leased circuit uses bandwidth on demand service For a normal synchronous circuit the router does not provide bandwidth on demand service For a bandwidth circuit the router provides up to 29 additional lines to carry traffic when the bandwidth circuit
29. For dial on demand the frequency of these update packets forces the dial up connection to remain activated unless you configure a time of day to deactivate it When routers exchange update packets the physical connection is established unless you create a filter To reduce this type of traffic you can configure one of the following e Static routes e Dial optimized routing e RIP triggered updates and broadcast timers for IP e RIP and SAP broadcast timers for IPX e Traffic filters Each method is described in the sections that follow 5 14 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Static Routes You need to configure the demand circuit protocols so they do not send broadcast messages to the network Once you disable broadcast messages the router must determine the destination address using a static route A static route specifies the transmission path that data must follow to another network This path is based on the destination address of the data Protocols that can use static routes include e AURP e DECnet e DLSw e IP e IPX e XNS Demand circuits require static routes if you disable the circuit s routing update protocols To configure a static route you need to specify in the protocol s routing table the address of the network to which you will be sending data The address must be unique to that circuit For more information about static routes for each of these protocols refer to the a
30. Instructions MIB Object ID Service Name Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List Circuit name that Site Manager assigns Variable length text string Identifies the service record Each service record must have a unique name which the router assigns Change it only if you are certain that the new name you assign is unique 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 5 1 7 117353 A Rev A A 71 Configuring Dial Services Frame Relay PVC Parameters Demand and Dial Backup You cannot enter values for the following Frame Relay PVC parameters Node Protection Key Encrypt Enable LISS Name LTSS Value and MEK Change These parameters are available only if you enable data encryption For information about encryption refer to Configuring Data Encryption Services Parameter DLCI Number Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay PVC Add Default None Options The Frame Relay switch provider assigns DLCI numbers These assigned numbers are
31. MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Retry Delay Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 3 seconds 1 to 60 seconds Determines how long the router waits between each retry attempt before trying to reestablish the circuit Enter the amount of time that you want the router to wait before trying the next line in the pool The amount of time you choose depends on the time it typically takes the network to recover 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 27 Connection Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Collision Master No Dial Collision Master Collision Slave Determines the role of each router when two routers try to establish a demand circuit with one another Both routers in a demand configuration can initiate a call This parameter determines which router places the call first to avoid continual collisions To avoid continual collisions configure one router as Collision Master and the other as Collision Slave To ensure that a router receives calls but never initiates calls enter No Dial Calls are then made only in one direction If this circuit is part of an unnumbered demand circuit group the router automatically sets this parameter to No Dial because a circuit in a demand circuit group cannot initiate a call If you are configuring
32. Not applicable Modem Config String COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters None An ASCII text string of 3 to 34 characters Specifies a modem initialization string to be sent to the modem after the default factory configured command string Commands in this string take precedence over commands in the factory default string AT amp M28 amp Q28 amp D08 amp S1 amp ROSO 0M1L2T Enter an AT command string Refer to Appendix E for a list of AT commands Note that entering an invalid command string could disable the modem Site Manager can verify AT command string changes only when in dynamic mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 9 A 12 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Modem Factory Defaults COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Enabled Enabled Disabled Specifies whether exclusive use of the factory default modem initialization string is enabled or disabled When enabled the router sends only the default string ATT amp d0 amp k3 amp X0S0 2S2 43 to the modem When disabled the router sends a user specified initialization string set in the Modem Config String parameter after sending the default string C
33. Parameter PAP Password Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default Unsecured Options Any text string maximum of 25 characters Function Specifies the PAP password that you assign to this interface During the interface s authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct PAP password or the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK and does not bring up the connection For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only configurable if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Monitor Instructions If you are using PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP password for this circuit If not ignore this parameter MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 38 A 40 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Outbound Authentication Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidt
34. Specifies that this is an ISDN switched line that provides only one B channel and call setup occurs between the router and an ISDN switch Use this option when you do not need to use two B channels Dialup Floating B Only for AN ANH and ARN routers Specifies that although this is an ISDN switched line providing two B channels the software makes the necessary adjustments if only one channel is in use Use this option if you can purchase only 2B D service but only want to use one B channel or your application requires two synchronous ports and only one B channel Leased 2X64K Specifies that this line provides two B channels that are always available No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only Leased 1X64K Specifies that this line provides one B channel that is always available No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only Leased 128K Specifies that this line provides one B channel that is always available The extra bandwidth of the 128 Kb s channel is equivalent to having two B channels of 64 Kb s No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only If you have a dial up application choose one o
35. a backslash For V 25bis calls only this delimiter separates the phone number from the extension Enter a delimiter if the remote device requires one between the phone number and the extension Use a character or set of characters that the remote device accepts 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 6 A 92 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Outgoing Phone Number Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number ISDN or Dial Sync Dial Sync Dial Async ISDN Distinguishes whether the phone number is for a V 25bis or Hayes connection or a direct ISDN network connection Additionally it indicates whether the V 25bis number is for a synchronous or asynchronous interface Choose an option as follows Dial Sync or Dial Async if the router is using V 25bis signaling Dial Async if the router is using Hayes signaling ISDN if the router establishes the connection over an ISDN line You must also supply val
36. see Configuring PPP Services Multilink Fragmentation Multilink fragmentation splits datagrams into smaller packets when necessary and sends these packets across links in a multilink bundle Fragmentation improves the distribution of data across multilink lines and uses buffer resources more efficiently thereby improving communication over bandwidth circuits Bay Networks routers comply with RFC 1717 which defines PPP multilink Packets sent across links in a multilink bundle have an outer header packet that contains a unique packet sequence number and allows for the following e Fragmentation of the original packets e Assignment of sequence numbers to each fragment e Transmission across links in a multilink bundle e Reassembly of the original sequence and packet size at the destination router For more information about multilink and fragmentation refer to Configuring PPP Services 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol The PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP defined in RFC 2125 manages the dynamic allocation of bandwidth across links in a multilink bundle It provides a flexible yet powerful method of managing bandwidth between two routers BAP is only available for bandwidth on demand service across ISDN lines BAP does the following Coordinates the addition and removal of links from a bundle Enables a router to pass information to its peer so the peer knows which phone
37. 1 2 A 62 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Mgmnt Type Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface ANSI T1 617D DLCMI None Rev 1 LMI ANSI T1 617D CCITT Annex A LMI Switch Annex D Switch Annex A Switch Specifies the management protocol that the router and the Frame Relay network use to exchange status information Routers connected back to back also use a management protocol to exchange status information DLCMI None provides no management interface between the router and the Frame Relay network In the absence of management support you must configure all PVCs manually Rev 1 LMI provides user side management services as specified by Revision 1 of the Local Management Interface standard ANSI T1 617D provides user side management services as specified in Annex D to ANSI standard T1 617 1991 CCITT Annex A provides user side management services as specified by the ITU T formerly CCITT LMI Switch offers limited management services for the DCE side of the connection as specified by Revision 1 of the Local Management Interface standard Annex D Switch provides limited management s
38. 128K 2 64K 128K 2 64K to 1472K 23 64K Determines the total bandwidth that is the number of B channels in use for this PRI multirate call Select the number of B channels the router should use for calls to this remote destination Remember that the call will fail if there are not enough channels available in the bandwidth pool 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 14 A 98 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Outgoing Phone Prefix Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number ATDT Any valid AT command string For asynchronous PPP connections only this parameter specifies a prefix that the router sends to the modem to initiate dialing Accept the default ATDT or enter a valid AT initialization command Refer to Appendix E for a list of AT initialization commands for the ARN Your modem may use a different set of commands so refer to the manual for that modem 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 15 117353 A
39. 32 14 1 You must also configure the New York router s adjacent host entry which is 192 32 14 2 the address of the Los Angeles router These two entries designate the correct path from New York to Los Angeles Although you must configure IP adjacent hosts do not configure IPX adjacent hosts Adjacent hosts are not required for IPX to work over PPP circuits 117353 A Rev A 4 9 Configuring Dial Services An alternative to configuring adjacent hosts is to configure IP unnumbered interfaces An unnumbered interface is a point to point connection that does not use an IP address Instead you configure the address to be 0 0 0 0 You can use unnumbered interfaces to advertise routing information across the network Since all traffic over an unnumbered interface uses broadcast addressing at the data link layer you do not need adjacent hosts Adjacent hosts and unnumbered interfaces are features of the router s IP interface To configure these features refer to Configuring IP Services ISDN Services A router with built in ISDN capability is a TE device which is an ISDN compatible device This means that the router provides the S T interface which defines the boundary between the user and the network The ARN also provides the U interface which includes an integral NT1 interface The NT1 interface defines the point at which the service provider s wires terminate at your site For BRI service the S T interface follows the stand
40. 4 Select Protocols gt Add Delete 5 Select BAP and click on OK 6 Select Protocols gt Edit BAP gt Interface Site Manager displays the Edit BAP Circuit Interface window Figure 11 7 117353 A Rev A 11 11 Configuring Dial Services Figure 11 7 Edit BAP Circuit Interface Window 7 Accept the default Enable to enable BAP Site Manager Enable parameter page A 86 8 Select a value for the No Phone Number Needed parameter using these guidelines e Accept the default Disable if the non monitor router is supplying phone numbers to the monitor router during BAP negotiation e Select Enable if all the required phone numbers are in the monitor router s outgoing phone list Site Manager No Phone Number Needed parameter page A 86 9 Click on OK You return to the Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 11 6 10 Select File gt Exit 11 12 117353 A Rev A Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Removing Bandwidth on Demand Service To remove bandwidth on demand service 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 11 1 Click on Cct Type Site Manager displays the Circuit Options window Figure 11 8 Cirit Tigi Hand dihan oea Fool D fans oth Hode Figure 11 8 Circuit Options Window Set th
41. 8 20 Disabling X 25 over the D Channel cceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeneeesaeeeneeeeeaas 8 21 Modifying the BRI Line That Uses X 25 Service over the D Channel 0 8 22 Modifying the X 25 Circuit for Service over the D Channel eccceeeeeeereees 8 23 Configuring a BRI Leased Line Germany and Japan only ceceeeeeereees 8 24 Modifying BRI Leased Line Configurations cccceceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeaeeeeneees 8 26 Removing B Channels from a Pool 0 cceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeseeaeesenaeeeee 8 27 Removing BRI and PRI from the Router eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenes 8 28 RemovingiBRl tis cst ieee ttl Meee eee ati hte 8 28 Removing PRI sis ccceee voccicteevoduettadebenceeuees EAA ANANE E i t N AEAT Ea 8 29 Chapter 9 Customizing Demand Circuits Configuring Frame Relay Demand Circuits ccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneeesaeeeseneees 9 2 Modifying the Frame Relay Interface asssseseesssseesssrressesrnnesrrnnnesnnnnneernennnnnnennaeennnnnne 9 5 Modifying Frame Relay Service RecordS ssssseesseeeseeesseessisssiessrrsssrrssrrnssrnnsennnt 9 6 Adding Protocols to Frame Relay Demand Circuits 00 0 eee eee eereeeeeereeneeeees 9 8 Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Demand Circuits ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeneeeeees 9 10 Changing the Default Authentication Protocol PPP only ccssee
42. A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits Circuit Options Cancel OK Values Help Circuit Type Backup Pool ID Figure 10 2 Circuit Options Window 4 Select Primary for the Circuit Type parameter Site Manager Circuit Type parameter page A 77 5 Enter the ID of the backup pool that you want this circuit to use Site Manager Backup Pool ID parameter page A 57 6 Click on OK You return to the completed Primary Circuit Definition window Figure 10 3 117353 A Rev A 10 3 Configuring Dial Services Ohio PRIMARY Dore t Type Papa Lip Schedule Beckup Fool 10 Bakun Hie CHAP iriza Pime GHP Secret PAP Local IM Figure 10 3 Completed Primary Circuit Definition Window 7 Repeat this procedure for each primary circuit you want to add 10 4 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits Creating Frame Relay Backup Circuits for Multiple PVCs If your Frame Relay interface has multiple PVCs in the service record you need to back up the entire interface This is called link backup For link backup you must configure Frame Relay across the backup circuit You cannot use link and circuit backup over the same Frame Relay interface To configure a Frame Relay backup circuit 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay Site Manager displays the FR Primary Interface Definition window Figure 10 4
43. B channels The PRI Logical Lines window appears automatically Accept the default values Demand Pool Configuration Path Dialup gt Demand Pools Table B 10 Demand Pools Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 Pool ID 1 1 After entering a demand pool ID the Demand Lines Definition window appears automatically Click on either the MCT1 2 connector Router 1 or the ISDN1 connector Router 2 Site Manager automatically displays the ISDN Switch Configuration window Path Demand Lines Definition gt ISDN Switch Configuration Table B 11 ISDN Switch Configuration Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 Switch Type PRI 5ESS Nit The ISDN Logical Lines window appears next Accept the default values B 8 117353 A Rev A Demand Circuit Configuration Configuration Examples Once the demand pool is configured the next step is to configure demand circuits Path Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Table B 12 PPP Demand Circuits Parameters Parameter Router 1 MCT1 2 Router 2 ISDN1 CHAP Local Name BLN case sensitive ASN case sensitive CHAP Secret ISDN case sensitive ISDN case sensitive Connection Mode Default Collision Master Collision Slave Outgoing Phone List From the PPP Demand Circuits window click on Phone Out to open the Outgoing Phone List window Pa
44. Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Master Master Slave Determines which router initiates dialing to establish a backup connection if the primary circuit fails Accept the default Master if you want the router to initiate dialing The router at the other end must be set to Slave so that it waits until the master router initiates the call Only one router on the link can serve as the master router If both are set to Master they may try to initiate a call simultaneously resulting in a collision on the network If you change the Backup Mode parameter from Master to Slave Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Info window prompting you to make a caller resolution table entry for the circuit By requiring a table entry Site Manager ensures that you identify the remote master router The local router can then verify the master router s identity and accept the incoming calls Refer to the appropriate parameter descriptions for this window 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 7 A 58 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Frame Relay Interface Type Parameter Dial Backup Parameter Interface Type Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Intf Type gt FR Interface Slot lt n gt lt port gt Default Normal Options Normal Primary Shared Primary Secondary Function Specifies whether this leased circuit uses dial backup service For a standard leased
45. Bandwidth Type BChannel Aggregate Bandwidth 128K 2 64K Table C 15 Incoming Phone List Parameters Parameter Default Phone Number None Phone Ext SubAddr None Callback Demand Circuit Name None 117353 A Rev A C 9 Configuring Dial Services Table C 16 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Parameter Default Local Circuit None Caller Name None CHAP Secret Unsecured PAP Password Unsecured Local Group 0 C 10 117353 A Rev A Appendix D Ordering ISDN Lines in the United States This appendix provides information for ordering ISDN lines in the United States Ordering BRI Lines When ordering ISDN BRI lines for use in the United States note the following e Configure the B1 and B2 channels for data only e Configure the D channel for signaling only Table D 1 lists the parameters to set for the AT amp T SESS switch Table D 2 lists the parameters to set for the Northern Telecom DMS 100 switch Your phone company may ask you to provide this information when you order your BRI lines Table D 1 BRI Parameters for the AT amp T 5ESS Switch Parameter Value Notes Terminal Type A Number of CSD 2 Number of CSV Oor1 1 if an ISDN phone was connected to the S T bus Number of Call 1 Appearances Display is Y N No Ringing Idle Call Idle Default for terminal type A Appearances Autohold is Y N No Default for ter
46. Circuits cccccecceessseeeesesteeeeeeeees 1 28 117353 A Rev A V Specifying the Bandwidth Mode cccssceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeess 1 30 Specifying the Authentication Protocol cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesiaeeeeeneeees 1 32 Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines cccccecescceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseaeeeeenees 1 33 Creating an Outgoing Phone List cceceeceeceeeeeeeeee eect eeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeessaeeeseaeeeeaas 1 36 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only 0 eceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseneeeseas 1 38 Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table ccccccccesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeaas 1 40 What to Do Next arsena oan e E AR E EAA ee ede A E LA te 1 43 Chapter 2 Dial Services Overview Bay Networks Dial Services cc cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeseeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeeeneaeeeed 2 1 Network Access Methods and Services ccceseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeeseaeeeteneeeeaas 2 3 Dial on Demand Service eecccceecseeenceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeaaaeseeeeesaaeseeeeeeseeaeseeeeeeeee 2 4 Demand Lines and POOS inosia ar aaae AEE E S aR KREATA 2 5 How Demand Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together ccccceeseeeseteeeeeneeeeees 2 6 Demand Circuit ProtoCols orereta ionnan anea aaia aei aeaa iania a aan aiaa 2 7 Configuring Frame Relay to Work Optimally with Dial on
47. Circuits 5 seconds 0 to 1800 seconds Specifies the amount of time the client waits for a return call from the server During this time the client will not place an outgoing call to any other destination The delay gives the server time to return the initial call This parameter is available only if the Callback Mode parameter is set to one of the client options Enter the amount of time the client should wait for the server to call This value must be greater than the Callback Server Delay Time If you are dialing through a modem we recommend that you set this value greater than 45 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 55 A 36 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Authentication Protocol Parameters Demand Backup Bandwidth The authentication parameters are the same for demand backup and bandwidth circuits and they are located in each service s circuit configuration window Parameter CHAP Local Name Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default None Options Any text string maximum of 20 characters Function This name is part of the outbound call and it informs remote peer routers of the local router s identity For bandwidth on demand circui
48. Dial backup line DS0021A Figure 2 7 PPP Backup over an ISDN Network Link backup is a multiple circuit backup which means that the entire interface is backed up To back up all PVCs for a Frame Relay interface you configure Frame Relay across the backup circuit Figure 2 8 shows an example of link backup Failure point Central site router R2 Remote site router R1 Frame Relay network 77 T Frame Relay Group mode PVCs interface l N Me NI N l BRI PRI N 3 ISDN network Se ee Key Primary PVCs Backup PVCs DS0026A Figure 2 8 Link Backup for a Frame Relay Network 117353 A Rev A 2 15 Configuring Dial Services In Figure 2 8 if the Frame Relay link fails at router R1 the router activates a backup connection through the ISDN network then back through the Frame Relay network to the destination The backup connection to the Frame Relay network uses a different network interface and PVCs than the primary connection Once the primary line recovers and the Frame Relay switch responds to router R1 s DLCMI status requests router R1 terminates the backup connection Note A primary circuit cannot use link and circuit backup simultaneously Knowing When the Primary Line Fails Depending on the protocol for the primary and backup circuit the router determines that the primary circuit failed in one of the following ways No
49. Filters for Backup Configurations cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeses 10 12 Configuring Filters for Primary Secondary Interfaces ceceeeeeeeeeneeees 10 12 Configuring Filters for Primary Shared Interfaces cccsseeeeeesteeeeeeeees 10 13 Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Backup Circuits cccceceeeseeeseeeeeeetteeeeeneeees 10 14 Changing the Authentication Protocol for the Primary Circuit eese 10 14 Scheduling When the Backup Circuit Is Available cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeenaeeeees 10 15 Removing PPP or Frame Relay Backup Service ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeenes 10 17 Chapter 11 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeesaeeseaes 11 2 Changing the Authentication Protocol cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeaaeseeeeeeenaeeneaes 11 3 Monitoring Congestion on the Bandwidth or Demand Circuit ccceceesseeeeeeenees 11 4 Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots 0 ccccceccecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeseneees 11 7 Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots For BAP cceceeecsseeeeeeeeessteeeteeees 11 8 Modifying Multilink Fragmentation 2 0 0 0 eeccceeeecneeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaaes 11 9 Enabling BAP for Bandwidth on Demand Service cccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeenes 11 10 Removing Bandwidth on Demand Servic
50. Phone List None Available callback demand circuits This parameter is only for callback service When the Callback Mode parameter value is Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID this parameter specifies the circuit that the server uses to call back the client Click on the Values button Site Manager displays a list of available callback circuits Select the circuit you want and click on OK 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 7 1 9 117353 A Rev A A 101 Configuring Dial Services Caller Resolution Table Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Caller Name Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password None Any text string maximum of 20 characters This name is part of the incoming call and informs the local router of the remote router s identity Enter a text string no longer than 20 characters that identifies a remote router If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol you must enter the remote router s CHAP name If you configure PAP you must enter the remote router s PAP ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 2 CHAP Secret Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password Unsecured Any text string maximum of 20 characters Specifies the CHAP Secret you assign to this interface The CHAP secret is
51. Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync or Async Line Media Type Raise DTR Raise DTR V25bis Hayes Specifies the signaling method that the router uses to interact with the modem Choose one of the following Raise DTR A signaling method that enables access to the network by preprogramming the destination phone numbers into the dial device Raise DTR signaling works with any of these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 V 25bis A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Using V 25bis the dial device can support dial connections to multiple destinations V 25bis signaling works with any of these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 Hayes A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Hayes signaling is for asynchronous PPP and works with RS 422 and V 34 interfaces To use Hayes as the line media type you must also specify a modem initialization string The router sends this string to the modem to initiate a call 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 54 117353 A Rev A A 5 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default O
52. Press at the following numbers e Phone U S Canada 888 422 9773 e Phone International 510 490 4752 e FAX U S Canada and International 510 498 2609 The Bay Networks Press catalog is available on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com Library GenMisc Bay Networks publications are available on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com Library tpubs xxviii 117353 A Rev A Bay Networks Customer Service You can purchase a support contract from your Bay Networks distributor or authorized reseller or directly from Bay Networks Services For information About This Guide about or to purchase a Bay Networks service contract either call your local Bay Networks field sales office or one of the following numbers Region Telephone number Fax number United States and Canada 800 2LANWAN then enter Express Routing Code ERC 290 when prompted to purchase or renew a service contract 508 916 8880 direct 508 916 3514 Europe 33 4 92 96 69 66 33 4 92 96 69 96 Asia Pacific 61 2 9927 8888 61 2 9927 8899 Latin America 561 988 7661 561 988 7550 Information about customer service is also available on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Bay Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for a
53. Recovery Threshold and is not considered congested 6 Click on OK to save your changes 117353 A Rev A Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots Table 11 3 explains how to change the monitor parameters from the Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window You can also edit these parameters from the Bandwidth On Demand Pools window as follows 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Pools window Figure 11 3 GO Pool if Figure 11 3 Bandwidth On Demand Pools Window 3 Click on Priority Site Manager displays the Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool window Figure 11 4 117353 A Rev A 11 7 Configuring Dial Services Preferridt Dandwiodth Slot Roaserved Bane ich Slot Figure 11 4 Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool Window 4 Enter a new value for each slot parameter Be sure to read the parameter descriptions because it is important to set these parameters correctly Site Manager Preferred Bandwidth Slot parameter page A 82 Site Manager Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameter page A 83 The slot parameters that you specify affect all circuits in the pool Also Site Manager applies these values to the same parameter in the Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window refer to Figure 11 2 If you change the lines in a band
54. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information BRI Subaddresses The ITU T specifies that one S T interface can have eight different TE devices for example routers However the service provider may assign only one phone number for the customer side of the local loop To determine the specific destination of the call the router uses a subaddress Each router has an assigned subaddress for which it will accept calls The subaddress must be part of the incoming call setup message sent to the router Based on the subaddress the router determines if it is the intended receiver If not the router ignores the call Floating B Option for the AN and ANH If your ISDN service provider only offers 2B D service the floating B option for the AN and ANH enables you to use only one B channel for dial service applications Floating B is an alternative if you cannot purchase 1B D service If your service provider offered only 2B D service the AN and ANH CPU would use two of its four serial communications controllers SCCs for the two B channels one SCC for the Ethernet link and one SCC for a synchronous link Using the floating B option you use only one B channel at a time freeing up an SCC for an additional synchronous link 4 12 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services You can use floating B if your network integrates an ISDN dial backup connection with network devices that send protocol traffic such as SDLC or X 25 T
55. Rev A A 99 Configuring Dial Services Incoming Phone List Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Incoming Phone Number Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers gt Incoming Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Up to 25 numeric characters Specifies the telephone number of the remote router Enter the telephone number of the remote router Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 7 1 3 Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers gt Incoming Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Up to 25 numeric characters Specifies a subaddress for a main phone number that further identifies the remote router This subaddress is useful when you have several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to that destination site An incoming call must specify the number and the subaddress to reach a specific router Enter the extension subaddress Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 7 1 4 A 100 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Callback Demand Circuit Name Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers gt Incoming
56. Rev A 9 3 Configuring Dial Services Lhores Pid mer Dem tF Sochechule oo Protea Gt Applu Value Helpe a anari Pool ID Force Take Down Forces Dial Imactivity Iisa Feet Man Hever Mamy Figure 9 3 Completed FR Demand Circuits Window 5 Repeat step 4 for each demand circuit you want to add 6 To modify the circuit defaults refer to Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Demand Circuits on page 9 10 7 Click on Done to return to the Demand Pools window 9 4 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits Modifying the Frame Relay Interface Once you configure a Frame Relay demand circuit Site Manager configures the Frame Relay interface which you can modify The interface parameters define the Frame Relay characteristics of the circuit not the demand circuit To modify the Frame Relay interface 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window refer to Figure 9 1 3 Click on FR Circuits Site Manager displays the FR Demand Circuits window refer to Figure 9 3 4 Click on Demand Intf Site Manager displays the FR Demand Interface List window Figure 9 4 FR Service Contred Memes Tipa felines krena Lengel Folling Imarwal Full Enquiry Ernterval Figure 9 4 FR Demand Interface List Window 5 Modify the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A
57. Seeret Pear Local If PAP Flare ita Figure 1 22 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Window 3 Highlight a circuit and click on Cct Type Site Manager displays the Circuit Options window Figure 1 23 Cirtnit Tiji Handi dihon Pool mM Tene both Pirie Figure 1 23 Circuit Options Window 117353 A Rev A 1 29 Configuring Dial Services 4 Select Bandwidth on Demand for the Circuit Type parameter Site Manager Circuit Type parameter page A 77 5 Enter the ID of the bandwidth pool you want this circuit to use Site Manager Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID parameter page A 80 6 Keep this window open and go to the next section Specifying the Bandwidth Mode Specifying the Bandwidth Mode The bandwidth mode determines whether the router serves as the congestion monitor The level of congestion instructs the router when to provide additional circuits to carry data across the network To configure the bandwidth mode 1 Scroll down the Circuit Options window to see the Bandwidth Mode parameter 2 Select a bandwidth mode Non Monitor is the default If this router is set to Non Monitor the peer must be set to Monitor Site Manager Bandwidth Mode parameter page A 78 Note the following for the Bandwidth Mode parameter e If you accepted the default Non Monitor Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Info window which you use to enter th
58. Selecting this value also prevents you from configuring the other monitor parameters Multilink Monitor Site Manager supplies this value if the Bandwidth Mode is Monitor It enables PPP multilink and tells the router to monitor congestion If you configure bandwidth on demand service to aid a demand circuit and this parameter is set to Monitor ensure that the demand circuit s Connection Mode parameter is set to Collision Master or Collision Slave Dynamic Monitor Select this option for BAP connections to allocate bandwidth This option lets the router function as the monitor or non monitor router based on the direction of the call The router who initiates the call is the monitor and the router who receives the call is the non monitor If your router is communicating with a non Bay Networks router select this option If your router is communicating with a Bay Networks router that uses software prior to Version 11 01 do not select this option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 50 A 80 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters BOD Exam Period Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 10 0 10 second intervals 5 to 200 in 0 10 second intervals Indicates
59. Serial Type parameter A 4 X X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter A 24 X 25 over the D channel configuring 4 19 8 20 description 4 18 disabling 8 21
60. Using Schedules to Manage Standby Circuit Availability 0 cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 5 6 Configuring Multiple Time of Day Schedules 0 0 eee cece eeeeee eect eeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeeeees 5 6 Callback eeii iraniana a adelante iain 5 8 Configuring Callback ccccccccceeesceeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeesaaeeseeeeeesaeeeseaeeesnaeeseeaeeees 5 9 Modifying the Callback Mode Parameter ccccccceseeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeetsaeeetenes 5 10 Callback and the Circuits Connection Mode ccccccccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeetes 5 10 Using the Incoming Phone List for Callback Service ssassn 5 11 Demand Circuit Group m dn sausainiai a ara aa aa aa ia EA S daN Eaa 5 11 Demand Pools and Demand Circuit Group cceeceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeaes 5 11 Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Groups cccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 5 12 Protocol Configuration for Demand Circuit Groups ccceeeeceeeereeeeeteeteees 5 13 Using Demand Circuit Groups with Dial Backup Service seeen 5 13 RADIUS Authentication Services for Demand Circuit Groups ceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 14 Managing Broadcast Traffic over Demand Circuits ccccceessseceeeeenteeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaaes 5 14 Static ROUTES ssi roth cherie et PSL eh eee a ee ee a 5 15 Dial OptimiZed ROUTING riisiin iaai aiai ei i a i aia 5 15 What Happens When You Enable Dial Optimized Routing ceeeeee 5 16 Enabling Dial Optimized Routing for
61. When you purchase this service the phone number of the caller is placed in the call setup message Your network switch must also support caller ID After placing the initial call the client waits for a return call from the server A user specified parameter determines how long the client waits for a response During this time the client will not place an outgoing call to any other destination To set the callback configuration parameters refer to Chapter 9 117353 A Rev A 5 9 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the Callback Mode Parameter If you modify the Callback Mode parameter be aware of the following The server or client delay time resets If you change from a server mode to a client mode or from a client mode to a server mode the associated callback delay time resets to its default value For example if you change the callback mode from Server to Client and the Callback Server Delay Time was set to 5 seconds this time resets to the default value of 0 Conversely if you change the callback mode from Client One Charge to Server One Charge the Callback Client Delay Time resets to its default value of 5 seconds Site Manager prompts you to enable incoming call filtering If you select Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID Site Manager prompts you to enable the Incoming Filter parameter For these two callback modes the router uses incoming call filtering to verify that the client is an authorized call
62. a a aaaea E E EE Af Doia Ae ee IH Phone Weem Este ubide 227 l rut ET Deloria EnA E Heip Figure 12 7 Completed Incoming Phone List Window for ISDN 8 Click on Done when you finish entering phone numbers Modifying the Incoming Phone List To modify the incoming phone list 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Incoming Phone List Site Manager displays the Incoming Phone List window refer to Figure 12 7 3 Enter a new incoming phone number and extension if applicable Site Manager Incoming Phone Number parameter page A 100 Site Manager Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr parameter page A 100 4 Click on Apply to ensure that the router accepts the changes The new phone number appears in the list 5 To remove a phone number select it in the list and click on Delete Site Manager removes the phone number 6 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 12 11 Configuring Dial Services Creating a Local Phone List ISDN only For bandwidth on demand connections that use BRI and PRI lines and BAP negotiation you must configure the local phone list To create a local phone list 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Lines window Figure 12 8 ISIN Local Phone Lines Slot 4 Module 3 ISDN1 Slot 4 Module 2 ISDN1 Done iLocal Phones Figure 12 8 ISDN L
63. a bandwidth pool for this circuit and this router is the monitor router you can select Collision Master or Collision Slave 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 28 A 28 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Auto Demand Termination Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disabled Enabled Disabled For applications where there are two paths to the same destination this parameter allows the router to automatically terminate a failed demand circuit and send the data over an alternate path to the destination Note that the router does not terminate the circuit until it reaches the maximum number of connection attempts which you specify in the Retry Max parameter Enable this parameter when the router continues to advertise a static route over a demand circuit but it cannot establish a connection over that circuit The router terminates the demand circuit which notifies the routing protocol that the static routes associated with this circuit are no longer active The router then uses the alternate path Select Enable if you have an alternate path to a remote destination and you want to ensure that if the demand circuit fails the router terminates the circuit and sends data over the alternate path
64. asynchronous communication in the Async Hayes Modem Interface window You can access this window only if the WAN Serial Interface Type is Asynchronous and the Line Media Type is Hayes Refer to Chapter 1 to learn how to set these two parameters Refer to Chapter 8 for instructions on modifying your modem configuration The BayStack ARN router has an optional V 34 Modem Adapter Module that requires you to configure an AT initialization command whether the interface is synchronous or asynchronous RADIUS Accounting Services As networks grow to accommodate more remote dial in users network security network use and billing become more difficult to manage Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS centralizes security and accounting information improving security and providing a solution that adapts to the changing needs of the remote user and service providers RADIUS operates between a client and a server The router is the RADIUS client RADIUS accounting requires that you configure one of the three dial services The dial service enables the router to activate a dial up connection for RADIUS calls Dial up calls are active for a limited time period therefore the RADIUS server can measure the duration of the call and count the number of packets transmitted to determine billing charges To learn more about RADIUS refer to Configuring RADIUS For accounting services you can configure either a dial service or RADIUS first Th
65. can use Raise DTR or V 25bis signaling for modem connections The asynchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling for modem connections Hayes signaling requires that you use AT modem commands to send dialing instructions to the modem The ISDN lines use ISDN signaling for network connections Lines in a bandwidth pool may operate at different speeds PPP multilink the protocol that the router uses for bandwidth on demand circuits can manage lines of varying speed distribute traffic across lines and monitor traffic The router may also use BAP to manage bandwidth allocation 117353 A Rev A 2 23 Configuring Dial Services How Lines When a leased line or bundle becomes congested the router searches for an available dial up line from its associated bandwidth on demand pool Lines in a bandwidth on demand pool can reside on any slot but each secondary circuit can use only three slots To determine the order in which the router searches the slots you designate each slot as preferred or reserved The router uses the preferred slot first If there are no available lines the router uses the reserved slot If there are still no available lines the router automatically uses the local slot which is the slot containing the first leased line that was activated Once the router finds a line it dials the destination using a phone number from the user configured outgoing phone list Pools and Circuits Work Togethe
66. circuit the router does not provide a backup circuit if it fails For a primary circuit the router provides a backup circuit Instructions Select one of the following options Normal Indicates that there is no backup service for this circuit Primary Shared Enables backup service and instructs the router that the backup circuit should inherit the primary circuit s configuration If you select this option Site Manager displays a dialog box asking if you want the primary circuit s PVCs duplicated on the backup circuit Select Yes to create a duplicate set of PVCs with the same DLCI numbers as the primary circuit This is useful if you want the same DLCI numbers going to the same destination Select No to configure unique PVCs for the backup circuit This option is useful if you do not want to back up all of the primary s PVCs By limiting the number of backup PVCs you can reduce line costs Primary Secondary Enables backup service and instructs the router that the backup circuit should use its own configuration The backup circuit does not adopt the primary circuit s configuration MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 33 117353 A Rev A A 59 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Intf Type gt FR Interface Slot lt n gt lt port gt No
67. configure the caller resolution table Select Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table Path Caller Resolution Table gt Caller Name and Secret Password Table B 16 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 Caller Name ASN BLN CHAP Secret ISDN ISDN Click on OK Site Manager displays the Local Circuit List window Path Caller Name and Secret Password gt Local Circuit List window The configured circuits are listed in the Local Circuit List window Choose the demand circuit you created earlier Local Phone Number Configuration Finally configure each router s phone number Path Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Lines window Click on Local Phones Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window Path ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Phone Number Table B 17 Local Phone Number Parameters Paraneier Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 Directory Number 4366666 4364444 SPID N A 50843644440000 Note No SPID is needed for a PRI line A SPID is needed for a BRI line using an NII switch 117353 A Rev A B 11 Configuring Dial Services Dial Backup with PPP on the Primary Line Figure B 3 shows Routers 1 and 2 connected via a synchronous line running PPP You designate this synchronous connection as a primary connection so if it fails the router provides a dial backup connection
68. configure the interface For ISDN lines the interface is defined before adding the line to the pool 3 Designate the ISDN switch type Switch Type x x x ISDN only 4 Specify a local phone number Directory Number x x x ISDN only Service Provider ID SPID for United States and Canada only 5 Add a demand backup or bandwidth circuit Pool ID x x x 6 Specify the leased line connection type Circuit Type Xx x Backup Pool ID x Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID x 7 Specify authentication protocol information CHAP Local Name x x x CHAP is the default protocol CHAP Secret 7 x 7 8 Specify the circuit connection mode Demand Connection Mode x Backup Mode x Bandwidth Mode x 9 Add protocols IP Address x This chapter uses IP as an example IP Adjacent Host 10 Create an outgoing phone list Outgoing Phone Number x x x Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr 11 Set up the caller resolution table Caller Name x x x CHAP Secret a Abbreviations DOD dial on demand DB dial backup BOD bandwidth on demand If you need to refer to a parameter description click on Help in the Site Manager window or refer to Appendix A of this manual 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Configuring Line Pools A line pool is a group of one or more lines that reside on the router slots You identify each pool by assigning a pool ID The lines are the physical connections over which the circuits transmit and receive data Each line can connect to a modem
69. data structure that allows flexible grouping and characterization of PVCs Each record can contain one or more PVCs The router creates the first service record automatically when you select Frame Relay as the WAN protocol This is the default service record If a PVC is not included in a configured service record it uses the default service record To modify the default service record or add service records 1 Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay Site Manager displays the FR Primary Interface Definition window refer to Figure 10 6 2 Click on Backup Def Site Manager displays the FR Backup Interface window refer to Figure 10 7 3 Click on Services Site Manager displays the Frame Relay Backup Service List window Figure 10 8 Apply Walis Figure 10 8 Frame Relay Backup Service List Window 117353 A Rev A 10 9 Configuring Dial Services 4 Site Manager supplies the service name Modify it only if you are sure the new name is unique for the router Site Manager Service Name parameter page A 71 5 Click on PVCs to configure PVCs for the service record otherwise go to step 9 Site Manager displays the Frame Relay Backup PVC List window Figure 10 9 Circuit State Set Multicast Heia Potio Lomgestion Control Cire Licey Timar Congestion Counter Figure 10 9 Frame Relay Backup PVC List Window 6 Click on Add to add a PVC to the service record Site Man
70. decreases the router deactivates the secondary lines one at a time A router on one side of the connection monitors byte counts for the data it sends and receives This router is called the monitor router The monitor router uses these byte counts along with bandwidth on demand monitor parameters to determine when to activate additional lines for more bandwidth The router then uses all the available lines in the bundle to send data across the network The router on the other side of the connection is the non monitor router The non monitor router cannot activate additional dial up lines If you configure BAP for ISDN connections the non monitor router has a more active role in determining how additional lines are activated for more bandwidth Refer to Chapter 7 for more information about BAP Bandwidth on Demand Lines and Pools A bandwidth on demand pool is a collection of dial up lines that a congested leased line demand line or multilink bundle can use Each bandwidth on demand pool is identified by a bandwidth on demand pool ID In a bandwidth on demand pool you can combine asynchronous synchronous or ISDN lines in a single pool Lines in a backup pool can connect to a modem directly to a PSTN using the ARN with the V 34 Modem Adapter Module or directly to an ISDN network using a router with integral ISDN capability You can combine asynchronous synchronous and ISDN interfaces in a single pool The synchronous interfaces
71. demand pool The number of circuits in the demand circuit group must be less than or equal to the number of lines in the demand pool If you change the number of lines in a demand pool you must increase or decrease the number of demand circuits in the group accordingly When the router activates a line from the demand pool the circuits in a demand circuit group also become available The router does not bring up the circuits until it receives an incoming call Demand circuit groups can only receive calls 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services A circuit group can use more than one demand pool This enables the router to use one configuration for circuits across the router s slots because demand pools cannot use lines from different slots Each demand circuit group has its own ID This number is distinct from the demand pool ID that identifies the line pool Both individual demand circuits and demand circuit groups can use the same demand pool Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Groups Like individual demand circuits demand circuit groups use either PAP or CHAP to identify who is calling the router and to determine which circuit group to activate You can enable either of these authentication protocols on only one side of the link one way authentication or on both sides of the link two way authentication For information about authentication refer to Chapter 4 Depending on a network s security requirements each remote
72. fails the backup line attempts to connect using one of the other telephone numbers For V 25bis calls the router redials the same phone number until its retry attempts reach the maximum retry count that you specify in the modem parameters If the router cannot make a connection using the current phone number it tries the next number in its phone list It continues trying until it has gone through all of the numbers or it connects successfully For ISDN calls the router sends a call setup message for each number in the phone list If the router cannot make a connection using the current phone number it tries the next number in its phone list It continues trying until it has gone through all of the numbers or it connects successfully Terminating the Backup Connection The router terminates the backup circuit once it restores the primary circuit the backup circuit fails or the configured time period for the backup circuit has expired Once the router restores the primary circuit it verifies that the backup circuit is no longer active If the backup is still active the router terminates it 2 20 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Bandwidth on Demand Service Bandwidth on demand service lets you configure additional dial up lines for e A congested leased line e A congested multilink bundle which is a set of links between two peer routers e A congested dial on demand line Note Refer to Bandwidth on Demand Service f
73. interface PRI implementation on router 4 13 multirate 4 15 number of channels 3 3 overview 3 3 rate adaption 4 16 router as a TE device 4 10 signaling support for countries 4 14 transmission rates 3 3 using fixed number of channels 4 14 Priority parameter A 6 protocol prioritization for bandwidth on demand 7 7 for dial on demand 5 20 protocols for demand circuits 1 23 protocols for Frame Relay demand circuits 9 8 public switched network types used for dial services 2 2 public switched telephone network how router connects 2 3 publications ordering xxviii Q Q 921 3 3 Q 931 3 5 R R reference point description 3 6 RADIUS accounting description 4 8 RADIUS authentication description 5 14 Raise DTR signaling electrical interfaces 2 3 A 5 rate adaption for ISDN calls 4 16 Redial Count parameter A 7 Remote Pool Type parameter A 96 Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameter A 83 Retry Delay parameter A 7 A 28 117353 A Rev A Retry Max parameter A 27 Ring Indicator parameter A 7 RIP Enable parameter A 55 Routing Information Protocol RIP broadcast timers 5 18 triggered updates 5 18 Routing Update Hold Time parameter A 31 S S reference point description 3 6 S T interface 4 10 secondary configuration for Frame Relay backup 2 19 secondary lines activating for bandwidth 2 24 for congested bandwidth on demand circuits 2 23 location in router slot 2 11 2 24 S
74. interface on the router IP routing protocols use the numbered address to advertise the local router to remote routers For more information about associated IP addresses refer to Configuring IP Services Enter the address of any numbered interface on the router If you are running RIP over the unnumbered interface and are using a subnet address as the associated address the local and remote associated addresses should have the same network number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 6 A 54 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters RIP Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables RIP for this interface Select Enable to enable RIP for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 7 OSPF Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables OSPF for this interface Select Enable to enable OSPF for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 8 IPX Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables IPX for this i
75. is congested Accept the default Normal if you do not want secondary circuits available for leased circuits Select Bandwidth on Demand to provide bandwidth on demand service for a congested single circuit or multilink circuit Site Manager lists the circuit type next to the circuit name If you select Non Monitor for the Bandwidth Mode parameter Site Manager will not allow you to enter values for the CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret PAP Local ID and PAP Password parameters These parameters are part of configuring the router as congestion monitor 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 3 Bandwidth On Demand Pool ID Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options None 1 to 255 Identifies the bandwidth pool associated with the bandwidth circuit If you select Bandwidth on Demand for the Circuit Type parameter enter the ID of the bandwidth pool that this circuit should use If you select Normal for the Circuit Type parameter Site Manager does not allow you to enter a pool ID You must create a pool before you can specify a circuit as a bandwidth circuit The router first creates the circuit as a normal circuit See Chapter 9 for instructions on creating line pools 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 117353 A Rev A A 77 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Bandwidth Mode Dialup gt Bandw
76. network and an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Figure 2 1 ga Modem Switched 56 Kb s network DSU CSU Dial up line Lo aN Terminal adapter Router Up line You only need a terminal adapter if your router does not have built in ISDN capability If your router has an ISDN BRI module or an MCT1 or MCE1 link module installed along with ISDN software you can connect to an ISDN network directly DS0005A Figure 2 1 Example of Dial Access to a Switched Telephone Network 2 2 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Network Access Methods and Services The router initiates monitors and terminates dial up connections using a modem or ISDN terminal adapter that supports Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling or a router with a built in ISDN interface connected directly to an ISDN network If the router has internal ISDN capability you do not need external dial devices Note For BRI service you need a network terminator 1 NT1 to connect to an ISDN network With the exception of the ARN the router s ISDN BRI Module does not include an internal NT1 so you or your service provider must supply it All three dial services enable the router to access a switched network as follows e Integrated ISDN capability Provides a BRI or PRI for digital connectivity from the router to the destinatio
77. not consider LQR LCP and periodic CHAP messages as data so they do not reset the time This parameter and the Inactivity Mode parameter determine how inactivity is monitored Once the router concludes that there is no data activity it disconnects the line Specify a time limit between 1 and 99 999 999 seconds that the router waits before deactivating the switched connection If you want the connection to remain active at all times enter 99 999 999 The connection remains active unless the network deactivates the connection If the connection is deactivated the router redials the same number when the next packet is ready for transmission You can also manually force the router to establish a connection if a line is available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 15 Retry Max Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 2 1 to 10 Specifies the number of attempts that the router makes to establish the circuit The router tries all of the phone numbers in the outgoing phone list for a given line If no connection is made and there is still data to send the router increments the retry count then retries these numbers on the next line in the pool Enter the number of times you want the router to try to establish the circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 25 117353 A Rev A A 27 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions
78. number to dial to activate a connection Defines call control packets that enable the router to add or remove bandwidth effectively BAP has the following advantages Ensures effective use of bandwidth Allows the Bay Networks routers to work together or with other vendors routers Minimizes the configuration of outgoing phone numbers because only one number is required The peer passes other phone numbers to the router which the router then uses to make calls Uses call requests to determine whether bandwidth is available which saves the cost of placing a call to find out this information Call requests are BAP protocol messages and are unrelated to ISDN call requests When the router sends a BAP call request it uses active lines so there is no call attempt and no phone charge Ensures that both routers agree to activate and deactivate the lines so there are no allocation conflicts The Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol BACP is the control protocol It negotiates the use of BAP enabling BAP data to be exchanged between the peer routers If BACP negotiation fails the router will not use BAP for bandwidth on demand service 7 4 117353 A Rev A Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes How BAP Works Figure 7 2 shows BAP negotiation between two routers Router A Router B Monitor Non monitor Call request _ gt gt lt Call response which includes 508555123
79. or Intf Type Site Manager displays the Circuit Options window refer to Figure 10 2 or the FR Interface window refer to Figure 10 5 Modify one of the following parameters e For PPP change the Circuit Type parameter to Normal Site Manager Circuit Type parameter page A 57 e For Frame Relay change the Interface Type parameter to Normal Site Manager Interface Type parameter page A 59 Site Manager asks you to confirm the change then removes the backup circuit and treats the leased circuit as a regular circuit Click on OK Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 10 17 Chapter 11 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits This chapter describes how to modify the bandwidth on demand configuration for your network To enable bandwidth on demand service you can do the following e Designate a single leased circuit or leased multilink circuit as a bandwidth on demand circuit e Associate a dial on demand circuit with a bandwidth on demand pool If any of these circuits becomes congested the router provides up to 29 additional dial up circuits to relieve congestion for a total of 30 circuits You should have already set up a bandwidth on demand pool and circuit in Chapter 1 Table 11 1 lists the terminology that Site Manager and this manual use to refer to circuits in a bandwidth on demand configuration Table 11 1 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service Type of Ci
80. or directly to an ISDN network using a router with integral ISDN A line pool can have a combination of synchronous and asynchronous interface types The steps for creating line pools are the same for all three dial services The steps for adding modem lines Raise DTR V 25bis and Hayes and ISDN lines to a pool are different Refer to the appropriate section for instructions e Creating Line Pools with Modem Lines e Creating Line Pools with ISDN Lines on page 1 11 Creating Line Pools with Modem Lines To configure line pools with Raise DTR V 25bis and Hayes interfaces 1 From the Configuration Manager window select Dialup gt Demand Pools Backup Pools or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Figure 1 1 Configuration Kode Toca H a a ia 1 iota FILI oP tempeh ueri 014 i Backin brik Mise HIN Version 11 00 f Denir ipii 0 h e AGAN 120 ha ai Saal ye eo Renmrou Module MALE Figure 1 1 Dialup Menu from the Configuration Manager Window 117353 A Rev A 1 5 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager displays the Pools window Figure 1 2 Note To avoid repetition this section shows only the demand configuration windows The backup and bandwidth windows are similar but may have different titles Cenand Pool ID Figure 1 2 Demand Pools Window 2 Click on Add Site Manager displays the Pool Configuration window Figure 1 3 Figure 1 3 Demand Pool Configuration Window 3
81. out of band signaling call setup information does not interfere with the data you send and the result is more accurate communication The D channel also provides what the ITU T formerly CCITT defines as supplementary services These are extra services that you can purchase from your ISDN provider for example calling line ID which enables you to determine the phone number of the incoming call Link Access Procedure D To perform call setup and signaling functions between your equipment and the ISDN network the ITU T defined recommendation Q 921 which outlines Link Access Procedure D LAPD the data link layer protocol for the D channel ISDN uses LAPD to establish a switched connection on a particular B channel The B channel then allows data to travel between the two end points of that connection LAPD transmits information in frames The fields in a LAPD frame contain addresses control and frame check sequence information The address and control information comprise the LAPD header which sequences the packets and keeps them in the right order The frame check sequence allows the receiver of a frame to detect any errors that may have occurred during transmission 117353 A Rev A 3 3 Configuring Dial Services Unlike other data link layer protocols LAPD can handle multiple users on the same multiaccess interface Figure 3 3 shows a LAPD frame Opening flag Frame check sequence Closing flag DS0009A Figure 3
82. over the D Channel The BRI Interface Configuration window defines the signaling over the D channel In most cases the defaults for BRI will work for your network however you can edit the parameters To edit the BRI 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on a configured ISDN connector Site Manager displays the ISDN Dialup window Figure 8 6 Chores dit O Gran Lhe levie fil Pp Lig Figure 8 6 ISDN Dialup Window 3 Click on Edit D Chan Site Manager displays the BRI Interface Configuration window Figure 8 7 8 12 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Arropa e LAPD ATi Bal T3 Tiles ERI T Timer EE A Dumal lehull BAT Line Tis 5 20 ovar ISDN D Oana TEI Tupa for 75 over IHW TEI Vaiia for X35 over THW Figure 8 7 BRI Interface Configuration Window 4 Edit the BRI parameters according to the parameter descriptions in Appendix A 5 Click on OK 6 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 13 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the MCT1 and MCE1 Port Configurations The defaults for the port parameters work for most configurations however you can modify the physical interface of the MCT1 and MCE ports as follows 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector Site Manager displays the PRI Logical Lines window Figure 8 8 Figure 8 8 PRI Logical Lines Window 3 Click on Port Details Site Manager displays the Port Param
83. router activates additional lines to relieve congestion Although Site Manager provides default values for the monitor parameters edit them for your network applications If the network is critical to your operations and you want to ensure expedient data transmission customize your threshold values so that even with moderate congestion the router activates additional lines Remember to account for data compression which will also relieve congestion over a line Also the cost of additional lines may determine how often you want the router to activate the lines To configure the monitor parameters 1 Select Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 11 1 2 Click on Options Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window Figure 11 2 11 4 117353 A Rev A Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Meals elpas Babak dta alamet Poot E C PPP Circuit Hode HULTILIHE DNTTOR Mt teas Period HD puli Caress lat Wit Periods To Fail Preferred fendsidth Slot Rerervier Blo itn Sial Hozieus Linc BOD Remie Thresh ld BOD Primis to Recirear Figure 11 2 Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Window 3 Enter the bandwidth pool ID of the pool that the circuit should use Site Manager BOD Pool ID parameter page A 79 4 Verify that the PPP Circuit Mode parameter is set to Multilin
84. router can have a unique CHAP name or PAP ID or they can use the same name For each remote caller using a unique name or ID you assign a demand circuit group in the caller resolution table referred to as the local group in Site Manager The remote callers may use the same local group When the router authenticates an incoming call it receives the caller s name or ID in the CHAP challenge or PAP authenticate request message The router verifies the caller s identity then looks up the assigned local group in the table From this group the router selects an available circuit and activates the unnumbered protocol configuration over that circuit To simplify configuration the caller resolution table may contain the same PAP ID or CHAP name for all remote routers in the network In this case the table has only one entry consisting of the caller name and the local group A router configured with demand circuit groups does not initiate connections for the group the remote side of the connection must place the call first Consequently you do not need to configure the CHAP local name and secret or the PAP ID and password for a call request Note The caller resolution table cannot contain individual demand circuits and demand circuit groups for the same caller name 5 12 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes For added network security each remote router can have a unique PAP ID or CHAP name but use the same de
85. services Use Site Manager to edit any of the parameter defaults Table C 1 Line Pool Parameters Parameter Default Demand Pool ID None Backup Pool ID None Bandwidth On Demand Pool ID None WAN Serial Interface Type Sync Table C 2 Line Media Type Parameters Parameter Default Line Media Type Raise DTR Cable Type RS232 Priority 1 Modem Command String None 117353 A Rev A C 1 Configuring Dial Services Table C 3 Modem Interface Parameters Parameter Default Retry Delay 3 seconds Redial Count 3 attempts Ring Indicator Enable Debug Mode Disable Modem Type Custom Modem Init String AT amp F Modem Command String None Speaker Volume Medium Speaker Control On For Call No of Rings to Answer 1 V 34 Modem Parameters Expert Config Disabled Modem Config String None Modem Factory Defaults Enabled Originate Answer Originate Phone Number None Set Pulse Tone Dial Default Tone Table C 4 Port Application Mode Parameters Parameter Default Port Application Mode BRI Dialup 2B D Port Application Mode PRI NonPRI 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Parameter Defaults Table C 5 Logical Lines Parameter Parameter Default MTU Size 1600 bytes Table C 6 ISDN Switch Parameters Parameter Default Switch Type BRI NETS3 or PRI Net 5 Incoming Filt
86. the default Multiple 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 12 117353 A Rev A A 97 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Channel Bandwidth Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List BChannel BChannel Multirate Determines whether this call uses multirate service This parameter is only applicable for PRI on an MCT1 or QMCT1 Link Module If you purchased multirate service from your service provider select Multirate Otherwise accept the default BChannel 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 13 Aggregate Bandwidth Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List
87. the hot standby circuit This is the outgoing side of the connection e Configure one side of the connection to receive calls the standby circuit This is the incoming side of the connection Note If the standby circuit is part of a bandwidth on demand configuration the outgoing side should be the monitor router and the incoming side should be the non monitor router e If you configure routing protocols on the standby circuit the Inactivity Timeout parameter does not work Once the router brings up the standby circuit the routing protocols keep the connection active e Configure the Time of Day schedules and the failback timers only on the hot standby side of the connection e Use CHAP or PAP as the authentication protocol for the circuit e Ifyou want to use unnumbered interfaces configure them on the outgoing hot standby circuit and configure unnumbered demand circuit groups on the incoming standby circuit To configure standby circuits refer to Chapter 9 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Balancing Traffic between a Primary Circuit and a Hot Standby Circuit Once a hot standby circuit is active the routing protocol activates and finds an alternative route to the destination When the primary circuit recovers and resumes data transmission the routing protocol deactivates This is referred to as a failback to the primary circuit You can control the failback to the primary circuit manuall
88. the names of remote callers Router A calls Router B When Router A makes the call it places its local CHAP name Branch_A and CHAP secret in the CHAP challenge message Router B s caller resolution table shows Branch_A assigned to Circuit 5 the connection to Router A When Router B receives the call it looks in its table confirms Router A s CHAP name referred to as the Caller Name in the table and CHAP secret and activates Circuit 5 Conversely when Router B calls Router A it places its local CHAP name Branch_B in the CHAP challenge message Router A looks in its table verifies that Router B is an authorized caller and brings up Circuit 27 the connection to Router B PAP is similar to CHAP but PAP uses a PAP ID and password as part of the identification process The calling router places its PAP ID and password in the authenticate request to the called router The called router first looks in the caller resolution table to find the PAP ID referred to as the Caller Name in the table If the router finds the PAP ID it then checks the table for the password associated with the ID and compares it to the password in the authenticate request If the passwords match the router brings up the circuit To configure the caller resolution table refer to Chapter 13 For more information about CHAP names and PAP IDs see Configuring PPP Services 117353 A Rev A 4 5 Configuring Dial Services Asynchronous PPP Asynch
89. to enter a value Site Manager prompts you to do so Appendix E provides a summary of AT commands for the ARN Refer to the manual for your modem for valid AT commands Entering an invalid command may disable the modem If the modem does not initialize you may need to change the asynchronous baud rate To do this click on the COM connector and select Edit Line Modify the value of the asynchronous baud rate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 9 117353 A Rev A A 9 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Speaker Volume COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface Medium Low Medium High Sets the volume of the modem speaker This parameter is available only if you select a modem from the list that Site Manager provides Set the volume to Low Medium or High Not applicable Speaker Control COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface On For Call Off On For Call Always On On For Answer Controls the modem speaker This parameter is available only if you select a modem from the list that Site Manager provides Select one of the following Off Turns the speaker off entirely On For Call Turns the speaker on only when a call is established and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Always On Keeps the modem spea
90. to the Configuration Manager window Table 10 2 lists ways to customize PPP and Frame Relay circuits Table 10 2 Customizing Backup Circuits Location in Task Site Manager Parameter Appendix A Change which router initiates a call Backup Mode page A 58 PPP only Modify PPP authentication information CHAP Local Name page A 37 PPP only CHAP Secret page A 38 PAP Local ID page A 39 PAP Password page A 40 Outbound Authentication page A 41 Customize the duration of the circuit Maximum Up Time page A 42 Max UpTime Termination page A 42 UpTime Term Reset page A 43 Specify how long the router waits Primary Down Time page A 61 before activating a backup circuit Frame Relay only Enable the use of filters for backup Use Backup Interface Filters page A 61 Frame Relay only Changing the Authentication Protocol for the Primary Circuit CHAP is the default authentication protocol To select PAP you must specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter For instructions to set this parameter refer to Configuring PPP Services 10 14 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits Scheduling When the Backup Circuit Is Available After you complete the backup circuit configuration you can schedule when the backup circuit is available for the primary circuit To specify a schedule for the backup circuit 1 Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay
91. transmit data Multilink enables the router to use lines at different speeds and to evenly distribute data across those lines When you enable multilink you can configure a set of links between two peers into a single bundle The actual number of lines in a multilink bundle depends on hardware platform constraints total bundle speed the speed of each link in the bundle and the type of traffic you are sending For PPP demand connections across ISDN lines you can manage the allocation of bandwidth for a multilink bundle by enabling the PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP This protocol is available only after bandwidth service is set up For more information about BAP refer to Chapter 7 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Figure 2 5 illustrates how additional switched lines provide more bandwidth for a congested demand line New York City Initial demand line Additional lines from a bandwidth pool DS0004A Figure 2 5 Additional Lines for a Dial on Demand Connection 2 12 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Dial Backup Service Dial backup service lets you configure backup lines for failed primary lines A primary line is a leased line a leased multiline Standard and PPP only or a leased multilink connection This leased line acts as the physical connection over which the leased circuit the logical connection carries traffic You designate these leased circuits as prima
92. window includes a BW on Demand button that lets you associate the demand circuit with an existing bandwidth on demand pool It also lets you configure bandwidth on demand monitor parameters that determine when the demand circuit is congested Bandwidth on demand service is supported on asynchronous lines RS 449 synchronous lines RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces You can use the following types of lines and protocols for bandwidth on demand service e Leased lines A single leased line a multilink bundle a switched dial on demand line Protocol supported PPP multilink e Secondary dial up lines Any WAN line Protocols supported asynchronous or synchronous PPP multilink BAP for ISDN lines The leased lines and secondary dial up lines may operate at different speeds Figure 2 10 shows how secondary lines support a leased connection Central Site A Remote Site B Leased line with PPP multilink 64 Kb s Secondary dial up lines ISDN B channels DS0006A Figure 2 10 An Example of Bandwidth on Demand Service 2 22 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Initially the router brings up one secondary line to alleviate congestion If the congestion persists the router activates a second and then a third line until the congestion subsides Each new line the router activates becomes part of a multilink bundle The router then balances traffic over the bundle Once the volume of traffic
93. 1 3 Select Enable for the Sending Complete IE parameter Site Manager Sending Complete IE parameter page A 18 4 Click on Apply then click on Done Configuring X 25 over a D Channel BRI only To reduce the cost of connecting to an X 25 network you can send X 25 packets over an ISDN D channel instead of sending them over leased lines To use the D channel for X 25 packet transmission the baud rate must be a maximum of 9600 bps so data is not lost Refer to Chapter 4 for more information You should have already configured BRI service according to the instructions in Chapter 1 This feature is only for NET3 switch types in Germany and France Caution If you enable or disable this feature dynamically the router disconnects all existing calls across the B channels as the ISDN software makes changes for the feature Once the changes are complete the software restarts and you can make calls again To configure X 25 over the D channel for a BRI line 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on an ISDN connector Site Manager displays the ISDN Dialup window refer to Figure 8 6 8 20 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Click on Edit D Chan Site Manager displays the BRI Interface Configuration window refer to Figure 8 7 Enter Enable for the X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter Site Manager X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter page A 24 5 Modify the de
94. 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 17 Use Backup Interface Filters Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition Disabled Enabled Disabled Enables the routers to filter unwanted data from going across the backup circuit This parameter is configurable only if the interface type is primary shared Select Enable to use filters otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 34 117353 A Rev A A 61 Configuring Dial Services Frame Relay Interface Parameters Demand and Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID FR Service Control Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface Enable for dial backup primary shared interfaces Disable for dial backup primary secondary interfaces and dial on demand interfaces Enable Disable Enables the Frame Relay interface For dial backup primary secondary interfaces and dial on demand interfaces select Enable to activate the Frame Relay interface once the configuration is complete Otherwise accept the default For dial backup primary shared interfaces select Disable to deactivate the Frame Relay interface Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1
95. 1 through 9 to add more lines to the pool For backup and bandwidth services you can select lines across slots Go to the next section Configuring Circuits to configure dial up circuits 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Configuring Circuits To configure dial up circuits refer to the appropriate section for instructions e Creating Demand Circuits e Creating Backup Circuits on page 1 25 e Creating Bandwidth Circuits on page 1 28 When you create a PPP dial up circuit Site Manager creates a special PPP record for the circuit which identifies who is calling the router This record is listed in the PPP Interface Lists window as follows Interface for Dialup Lines For more information about PPP refer to Configuring PPP Services Creating Demand Circuits To configure Frame Relay demand circuits skip this section and go to Chapter 9 To configure PPP demand circuits 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window listing the new pools Figure 1 16 Doren PRP Clecul ta FR Circuits Figure 1 16 Demand Pools Window Listing Configured Pools 117353 A Rev A 1 19 Configuring Dial Services 3 Highlight the pool that you want the circuit to use and click on PPP Circuits Site Manager displays the PPP Demand Circuits window Figure 1 17 Deegan Po
96. 22 BRI T4 Timer parameter A 23 BRI See basic rate interface Bridge Enable parameter A 56 broadcast traffic reduction dial optimized routing 5 15 5 17 IP broadcast timers 5 18 IP RIP triggered updates 5 18 IPX RIP and SAP broadcast timers 5 18 overview 5 14 static routes 5 15 traffic filters 5 19 C Cable Type parameter A 6 call setup time allowing enough for ISDN 4 20 callback configuring 5 9 description 5 8 Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter A 101 caller ID service 4 16 Caller Name parameter A 52 A 102 caller resolution table Caller Name parameter 1 40 13 1 A 52 A 102 caller names 1 40 13 1 117353 A Rev A CHAP Secret parameter A 52 A 102 configuring 1 40 13 2 customizing 13 1 description 4 5 Local Circuit parameter A 103 Local Group parameter A 104 overview 13 1 PAP Password parameter A 103 Channel Bandwidth Type parameter A 98 CHAP Local Name parameter A 37 CHAP names used by PPP 4 4 See also caller resolution table CHAP Secret parameter A 38 A 52 A 102 circuit backup for dial backup service 2 14 Circuit Name parameter A 30 Circuit State Set parameter A 73 Circuit Type parameter A 57 A 77 circuits See demand backup or bandwidth on demand circuits Compression Control parameter A 76 Congestion Control parameter A 69 A 74 Congestion Counter parameter A 70 A 76 congestion threshold accuracy 7 8 Congestion Timer parameter A 69 A 75 Conne
97. 3 LAPD Frame The fields in the LAPD frame are as follows e The opening flag and closing flag fields are High level Data Link Control HDLC flags that separate one frame from the next e The address field contains two kinds of information It provides a data link layer entity more specifically a logical point that defines the data link between the user and the network This portion of the address is the service access point identifier SAPI The address field also contains a number to identify the terminal equipment connected to the ISDN network This is the terminal endpoint identifier TEI Either the network assigns a unique number to each device or you set this number at the device e The control field identifies the type of frame This field also contains sequence numbering e The information field contains data to set up the link e The frame check sequence is a cyclic redundancy check CRC 3 4 117353 A Rev A ISDN Overview Call Control on the D Channel ITU T recommendation Q 931 outlines standards for out of band call control at the network layer for ISDN communication The primary function of call control is to set up and take down ISDN calls on the B channels ISDN Interfaces One of the key concepts in ISDN is a set of universal interfaces that allow you to purchase equipment and services from any ISDN provider All providers can therefore implement ISDN similarly ITU T created a set of physical and logic
98. 4 Router dials _ gt 5085551234 Local Phone List 5085551234 5085554365 5085551298 5085559854 DS0034A Figure 7 2 BAP Negotiation between Two Routers In this example two Bay Networks routers are connected Router A has only one phone number in its outgoing phone list for the destination Router B Router A calls Router B While they are communicating Router A the monitor router determines that it needs more bandwidth based on the user defined congestion thresholds BAP negotiation then begins as follows 1 Router A sends a call request asking for more bandwidth 2 Router B the non monitor router checks the router slots to find an available line It uses the Preferred and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters to determine which slots to check first You can set these parameters for a non monitor router if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Dynamic Monitor 3 When it finds an available line Router B sends a call response that includes the local phone number of the available line 4 Router A calls the new phone number Router B then activates the additional line 5 Ifthe lines become congested again Router A repeats the process 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services If Router B uses all the available phone numbers and Router A sends another call request for bandwidth Router B can inform Router A that there are no available lines saving Router A the cost of calling to make a co
99. 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 1 23 Figure 1 24 Figure 1 25 Figure 1 26 Figure 1 27 Figure 1 28 Figure 1 29 117353 A Rev A Figures Dialup Menu from the Configuration Manager Window 1 5 Demand Pools WiNdOW irienn a E aT a 1 6 Demand Pool Configuration Window 00 ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeesaeeeeaees 1 6 Demand Lines Definition Window for a Backbone Link Node 04 1 7 Choose WAN Serial Interface Type Window ccceceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 1 8 Sync Line Media Type Window 0 cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaeeeseneees 1 9 Async Line Media Type Window ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeeees 1 9 Port Application WindOW ecccceeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeseaees 1 11 Clock Parameters Window ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeesaeeeenes 1 12 MCT1 Port Parameters WindOW 0 cceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeessaeeeseneees 1 13 PRI Logical Lines Window cceeccsceeeeeeteeeeeeennaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 1 14 MCT1 Timeslots Window ccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeseneeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeseneees 1 15 Menu for PRI Time slot orere ara a AER ENRE EA 1 15 ISDN Switch Configuration Window ssssssssseesseesssresrseseessern
100. 7 Select and configure more lines for the pool if necessary 8 Select File gt Exit to exit the Lines Definition window refer to Figure 1 4 You return to the Pools window with three new buttons Edit Apply and Delete that allow you to edit the new pool 9 Now that you have set up a pool do one of the following e Go to Configuring Circuits on page 1 19 to configure dial up circuits e Go to the next section to add ISDN lines to the pool 1 10 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Creating Line Pools with ISDN Lines Before creating a pool with ISDN lines you need to select a port and designate it as a BRI or PRI interface Refer to the appropriate section for instructions 73 e Configuring BRI Lines e Configuring PRI Lines on page 1 12 Configuring BRI Lines ISDN BRI Net Modules are available only on the Access Node AN Access Stack Node ASN Access Node Hub ANH and Access Remote Node ARN hardware platforms To configure BRI lines 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Click on an ISDN connector Site Manager displays the Port Application window Figure 1 8 Port Appl icemtipn Ace Figure 1 8 Port Application Window 3 Accept the default Dialup 2B D and click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Site Manager Port Application Mode parameter page A 15 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each
101. 8 5 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window refer to Figure 8 3 6 Click on Done 8 10 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Removing a Dial Service from a Modem Line To remove a dial service from an ISDN line refer to Removing B Channels from a Pool on page 8 27 To remove a dial service from a modem line 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays the Pools window refer to Figure 8 1 Select the pool entry that you want to modify and click on Edit Site Manager displays the Lines Definition window refer to Figure 1 4 Click on the COM connector to remove the dial service from the line Site Manager removes the D B or W next to the connector name If this is the only line in the pool Site Manager also deletes the pool Select File gt Exit You return to the Pools window Click on Done Caution If you modify a modem line carrying an active circuit the router terminates the circuit 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Modifying ISDN Configurations This section describes how to modify ISDN configurations You cannot modify the BRI or PRI port application You must remove the interface and repeat the configuration procedure To delete these interfaces refer to Removing BRI and PRI from the Router on page 8 28 Modifying BRI Signaling
102. 9 You specify a time of day to activate the circuit Using the Schedule option you can schedule the circuit s availability for a specific day and time The schedule parameters are part of the circuit s configuration refer to Chapter 9 The Schedule option also allows you to specify whether the router uses the Inactivity Time parameter to dynamically deactivate the connection The router does not accept incoming calls or activate Frame Relay demand circuits if there is an incoming call from the Frame Relay network The router answers an incoming call only over a PPP circuit 117353 A Rev A 2 9 Configuring Dial Services The Frame Relay switch does not activate PVCs and configured DLCIs until the router receives data from the demand circuit and exchanges Data Link Control Management Interface DLCMD status messages with the switch For more information about Frame Relay refer to Configuring Frame Relay Services Terminating Demand Circuits The router deactivates the demand circuit when e You enable the Force Take Down parameter To deactivate a force dial connection you configure the Force Take Down parameter which instructs the router to clear the connection To learn how to configure this parameter refer to Chapter 9 e You schedule the circuit to come down Using the Schedule option you can schedule the circuit s availability for a specific day and time The schedule parameters are part of the circuit s c
103. A Dial Services Overview For a dynamic UNI use the default Frame Relay service record This service record holds all PVCs that the router learns dynamically Choose a network layer protocol that can retransmit data between the PVC and the network if the data is lost Although the router makes a dial connection and starts sending data the PVCs do not always activate immediately Consequently you might lose data during the first part of the transmission Therefore it is important to use protocols that can account for this situation and ensure that any lost data can be sent again We strongly recommend using Internet Protocol IP or Internet Protocol Exchange IPX If the remote routers in your network are using IP ensure that they also use the Address Resolution Protocol ARP and not Inverse ARP This enables the local router to learn address information Activating Demand Circuits The router activates a demand circuit when The router has data to send across the circuit When the router has data to transmit it automatically selects one of the demand lines from the circuit s associated demand pool As long as data is going across the line the end to end connection remains active You enable the Force Dial parameter To activate a line immediately you configure the Force Dial parameter to force the router to initiate a connection regardless of whether there is data activity To configure this parameter refer to Chapter
104. A 32 Manual Standby Action page A 33 Standby Primary Circuit page A 33 Enable the callback feature Callback Mode page A 34 PPP only Callback Server Delay Time page A 36 sec page A 36 Callback Client Delay Time sec Specify how long the router waits to Routing Update Hold Time page A 31 send routing updates over Frame Relay demand circuits for use with dial optimized routing Changing the Default Authentication Protocol PPP only CHAP is the default authentication protocol To select PAP you must open the PPP Interface List window select the line record for dial lines and specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter For more information about PPP and configuring authentication protocols see Configuring PPP Services 117353 A Rev A 9 14 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth on Demand Service for Demand Lines PPP only If the demand line becomes congested the router can provide an additional 29 dial up lines to reduce the congestion In Chapter 1 you had an opportunity to enable bandwidth on demand service for a demand circuit Refer to that chapter for instructions To modify the bandwidth on demand parameters refer to Chapter 11 Adding Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits In Chapter 1 you added IP to a PPP demand circuit To add other protocols 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window refe
105. Associated IP Address parameter A 54 asynchronous lines for bandwidth on demand 2 22 for dial backup 2 13 for dial on demand 2 4 asynchronous PPP advantages 4 6 to 4 7 authentication 4 7 description 4 6 to 4 7 AT initialization commands configuring 4 7 authentication protocols CHAP 4 1 PAP 4 1 authentication types one way 4 2 two way 4 2 Auto Demand Term Reset parameter A 29 Auto Demand Termination parameter A 29 Availability Mode parameter A 49 B B channel 117353 A Rev A Index function 3 2 removing from line pool 8 28 8 29 transmission rates 3 2 backup circuits See dial backup Backup Mode parameter A 58 Backup Pool ID parameter A 4 A 57 backup pools backup lines in 2 17 description 2 17 IDs for 2 18 Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP configuring 7 6 11 10 description 7 4 Bandwidth Mode parameter A 78 A 79 bandwidth on demand default parameter settings C 1 to C 10 for demand circuits 2 11 identifying bandwidth pools 2 23 implementation notes 7 1 to 7 8 introduction 2 1 overview 2 21 to 2 25 parameters Bandwidth Mode A 78 A 79 Bandwidth on demand Pool ID A 4 BOD Exam Period A 81 BOD Full Threshold A 81 BOD Periods to Fail A 82 BOD Periods to Recover A 84 BOD Pool ID A 77 A 79 BOD Recovery Threshold A 84 Cable Type A 6 CHAP Secret A 38 Circuit Type A 77 Index 1 Directory Number A 87 Ext SubAddr A 87 Fragmentation Trigger Size A 85 Gl
106. BRI line you want in the pool 5 Go to Adding ISDN Lines to a Pool on page 1 16 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Configuring PRI Lines PRI lines are available only on the ASN BCN and BLN hardware platforms using the following link modules Single or Dual Port Multichannel T1 Link Module BLN and BCN Dual Port Multichannel T1 Net Module ASN 120 ohm Single Port MCE1 II Net Module BLN and BCN 120 ohm Single or Dual Port MCE1 II Link Module ASN QMCTI1 Link Module BLN and BCN To configure PRI lines 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector Site Manager displays the Port Application window which is similar to the window shown in Figure 1 8 3 Select PRI for the Port Application Mode and click on OK Site Manager Port Application Mode parameter page A 16 Site Manager displays the Clock Parameters window Figure 1 9 Figure 1 9 Clock Parameters Window 117353 A Rev A Getting Started The clock parameters define the timing sources that apply to all connectors and DSO timeslots supported by the MCT1 and MCE1 Link Modules 4 Click on OK to accept the default values for the clock parameters Site Manager displays the MCT1 Port Parameters window Figure 1 10 The MCE Port Parameters window has different parameters The port parameters apply to each of the 24 DSO channels for MCT1 ports or 31 DSO chan
107. Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP Parameters ccscseeeeesteeeeeenneeeeeeeaaes A 86 Local Phone Number Parameters 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeaeeeeeneaaas A 87 Outgoing Phone List Parameters 0 ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeenaaeeeenees A 90 Incoming Phone List Parameters cccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeaaes A 100 Caller Resolution Table Parameters ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeeeaeeseeeeeesnaeeseaes A 102 Appendix B Configuration Examples Dial on Demand with PPP eeren eraa eE E eee ee ea EAA ENEE E B 2 Configuration of Routers 4and 7 s sssssessssssssissrirssrrssrrssrnerinnrinnstnntsrnnsrrnssrenssnns B 3 Demand Pool Configuration c cccccceceeecceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeeaees B 3 Demand Circuit Configuration eeseeesseeseeeseresiresrrssrnnrtnrttnntstnnsrnnnstnnssrnsnsrns B 4 Outgoing Phone List Configuration 0 ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeetaas B 5 Caller Resolution Table Configuration 0 ccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeteneeeseas B 5 Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network ccccccceceeeeneeeceneeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeneee B 6 Configuration Of Router 1 o eceeeeeeececeeeeeneeececeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeaeeeseaaeseceeeesaaeeeeeeeees B 6 Configuration Of Router 2 oo cee ceeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeceaeeeeaaeeseceeesaaeeeeeeeeeiaaeeneeeee
108. Breath of Life BofL messages in the BofL time period Standard and PPP For Standard and PPP Site Manager automatically enables BofL messages on each primary line and disables them on each backup line BofL messages verify that the line is operational The router determines that the primary line has failed when it stops receiving packets within the BofL time period You configure the BofL timer using the synchronous line parameter BofL Timeout See Configuring WAN Line Services for more information No DLCMI messages Frame Relay primary Frame Relay backup When Frame Relay is the protocol for the backup circuit the router performs link backup For link backup the router knows that the primary failed when it no longer receives DLCMI messages from the switch These messages communicate information about the interface and the status of each PVC The router may also rely on modem signals to determine if the primary circuit failed If you rely on modem signals you must set the Sync Polling parameter to Enable which instructs the router to monitor modem signals Refer to Configuring WAN Line Services for more information about the Sync Polling parameter In addition you must use the proper synchronous cable to connect to the primary line s modem or CSU DSU Refer to the Cable Guide for Routers and BayStream Platforms 2 16 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview e A bit notification Single Frame Relay PVC primary PPP backup
109. Customizing Line Pools Removing B Channels from a Pool To remove B channels from a line pool 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays the Pools window refer to Figure 8 1 Select the pool containing the ISDN lines you want to modify Click on Edit Site Manager displays the Lines Definition window refer to Figure 1 4 Click on an ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 connector Site Manager displays the ISDN Logical Lines window refer to Figure 8 10 Click on Remove to remove the B channels from the pool If you remove all of the lines in the pool Site Manager removes the pool as well Click on OK You return to the Lines Definition window Select File gt Exit Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 27 Configuring Dial Services Removing BRI and PRI from the Router Before you delete the BRI and PRI physical interface you must delete the dial up circuits and pools Removing BRI To remove BRI from the pool 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on the ISDN connector Site Manager displays the ISDN Dialup window Figure 8 18 Bethe E Chanel 2 Figure 8 18 ISDN Dialup Window 3 Click on Delete All Site Manager removes BRI service 4 Click on Done 8 28 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Removing PRI To remove PRI from the pool 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager windo
110. Demand cc 2 8 Activating Demand Circuits 0 ececcececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeesaaeseceeeesaaeseeeeeeessaeesseneees 2 9 Terminating Demand Circuits c ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseaeeseceeeseaeeeeaees 2 10 Bandwidth on Demand Service for Congested Demand Lines cseeeeeee 2 11 Dial Backup Service niinen ann iaa ead navidad dalek Manan en ates 2 13 Circuit Backup versus Link Backup ccceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeenaaeeseneeess 2 14 Knowing When the Primary Line Fails 0 0 0 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeseaas 2 16 Backup Lines and POOLS geria narkar Ee EEr EEEn Een AEs A A EEE EE TAR EEE EAE ia En AEE 2 17 How Backup Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together ccccsssecceessssteeeeeeeaes 2 18 Configuration of the Backup Circuit 0 cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeseneeessaeeeseneees 2 19 Activating the Backup LINE ecceecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeaeeeendeeeeeeesseeseneeeese 2 19 Reestablishing the Backup Connection 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeees 2 20 Terminating the Backup Connection c cccccceeceeneeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaaeenenes 2 20 Bandwidth on Demand Service cccccccesececeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeceaaeeeeneeeseaaeeeseaeeseeeeeenaaeeneaes 2 21 Enabling Bandwidth on Demand Service ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeetees 2 21
111. Demand Circuits ccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeaeeeseaaeseeaees 9 10 Dial Backup Configurations 0 ccccceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeseceeesaaeeeeneeess 10 1 Customizing Backup Circuits 0 ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeas 10 14 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service 11 1 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service cccccesceeeeteeeeteeeeeeees 11 3 Changing the Monitor Parameters cccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeesaees 11 6 Customizing the Outgoing Phone List cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeaees 12 8 Organization of Parameters ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeseeeeeesaeessenees A 1 Abbreviated Site Manager Window Titles ecccecesseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees A 3 Switch Types by Country cccccecccececeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeessaeessaes A 17 Demand Pools Parameter ccccccsesccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeensneeeeeeenenees B 3 Line Media Type Parameters ceeccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeaaas B 3 IP Parameters acnes laetidl addins e S aa idea B 4 IP Adjacent Host Parameter sssssssssirssessrrssrrirrsssrinnnnsrinnnsstennnnsrnnn B 4 PPP Demand Circuits Parameters 0 c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeaes B 4 Outgoing Phone List Parameter 0 cccccceceeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaeeesenees B 5 Caller Resolution Table Parameters cccccesceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee
112. Enter a Pool ID and click on OK Site Manager Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID parameter page A 4 1 6 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Note You can use the same ID for a demand backup or bandwidth pool but you cannot use the same ID for two of the same type of pool Site Manager displays the Lines Definition window Figure 1 4 Configuration Rede loool Sh bent LO FILE Protocols r Goo Figure 1 4 Demand Lines Definition Window for a Backbone Link Node 4 Click on an available COM connector to assign a line to the pool but consider the following e Do not select any COM lines that you previously configured as leased lines e The lines that you select for a demand pool must reside on the same slot e The lines that you select for a backup and bandwidth pool can reside across slots 117353 A Rev A 1 7 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager displays the Choose WAN Serial Interface Type window Figure 1 5 Choose WAN Serial Interface Typ Cancel OK Values Help WAN Serial Interface Type EYNC Figure 1 5 Choose WAN Serial Interface Type Window Note On the BLN and Backbone Concentrator Node BCN the Choose WAN Serial Interface Type window appears only for ports on an Octal Sync Link Module For all other modules the Sync Line Media Type window Figure 1 6 appears 5 Accept the default Sync or click on Values and select Async
113. FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables support for Frame Relay multicast service Set to Enable if your Frame Relay subscription service provides multicast service and if this Frame Relay interface should receive multicast messages 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 16 A 68 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Congestion Control Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables congestion control on this interface Set to Enable to activate congestion control This value tells the router to drop all outbound traffic destined for a PVC where congestion is occurring until the congestion clears The value of this parameter affects all PVCs that you do not individually configure 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 22 Congestion Timer Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt F
114. Frame Relay Demand Circuits 5 16 viii 117353 A Rev A Exceptions for Sending Routing Updates ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeesees 5 17 Maintaining the Routing Table eee cee eesseeeeeeennneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 5 17 IP RIP Triggered Updates and Broadcast Timers ccc eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeees 5 18 IPX RIP and SAP Broadcast Timers ecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaeeeseeeeeaas 5 18 Wraftic Filters E AT EER Mali tahini heat AE ceages 5 19 Data Compression i Feat ieee cn eae 5 19 PPP Multilink tscfsreee tcecctaet iieeace tained eaea eE AA A Aaea A EE EAA E A Aaaa TEA ea aaa Teana 5 20 Protocol Prormizaton oys orr i E E AEAEE E ENN 5 20 Chapter 6 Dial Backup Implementation Notes BERGO IEO a EEEE E E A A A 6 1 Defining the Role of the Router in the Network ssessssssssssssssssrrssssirrsssrirnsssrinnnssrnnnesens 6 2 Bandwidth for Backup Circuits 0 ccececeeceeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseaeeseeeeeseaaeeeed 6 2 Using Unnumbered Interfaces to Dial an Alternative Site 2 0 0 0 cccceceeccsseeeeeessneeeeeeeaes 6 2 Sample Network Using Unnumbered Interfaces ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeetees 6 3 Simplifying Unnumbered Configurations with Demand Circuit Groups 08 6 4 Sample Network Using Demand Circuit Groups 0 eeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeetaeeetenes 6 4 Chapter 7 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Not
115. GOW serrian a E E Eaa EE AET E 8 15 ISDN Logical Lines Window sssssssseesssressesssissrnsssrisssrrssrrnssrrnssrnssennent 8 17 ISDN Configured Switches Window ssssssseeeseeeseeesieesresrrrssrresernssernses 8 18 Edit Connector Window cc ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeetaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeaaeeees 8 22 Circuit Definition WINGOW cccccccecseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeececaeeesaaeeteceeesaaeeeeaes 8 23 ISDN Leased Line B Channels Window cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 8 24 Add Circuit Window 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeaaeeeseaeeeseeeesnaeessaes 8 25 WAN Protocols Menu ccccseeccceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeees 8 25 BRI Interface Configuration Window for the BRI T4 Timer 2 8 26 ISDN Dialup Window ceeeeececeeeeeeeee cece eeeeaee sees eesaaaeseeeeesaaeeteeeeeees 8 28 Demand Pools WindOW serci ieoten e E EE E e EEE 9 2 FR Demand Circuits Window cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeenenees 9 3 Completed FR Demand Circuits Window 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeneeeaaes 9 4 FR Demand Interface List WiINGOW 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 5 Frame Relay Demand Service List Window cccccccsseeeeeereeetteeeeeeees 9 6 FR PVC List for Demand Services WindOW ccecceeseeeeeereeeeteeeeenees 9 7 Frame Relay PVC Add Window ccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseceeessaaeeneaees 9 8 Select Proto
116. I Configuration Parameters page A 22 Demand Circuit Parameters PPP and Frame Relay page A 26 Standby Circuit Parameters PPP Demand Circuits only page A 32 Callback Parameters PPP Demand Circuits only page A 34 Authentication Protocol Parameters Demand Backup Bandwidth page A 37 Circuit Duration Parameters Demand and Backup page A 42 continued 117353 A Rev A A 1 Configuring Dial Services Table A 1 Organization of Parameters continued Parameter Section Location Circuit Schedule Parameters Demand and Dial Backup page A 45 Demand Circuit Group Parameters page A 51 Demand Circuit Group Protocol Parameters page A 54 Caller Resolution Info Parameters for Demand Circuit Groups page A 52 PPP Circuit Options Parameters Dial Backup page A 57 PPP Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Dial Backup page A 58 Frame Relay Interface Type Parameter Dial Backup page A 59 Frame Relay Primary Interface Definition Parameters Dial Backup page A 61 Frame Relay Interface Parameters Demand and Dial Backup page A 62 Service List Parameter Demand and Dial Backup page A 71 Frame Relay PVC Parameters Demand and Dial Backup page A 72 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Options Parameters page A 77 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Parameters page A 79 Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor Parameters page A 80 Bandwidth Alloca
117. IE By including the IE in the call setup message call setup times may be faster If your ISDN switch does not support this IE accept the default Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 8 A 18 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Global Adaption Rate Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration 64K 64K 56K In accordance with the ITU T V 110 standard this parameter enables the router to send and receive data transmitting at a rate of 56 Kb s and adapt it for transmission over a 64 Kb s line Specify the rate that the router sends and receives calls over a B channel Ensure that the rate is compatible with the network connections to the destination device Ask your provider if you are unsure If the value of this parameter is greater than the value of the outgoing call s Adaption Rate parameter the router ignores this parameter and uses the outgoing call s data rate For example if this parameter is set to 64 Kb s and the Adaption Rate parameter is set to 56 Kb s the router uses the rate of 56 Kb s for the outgoing call If the parameter values are equal or if only this par
118. ISDN D Channel parameter Site Manager Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter page A 19 4 Click on Apply then click on Done Modifying the BRI Line That Uses X 25 Service over the D Channel You can modify the BRI line after you enable X 25 service over the D channel To modify the line 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on the ISDN connector Site Manager displays the Edit Connector window Figure 8 12 ee Edit Circult Edit Line Dore Figure 8 12 Edit Connector Window 3 Click on Edit Line Site Manager displays the BRI Interface Configuration window refer to Figure 8 7 4 Modify the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A 5 Click on OK 8 22 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Modifying the X 25 Circuit for Service over the D Channel You can modify the X 25 Service and Packet parameters after you enable X 25 service over the D Channel To modify the X 25 circuit 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Click on the ISDN connector Site Manager displays the Edit Connector window refer to Figure 8 12 Click on Edit Circuit Site Manager displays the Circuit Definition window Figure 8 13 Conf igrati Peele local SHAP panii LOCAL FILE Protocols Sirt Figure 8 13 Circuit Definition Window Select X25 Protocol gt Packet to modify the packet configuration Select X25 Protocol gt Service to
119. If you have only Raise DTR lines in the pool click on Done and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 1 40 117353 A Rev A 1 35 Configuring Dial Services Creating an Outgoing Phone List For ISDN V 25bis and Hayes connections the router uses the outgoing phone list to place a call to a remote router In this chapter we assume that your modem connections are Raise DTR which means that the phone numbers are programmed directly into the modem Therefore you only need to set up an outgoing phone list if you have configured ISDN connections Outgoing phone lists are associated with a specific circuit not with the physical line The lines in the pool may be used by many circuits which is why the telephone numbers are part of each circuit s configuration and not the line s configuration To create an outgoing phone list 1 Begin at the PPP Demand Circuits Primary Circuit Definition or Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window 2 Select a circuit and click on Phone Out Site Manager displays the Outgoing Phone List window Figure 1 28 Tirti hore bomber Diigo Phone Eat Gaede itai Pi Ele Died Baer Phone Husber Type STM Puma tig Typa IH Homerin Plan Figure 1 28 Outgoing Phone List Window 1 36 117353 A Rev A Getting Started 3 Click on Add to display the Phone Number window Figure 1 29 Cees lie Pee Moped Duta Lig Phora Ext Suiddr Duigoing Phone ie lei
120. MCT1 or MCE1 port Site Manager displays the ISDN Switch Configuration window Figure 1 14 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Sel Tia eoma Filter DISABLE Sending Complete f OL Giaa fakon bee Reto DAE Figure 1 14 ISDN Switch Configuration Window 6 Accept the default switch or select another switch for your network Site Manager Switch Type parameter page A 16 7 Accept the defaults for the other parameters and click on Done Site Manager bypasses the ISDN Switch Configuration window for subsequent ISDN lines Subsequent chapters explain how to modify the switch type After you select a switch Site Manager displays the ISDN Logical Lines window Figure 1 15 where you define the number of B channels in the pool and prioritize each channel 117353 A Rev A 1 17 Configuring Dial Services Pos Cheer Cmar Poel Chgreerl Priceiiy Figure 1 15 ISDN Logical Lines Window 10 11 Figure 1 15 shows the ISDN Logical Lines window for BRI For PRI the window is similar but the parameter defaults are different Accept the defaults by clicking on OK You return to the Lines Definition window refer to Figure 1 4 To modify the other switch parameters refer to Chapter 8 Select File gt Exit to exit the Lines Definition window You return to the Pools window which shows the configured pools The window has three new buttons Edit Apply and Delete Repeat steps
121. Modem Configurations ccccccecceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeaeeee 8 6 Selecting a Modem Hayes only c cccsceceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeseeaeeeenaaeeees 8 8 Modifying Modem Initialization Commands c cece eset sree eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseneeeaees 8 9 Modifying How the Modem Connects to the Network cceeeeeseeesseesneeeneeeeeeeees 8 10 Removing a Dial Service from a Modem Line cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 8 11 Modifying ISDN Configurations eccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaeeeseseeeseaeeeseaaeeseaees 8 12 Modifying BRI Signaling over the D Channel c cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 8 12 Modifying the MCT1 and MCE1 Port Configurations eseese 8 14 Ghanging PRI Timeslots aata tate dee th naan adit tees a Aan Diay 8 15 Modifying the ISDN Pool Channel Count and Priority 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 16 Modifying the ISDN Switch Type cccceeccceeeceeeeeneeeeecaeeeeeeee seas eeeaaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeeees 8 18 Enabling Incoming Call Filtering 0 ceccceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeesaaeeeteaeeeeaas 8 19 Modifying the Adaption Rate 0 00 cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaas 8 19 Informing the Switch That Call Setup Is Complete cccceeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeneeeeees 8 20 Configuring X 25 over a D Channel BRI only cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeees
122. OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER also for busy if enabled and dial tone not detected NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX and ERROR X3 Report basic call progress result codes and connection rate For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX and ERROR X4 Report all call progress result codes and connection rate For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX BUSY NO DIAL TONE and ERROR YO Disable long space disconnect before on hook Y1 Enable long space disconnect before on hook ZO Restore stored profile 0 after warm reset Z1 Restore stored profile 1 after warm reset amp CO Force RLSD active regardless of the carrier state amp C1 Allow RLSD to follow the carrier state amp DO Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 amp Q5 amp Q6 The modem ignores DTR continued 117353 A Rev A E 3 Configuring Dial Services Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function amp Q1 amp Q4 The modem hangs up amp Q2 amp Q3 The modem hangs up amp D1 Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 amp Q1 amp Q4 Asynchronous escape amp Q5 amp Q6 amp Q2 amp Q3 The modem hangs up amp D2 Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 through amp Q6 The modem hangs up amp D3 Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn
123. P3 Set 20 p s pulse dial with 33 67 make break amp Q0 Select direct asynchronous mode amp Q1 Select sync connect with async off line command mode amp Q2 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR dialing of directory zero amp Q3 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR to act as Talk Data switch amp Q4 Select Hayes AutoSync mode amp Q5 Modem negotiates an error corrected link amp Q6 Select asynchronous operation in normal mode amp RO CTS tracks RTS async or acts per V 25 sync amp R1 CTS is always active amp S0 DSR is always active amp S1 DSR acts per V 25 amp TO Terminate any test in progress amp T1 Initiate local analog loopback amp T2 Returns ERROR result code amp T3 Initiate local digital loopback amp T4 Allow remote digital loopback amp T5 Disallow remote digital loopback request amp T6 Request an RDL without self test amp T7 Request an RDL with self test amp T8 Initiate local analog loop with self test amp V Display current configurations amp WO Store the active profile in NVRAM profile 0 amp W1 Store the active profile in NVRAM profile 1 amp X0 Select internal timing for the transmit clock continued 117353 A Rev A E 5 Configuring Dial Services Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function amp X1 Sel
124. PP primary circuit with a hot standby circuit the router automatically enables BofL for the primary circuit so be sure to enable BofL on the other side of the PPP primary circuit This does not apply to Frame Relay primary circuits A call is designated for the standby circuit The router activates a standby circuit only when the remote router calls the host router over a standby circuit or you activate the circuit manually You activate a standby circuit manually 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Typically circuits at the remote site will be hot standby circuits while at the central site they will be regular standby circuits Configuring hot standby circuits for the remote router means that the remote router monitors the status of its primary connections which is easier for the remote router than the central router because there are fewer connections Standby circuits support standard demand circuit features such as multilink unnumbered interfaces dial optimized routing and outbound filtering Guidelines for Configuring Standby Circuits A standby circuit must be configured at the central site and at the remote site To configure a standby circuit you select a demand circuit then set the Standby Mode parameter to either Hot Standby or Standby Refer to Appendix A for parameter descriptions When setting up a standby circuit follow these guidelines e Configure one side of the connection to initiate calls
125. PRI connections Subsequent chapters in this manual describe how to configure each service to connect to an ISDN network B Channel Support In keeping with the PRI standard each port on the MCT1 Link Module provides 23 B channels operating at 64 Kb s for data transmission Each port on the MCE1 Link Module provides 30 B channels operating at 64 Kb s for data transmission 117353 A Rev A 4 13 Configuring Dial Services D Channel Support The router supports full 64 Kb s D channel signaling and call setup and teardown between the router and ISDN switch The D channel implementation complies with the ITU T 1988 recommendations Q 921 and Q 931 and provides signaling support for the following switches e Net5 for Austria Belgium Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden United Kingdom Switzerland Finland Greece Iceland Ireland Luxembourg and Portugal e AT amp T SESS and 4ESS Custom and DMS 100 Custom for the United States e DMS 100 Custom for Canada e NTT and KDD for Japan e S014 for Australia Bay Networks routers do not support data transmission across the D channel Selective PRI Service Your ISDN service provider may offer a service option with only a fixed number of B channels out of the full complement of B channels for PRI This subset of channels is offered at an economical rate The ISDN service provider limits the number of channels by keeping the unavailable channels busy Cons
126. R Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface 1 second 0 5 to 5 seconds in 0 5 second intervals Specifies the length of time during which the router counts congestion notifications If the router receives the number of congestion notifications set by the congestion counter parameter the router stops transmitting data The router resumes transmission once it stops receiving congestion notifications Set the length of time the router should count congestion notifications from the network If you set this parameter for a long time period the router may be less likely to stop transmission for an intermittent congestion condition However the router may be slow to detect congestion resulting in long transmission delays once the congestion has cleared The value of this parameter applies to all PVCs that you do not individually configure 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 23 117353 A Rev A A 69 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Congestion Counter Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits D
127. RPOSE Licensee is responsible for the security of 117353 A Rev A jii its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs 4 Limitation of liability IN NO EVENT WILL BAY NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BAY NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF BAY NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO BAY NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out in this license for civ
128. Table B 23 IP Parameter a reer eE E E A Ara EA EEEN B 17 Table B 24 IP Adjacent Host Parameters ssesseessessirnsssrrrssrrirrssrrinrsssrinnsssrrnnnne B 17 Table B 25 Port Application Parameter sssessssssssesssssrrrsssrsrrssrrinnnssrirnsssrtnnnnsrnnnne B 19 Table B 26 Backup Pools Parameter esssssssesssssiiresserrnsssirrnsriinnsssrinnnsnnnnnnnrennnae B 20 Table B 27 ISDN Switch Configuration Parameter c ccccceesseeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeeees B 20 Table B 28 Circuit Options Parameters c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeees B 21 Table B 29 Primary Circuit Definition Parameters ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeee B 21 Table B 30 Outgoing Phone List Parameter cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 22 Table B 31 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Router 2 only eeeeeeeeees B 22 Table B 32 Local Phone Numbers Parameters c cccceeeeeseeeeeeeetcueeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaa B 23 Table C 1 Line Pool Parameters 0 ccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseeaeeseaeeesenaeeseaes C 1 Table C 2 Line Media Type Parameters ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeteaeessaes C 1 Table C 3 Modem Interface Parameters cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeseaeeeseneeeeeaeeesaes C 2 Table C 4 Port Application Mode Parameters ccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeencaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaes C 2 Table C 5 Logical Lines Parameter ccccccceeeeseeeeecee
129. Time Terminati UpTies Torm Roeser Pimi Tapas Tame ike Hacka hmierface Filter Figure 10 6 Completed FR Primary Interface Definition Window Modifying the Frame Relay Backup Interface After designating a primary circuit Site Manager sets up the Frame Relay backup circuit with default values The interface parameters define the Frame Relay characteristics of the circuit unlike the primary interface parameters which define the behavior of the backup circuit To modify the Frame Relay backup interface 1 Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay Site Manager displays the FR Primary Interface Definition window refer to Figure 10 6 2 Click on Backup Def Site Manager displays the FR Backup Interface window Figure 10 7 117353 A Rev A 10 7 Configuring Dial Services Figure 10 7 shows the window for the Primary Shared interface type The window for the Primary Secondary type is similar but does not include the Filters button For secondary configurations you configure filters using a different window FR Servic Control pmt Tupe fk Address Length Poll og eters Full Enypiry Interval Figure 10 7 FR Backup Interface Window for Primary Shared Interfaces 3 Accept the parameter defaults or modify them according to the descriptions in Appendix A 4 Click on Done 10 8 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits Modifying Frame Relay Service Records A Frame Relay service record is a
130. a to use the Software either on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Bay Networks Agent software or other Bay Networks software products Bay Networks Agent software or other Bay Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Bay Networks Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Bay Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Bay Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfe
131. a circuit from the demand circuit group assigned to that remote router Enter the ID number of the demand circuit group that the router should use when it receives an incoming call You assign this group to the remote router specified in the Caller Name parameter Accept the default 0 if you configure a individual local circuit If you enter a value for this parameter you cannot enter a value for the Local Circuit parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 6 A 104 117353 A Rev A Appendix B Configuration Examples This appendix provides examples for configuring the following applications Dial on demand using V 25bis signaling Dial on demand over an ISDN network Dial backup using Raise DTR signaling with PPP and Bay Networks Standard over the primary line Dial backup over an ISDN network with PPP Bay Networks Standard and Frame Relay over the primary line These examples include parameters whose defaults you need to change for proper configuration A sample network illustration shows each type of dial configuration Each illustration is followed by a set of tables that include the Site Manager window path to access the parameters and the correct parameter values All paths assume that you begin at the Configuration Manager window The ISDN examples page B 6 and page B 18 assume the following All BRI connections use a National ISDN 1 NI1 switch There is no incoming call filtering Sending complete IEs are not u
132. able MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 10 A 50 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Demand Circuit Group Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pool ID Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool None 1 to 255 Identifies the demand pool that you want the demand circuit group to use Enter the ID number of an existing demand pool 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 6 Number of Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool None Maximum number of lines in the line pool Indicates how many unnumbered circuits are in the demand circuit group Enter a number that is less than or equal to the number of lines in the demand pool associated with this circuit group 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 4 117353 A Rev A A 51 Configuring Dial Services Caller Resolution Info Parameters for Demand Circuit Groups Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Caller Name Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool gt OK gt Caller Resolution Info None Any text string maximu
133. acent Host Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S11 129 122 3 1 S331 129 122 3 2 IP Address 129 122 3 2 129 122 3 1 Next Hop Interface Addr 129 122 3 1 129 122 3 2 MAC Address 0x000000000002 0x000000000001 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Dial Backup over an ISDN Network Figure B 4 shows dial backup service over an ISDN network In this configuration the primary circuit is using PPP At the end of this section there are configuration notes if your application uses Standard or Frame Relay Router 1 1 140 1 1 0 Router 2 ASN 131 AN ISDN 1 e ag Local phone no 4364444 Local phone no 4363333 Switch type Ni Switch type Ni CHAP local name ASN CHAP local name AN CHAP secret ISDN CHAP secret ISDN DS0025A Figure B 4 Dial Backup over an ISDN Network Configuration of Router 1 To configure Router 1 1 Configure a leased synchronous interface named S131 2 Select PPP as the WAN protocol 3 Select IP RIP as the LAN protocol and configure the interface as follows e JP Address 140 1 1 1 e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 e IP Adjacent Host Address 140 1 1 2 4 From the Configuration Manager window click on an ISDN1 connector 5 Follow the path to the configuration windows and set the parameters according to Tables B 25 through B 32 B 18 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples C
134. ach bundle belongs to a separate circuit Multilink distributes traffic over each logical line in a bundle in an amount proportional to the bandwidth of the link Once data reaches the destination router multilink resequences packets arriving on different lines For ISDN lines you can manage the allocation of bandwidth in a multilink bundle by enabling the PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP For more information about this protocol refer to Chapter 7 Protocol Prioritization When you configure a router you can prioritize the different types of traffic sent across a synchronous line This process is called protocol prioritization Being able to prioritize traffic is important for your time sensitive applications For example a user at Router A participating in a Telnet session with Router B requires a more immediate response than a user at Router A performing a file transfer with Router B When you configure a demand circuit the router automatically enables protocol prioritization because PPP requires priority for control messages 5 20 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Although protocol prioritization is set automatically you still need to configure priorities and filters For more information about protocol prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Note Do not configure protocol prioritization for circuits running PPP multilink for example secondary dial up ci
135. ack works Remote Router A Central Router B 1 Initiate call gt 2 Authenticate caller 3 Disconnect or refuse call 4 Call back 5 Accept call DS0032A Figure 5 1 Example of Callback over a Demand Circuit Remote Router A places a call to Central Router B Router B determines whether the caller is authorized and if so terminates the initial call Router B then places a return call to Router A 5 8 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Configuring Callback Callback operates on a per demand circuit basis You enable callback by configuring the Callback Mode parameter in the PPP Demand Circuits window This parameter assigns each end of a callback circuit the role of server or client If you do not want to use the callback feature you accept the default callback mode Inactive The server responds to each incoming call from the client and either authenticates the call using CHAP or PAP or identifies the caller using the incoming filtering feature The server disconnects or refuses the call then redials the client using one of the following options e The outgoing phone list The outgoing phone list is a user defined list containing phone numbers of remote routers Each number in the outgoing phone list is associated with a specific circuit e Caller ID also called Automatic Numbering Identification ANI Caller ID is an ISDN service that you must purchase from your ISDN service provider
136. ager displays the Frame Relay PVC Add window Figure 10 10 10 10 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits aE Cancel OK Help Figure 10 10 Frame Relay PVC Add Window 7 Enter a value for the DLCI Number parameter then click on OK Site Manager DLCI Number parameter page A 72 You return to the Frame Relay Backup PVC List window 8 Accept the parameter defaults or modify them according to the descriptions in Appendix A For more information about Frame Relay service records and PVCs refer to Configuring Frame Relay Services 9 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 10 11 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Filters for Backup Configurations To prevent unwanted traffic across a Frame Relay interface you can define protocol priorities to ensure the arrival of critical data and set up outbound filters to handle unwanted data Configuring Filters for Primary Secondary Interfaces To configure filters for primary secondary interfaces 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Protocols gt Edit Protocol Priority Site Manager displays the Priority Outbound Filters window Figure 10 11 Lore Pag ly Template Ere ate Edit Reor De Liebe Wolum s Loh ae Falter Enable Filter Mae Figure 10 11 Priority Outbound Filters Window 3 Create enable and modify traffic filters Refer to Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritizat
137. ages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to export directly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Bay Networks Inc 4401 Great America Parkway P O Box 58185 Santa Clara Calif
138. al interfaces to accomplish this goal ITU T divides ISDN interfaces into two categories functional groups and reference points The following sections describe these two groups Functional Groups Functional groups perform specific tasks that are necessary for you to access an ISDN network These groups combine physical devices and functional points in an ISDN network as follows Terminal equipment 1 TE1 ISDN compatible devices for example the router with an ISDN BRI module e Terminal equipment 2 TE2 Non SDN compatible devices such as analog phones and PCs e Network terminator 1 NT1 The point where the phone company s wires end at your premises e Network terminator 2 NT2 The point where any switching services occur at your premises e Line terminator LT The point where your network lines terminate at the phone company s central office e Exchange terminator ET Located at the phone company s central office it performs the switching exchange functions Terminal adapter TA Provides ISDN connectivity to non ISDN devices 117353 A Rev A 3 5 Configuring Dial Services Reference Points Reference points also called interfaces bring two functions together A reference point may be physical along the ISDN line or merely a conceptual point where functions merge There are four main reference points in an ISDN network R reference point The point between the non ISDN de
139. al optimized routing for IPX Receive Only If the router does not receive data it terminates the connection The router disregards data it transmits Either Direction If the router does not receive or transmit data it terminates the connection The inactivity can be in either direction 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 46 A 44 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Circuit Schedule Parameters Demand and Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Days Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Weekday Monday through Sunday Weekday Weekend Specifies the days that this circuit should be available The router uses this parameter together with the Start Time and End Time parameters to create a time period that the circuit can be available Enter a specific day of the week enter Weekday for the entire week enter Weekend for the entire weekend Note that individual days of the week take precedence over the Weekday option For example the router will provi
140. aling information such as call setup requests It transmits this information at a rate of 16 Kb s The networking industry also refers to BRI service as 2B D to denote the combination of the two B channels and one D channel These three channels are combined into one physical twisted pair line that terminates at your premises and provides a total of 144 Kb s bandwidth Figure 3 2 64 Kb s B channel Q 144 Kb s 64 Kb s B channel Q 2B D 16 Kb s D channel Q DS0008A Figure 3 2 The BRI Interface 3 2 117353 A Rev A ISDN Overview Primary Rate Interface PRI is the other ISDN service In the United States Canada and Japan PRI transmits data at a rate of 64 Kb s over 23 B channels and sends signaling information at a rate of 64 Kb s over one D channel 23B D In Europe PRI transmits data at the same rates with 30 B channels and one D channel 30B D PRI channels combine into two physical twisted pair lines There are two types of PRI service because the United States Canada and Japan derive the PRI transmission rates from the T1 standard which operates at line speeds of 1 544 Mb s Europe and Australia however use the E1 standard which operates at line speeds of 2 048 Mb s The D Channel The D channel is integral to ISDN services It provides out of band signaling which means that the line that carries signaling information is separate from the line that carries data Using
141. all is the monitor and the router who receives the call is the non monitor If your router is communicating with a remote Bay Networks router the remote router must be set to Dynamic Monitor unless it uses software prior to Version 11 01 in which case do not select this option If your router is communicating with a non Bay Networks router select this option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 36 A 78 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BOD Pool ID Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition None 1 to 255 Identifies the bandwidth pool associated with the bandwidth circuit If you select Bandwidth on Demand for the Circuit Type parameter enter the ID of the bandwidth pool that this circuit should use If you select Normal for the Circuit Type parameter Site Manager does not allow you to enter a pool ID You must create a pool before you can specify a circuit as a bandwidth circuit The router first creates the circuit as a normal circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 Bandwidth Mode Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Non Monitor for leased circuits Dynamic Monitor for d
142. aller resolution table Using incoming call filtering the router can maintain security while refusing the initial call from the client This saves the client phone charges To enable incoming call filtering refer to Chapter 8 When the server uses incoming filtering it relies on the incoming phone number to identify the client When the server receives the call from the client it matches the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list The circuit number specified in the Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter identifies the circuit that the server uses to place the outgoing call back to the client The Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter is located in the Incoming Phone List window Refer to Chapter 12 for configuration instructions Demand Circuit Groups A demand circuit group is a set of demand circuits that share the same user defined unnumbered protocol configuration An unnumbered protocol configuration does not restrict the router to a specific destination address Instead it enables the router to use any circuit in the group for an incoming call eliminating the need to configure a unique demand circuit for each remote node in the network One demand circuit group supports many remote routers thereby reducing the configuration tasks for a large network Demand Pools and Demand Circuit Groups Like individual demand circuits a demand circuit group is associated with an existing
143. ally or statically If the UNI is dynamic it changes for each call This means that the PVCs may be different for each call but they direct data to the same destination The router initially learns the PVCs when it calls the Frame Relay switch If the UNI is static the user has defined the PVCs and can configure them for the router The UNI remains the same for all calls For a Frame Relay demand configuration to work well follow these guidelines e You must have a PVC configured before you place a call For data to activate a demand circuit instead of using Force Dial the router must learn at least one PVC from the Frame Relay switch before it can place a call However to learn the PVCs the router must call the switch which it cannot do For a dynamic UNI you need to statically configure at least one PVC on the router that is not configured for the switch The static PVC acts as a fake PVC that the router uses only to place an initial call to the switch To configure a static PVC you set the Frame Relay Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI to a number other than the number the switch provider assigns assuming you know the range of possible DLCIs The static PVC is still valid if you happen to use a number that the switch provider uses Refer to Configuring Frame Relay Services for information about configuring PVCs For a static UNI the user configures the PVCs A fake PVC is unnecessary 2 8 117353 A Rev
144. ameter is set the router uses this value and ignores the outgoing call s value If no value is set for either parameter the router uses the default 64 Kb s I 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 9 Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters gt ISDN Configured Switches Disable Enable Disable Globally enables or disables X 25 service over the D channel for a slot on the router Site Manager automatically sets this parameter to Enable when you configure X 25 service over the D channel for a BRI line Refer to page A 24 for the parameter that enables this feature for the BRI line Select Disable to disable this service for a slot 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 10 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Pool Channel Count and Priority Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pool Channel Count Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration gt OK gt ISDN Logical Lines OR Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt select pool gt Edit gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Logical Lines Available B channels 1 to 2 BRI 1 to 23 PRI MCT1 1 to 30 PRI MCE1 The channel count range for PRI depends on the number o
145. ameters Demand Backup Bandwidth 0 A 37 Circuit Duration Parameters Demand and Backup ccceceeeeeeereeeesteeeeeeees A 42 xii 117353 A Rev A Circuit Schedule Parameters Demand and Dial Backup ceeseeeeeeeeerees A 45 Demand Circuit Group Parameters c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeesiaeeeneneees A 51 Caller Resolution Info Parameters for Demand Circuit Groups eeeeeee A 52 Demand Circuit Group Protocol Parameters cc cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeee A 54 PPP Circuit Options Parameters Dial Backup sscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeteneees A 57 PPP Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Dial Backup ccecceeeeteeeteteees A 58 Frame Relay Interface Type Parameter Dial Backup ceeeesseeeeeesteeeeeeeneaes A 59 Frame Relay Primary Interface Definition Parameters Dial Backup A 61 Frame Relay Interface Parameters Demand and Dial Backup eee A 62 Service List Parameter Demand and Dial Backup ccceeeteeeeereeeetteeteeeees A 71 Frame Relay PVC Parameters Demand and Dial Backup ceeeeeeeees A 72 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Options Parameters cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees A 77 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Parameters cccccsseeeereeetteeeeenees A 79 Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor Parameters ccceecceeseeeeeees A 80
146. an existing bandwidth on demand pool providing a total of 30 lines for communication This feature is only for demand configurations that use PPP as the data link layer protocol Adding bandwidth to a congested demand line benefits time critical applications that require data to reach its destination efficiently To enable bandwidth on demand service you associate the demand circuit with a bandwidth on demand pool then you configure parameters that monitor congestion across the line Once you enable bandwidth on demand service the router determines that the demand line is congested when the traffic over the line exceeds a certain user configured threshold The router that is configured as the congestion monitor then searches for an available line from the bandwidth pool that you associate with this demand circuit Lines in a bandwidth on demand pool can reside across slots so you need to designate each slot as either preferred or reserved This determines the order in which the router searches the slots for available lines the preferred slot is first and the reserved slot is second If these slots have no available lines the router automatically uses the local slot The local slot is the slot containing the first demand line that was activated When the router activates additional lines they adopt the configuration of the congested demand circuit PPP multilink is the protocol that enables the router to use multiple lines simultaneously to
147. and router software For instructions refer to Upgrading Routers from Version 7 11 xx to Version 12 00 Conventions bold text Indicates text that you need to enter command names and buttons in menu paths Example Enter wism amp Example Use the dinfo command Example ATM DXI gt Interfaces gt PVCs identifies the PVCs button in the window that appears when you select the Interfaces option from the ATM DXI menu italic text Indicates variable values in command syntax descriptions new terms file and directory names and book titles quotation marks Indicate the title of a chapter or section within a book screen text Indicates data that appears on the screen Example Set Bay Networks Trap Monitor Filters separator gt Separates menu and option names in instructions and internal pin to pin wire connections Example Protocols gt AppleTalk identifies the AppleTalk option in the Protocols menu Example Pin 7 gt 19 gt 20 xxvi 117353 A Rev A vertical line I Acronyms AURP BACP BAP BofL BRI CHAP CSU DLCI DLCMI DSL DSU ET HDLC IP IPX ISDN ITU T LAN LAPD LCP LQR LT NT PAP PH About This Guide Indicates that you enter only one of the parts of the command The vertical line separates choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show at routes nets you enter either show at routes or show at nets but not bo
148. andwidth circuit exceeds the configured congestion threshold thereby concluding that the line or bundle is congested Enter the number of consecutive times the circuit can exceed the threshold before the router activates a secondary line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 54 Preferred Bandwidth Slot Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options None Available slots in the bandwidth pool For example if the bandwidth pool has lines from slot 3 and slot 4 you cannot enter a value of 5 Specifies the slot the router chooses first when adding a line to a multilink bundle For BAP configurations the non monitor router uses this parameter to determine which lines are available It then sends the local phone number associated with an available line to the monitor router which then dials the number to activate the line for additional bandwidth Enter the number of the slot you want the router to use first but note the following Site Manager looks for another circuit configured as Monitor in the same pool as the newly created circuit If one exists Site Manager copies the value for the existing circuit s Preferred Bandwidth Slot parameter and enters it for this parameter You do not have to enter a value If this is the first circuit configured as Monitor in a pool that uses only one slot Site Manager automatically enters the slot number You do not
149. ards outlined in ITU T recommendation 1 430 the physical layer protocol that defines the S T interface For PRI service the interface follows ITU T recommendation 1 431 You have an S interface only if an NT2 device is present An NT2 is a switch at your site that connects your TE and TE2 equipment to the network Figure 4 6 shows the router in a sample ISDN network S T U L_J TE1 Digital line router DS0012A Figure 4 6 Router in an ISDN Network The following sections explain ISDN operation on your router 4 10 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services BRI Service on the AN ANH ASN and ARN The AN ANH ASN and ARN support the BRI standard for ISDN using an integrated ISDN BRI Link module Note The ARN can only use three B channels If you select 2B D service for one BRI interface you must use 1B D service for the second interface The ISDN BRI module allows you to connect directly to the ISDN network instead of connecting via a terminal adapter With BRI you reduce equipment costs and simplify connections to an ISDN switch The BRI implementation supports all three dial services In addition the implementation supports an ISDN leased line application for Germany only Subsequent chapters in this manual describe how to configure each service to connect to an ISDN network B Channel Support In keeping
150. are is first shipped to Licensee Bay Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Bay Networks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Bay Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Bay Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Bay Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PU
151. ary Line ccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeees B 17 Dial Backup over an ISDN Network 0 cc cccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeneaes B 18 Gonfiguration of ROUtEr oaeee enara a ran aa ana ee aa zee nen dele dveteetedtereeh eid B 18 Configuration of Router 2 esssesssssesssisssserssrtsrsrtrtistrinssristsriestnnnsinnntnnnttnnnu nnn nnet B 19 Port Application Mode Configuration sseesssssesieeesresssnrsesesennssrnnssrnsssrnssrns B 19 Backup Pool Configuration s sseessseesseeeseeesiesriissrirssinssstnsstrnstrnntnnntnnnennnsennn B 20 Backup Circuit Configuration ssseesseeesseeeseessiissrirssrrsssrnsstrnstrnnrrnnstnnnnnnsrnnn B 20 Outgoing Phone LAST a r rr aara a eaae eraa a aa aaea a iaie B 22 Caller Resolution Table Configuration 0 cccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaeeeteneees B 22 Local Phone Number Configuration cccccececceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeees B 23 Configuring Dial Backup with Standard or Frame Relay cccsssceeeeeeseees B 23 Appendix C Dial Services Parameter Defaults Appendix D Ordering ISDN Lines in the United States Ordering BRI Lines a aa aa aa aaa a aa aa aa aas a a raa aaa aa aa aa ANEA AERE rT D 1 Ordering PRI Lines i E ee et ee ee DM ree aia D 2 Appendix E AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Index xiv 117353 A Rev A Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1
152. associated with the demand circuit Enter the ID number of the configured demand pool that you want this circuit to use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 6 Force Take Down Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disable Enable Disable Forces the router to immediately terminate the demand circuit Accept the default Disable or select Enable to force the router to terminate the demand circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 24 Force Dial Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disable Enable Disable Forces the demand circuit connection to immediately activate To force a demand circuit connection select Enable then reset it to Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 9 A 26 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Inactivity Time Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 60 seconds 1 to 99 999 999 seconds Measures the data inactivity on the line Specifically it determines the number of seconds that can elapse without data activity before the router disconnects the line Each time data passes through the router the inactivity time resets NOTE The router does
153. ay Schedule Automatic Automatic Manual For PPP standby circuits only this parameter controls the failback to the primary circuit if the Standby Failback Mode parameter is set to None Select Automatic to automatically deactivate the hot standby circuit and return to the primary circuit The Failback Time parameter for this circuit determines the failback delay Select Manual to manually deactivate the hot standby circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 9 117353 A Rev A A 49 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Failback Time min Path Demand Circuits only Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Default 0 Options 0 to 1439 minutes Function For PPP standby circuits only this parameter indicates the amount of time the router waits before deactivating the standby circuit and returning to a recovered primary circuit This option is available only if the Standby Mode parameter is set to Hot Standby the Standby Failback Mode parameter is set to None and you have selected a primary circuit for the Standby Primary Circuit parameter Instructions Enter the amount of time in minutes that the router should wait before returning to the primary circuit for data transmission Be sure to consider how much time it takes to ensure that the primary circuit is st
154. backup service For demand circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window Hactup Hode CHAP Loca Meme CHAP Secret Figure 12 1 Primary Circuit Definition Window 3 Select a circuit and click on Phone Out Site Manager displays the Outgoing Phone List window Figure 12 2 117353 A Rev A 12 3 Configuring Dial Services tining Phere Meter Tigre Phe Face uik futgoorg Pho he ie ter Phone Humber Tyme TS Husbering Tip DSi Humbering ilam Figure 12 2 Outgoing Phone List Window 4 Click on Add Site Manager displays the Phone Number window Figure 12 3 Note The router dials the phone numbers in the order in which they occur in the list 12 4 117353 A Rev A Customizing Phone Lists Guteoioe Prines Kiir Outgoing Phra Emt iiir Guigalra Phones Oeil levi ter Certo lig Teire Meme Tyg Proce Pref ie Figure 12 3 Phone Number Window 5 Enter a phone number Site Manager Outgoing Phone Number parameter page A 90 6 Enter an extension and delimiter if applicable Site Manager Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr parameter page A 91 Site Manager Outgoing Phone Delimiter parameter page A 92 7 Specify the type of connection for this phone number Site Manager Outgoing Phone Number Type parameter page A 93 8 For Hayes d
155. between status inquiry messages that the router transmits Status inquiry messages cause a network response in the form of a link Integrity verification message or full status message Successful completion of the request response handshake verifies the status of the router Frame Relay network link We recommend that you accept the default value 10 seconds If the default value does not match what the network requests enter a value that is appropriate for your network in the range of 5 to 30 seconds Polling Interval does not function if you set Mgmnt Type to DLCMI None 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 10 117353 A Rev A A 65 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Full Enquiry Interval Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface 6 1 to 255 polling intervals Specifies the interval between full status inquiry messages that the router transmits Full status inquiry messages cause the network to send a full status report message which lists all PVCs the PVC status active or inactive and whether the PVC is new or previously established This parameter works with the Polling Interval parameter The default value 6 tells t
156. ble gt Caller Name and Secret Password Table B 22 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Router 2 only Barametar Router 1 Router 2 S11 S331 Caller Name N A BLN CHAP Secret N A West Click on OK Site Manager displays the Local Circuit List window Path Caller Name and Secret Password gt Local Circuit List The primary circuits are listed in the Local Circuit List window Choose the circuit you created earlier B 16 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Dial Backup with Standard on the Primary Line If the primary circuit uses Bay Networks Standard as the WAN protocol refer to Figure B 3 you must configure a unique value for the MAC Address parameter of the primary IP interface The router then uses this address as the value of the MAC Address parameter in the IP adjacent host entry for the remote router Routers on each end of the connection require an IP adjacent host entry that includes the other router s MAC address The previous section Dial Backup with PPP on the Primary Line explains how to configure most dial backup parameters with the exception of the IP parameters listed in Tables B 23 and B 24 Table B 23 IP Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S11 129 122 3 1 331 129 122 3 2 MAC Address 0x000000000001 0x000000000002 Once you configure a MAC address you must configure the IP adjacent host parameters Table B 24 IP Adj
157. ble 1 1 Dial Service Names Full Name Abbreviated Name Dial on demand Demand Dial backup Backup Bandwidth on demand Bandwidth Before You Begin Before you configure a dial service you should have done the following Installed the router Installed either ISDN or modem lines Ordered Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN service if applicable and received the information for setting up ISDN configurations for example switch type and phone numbers Refer to Appendix D for information on ordering ISDN lines in the United States Ordered and configured external modems if applicable Decided whether to use the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP or the Password Authentication Protocol PAP for Point to Point Protocol PPP connections 1 2 117353 A Rev A Getting Started In addition you should have read Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager and done the following e Selected a COM MCT1 or MCE port and configured a leased interface only dial backup or bandwidth on demand service only When you configure dial up circuits you designate these leased interfaces as dial backup primaries or bandwidth circuits You do not need to do this for dial on demand service even if you configure demand circuits to use bandwidth on demand service e Opened a configuration file e Selected the router hardware modules if this is a local mode configuration Chapter 2 of this manual
158. cal Phone Numbers Window ecceececeeeeeeneeesneeseeeseeeeaes 1 39 Figure 1 32 Phone Number Window cc cesses eee ee sees eee a ee sees e een ae eneeeee 1 39 Figure 1 33 Caller Resolution Table Window cccccccccsseceeeeessneeeeeesssneeeeeesseeeeees 1 41 Figure 1 34 Caller Name and Secret Password Window cscccccesseeeeeeeeesteeeeeee 1 41 Figure 1 35 Local Circuit List WiNdOW cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeeteneees 1 42 Figure 2 1 Example of Dial Access to a Switched Telephone Network n se 2 2 Figure 2 2 Dial on Demand Service cccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesseeeeeaeeee 2 5 Figure 2 3 Example of Demand Lines Pools and Circuits ccccscceceesseeeeeeeee 2 6 Figure 2 4 Dial on Demand Connection over a Frame Relay Network seses 2 7 Figure 2 5 Additional Lines for a Dial on Demand Connection s s 2 12 Figure 2 6 PPP Backup over a PSTN ou eeeccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeneesssaeesseneees 2 14 Figure 2 7 PPP Backup over an ISDN Network 00 0 eececceeeeeeneceeeeeeeesseeneeeaes 2 15 Figure 2 8 Link Backup for a Frame Relay Network cccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 2 15 Figure 2 9 Example of Backup Pools Lines and Circuits ccccccesseeeeeeeereees 2 18 Figure 2 10 An Example of Bandwidth on Demand Service n 2 22 Figure 2 11 Sample Bandwidth on Demand Network ccceeseeseesse
159. cal router wants to send data to the remote destination Instructions Enter a value of 56K if the connections to the destination device only support this rate otherwise accept the default 64K If you are unsure of your network connections ask your network provider If the value of this parameter is less than the value of the Global Adaption Rate parameter then this value overrides the Global Adaption Rate value For example if this parameter is set to 56 Kb s and the Global Adaption Rate is set to 64 Kb s the router uses the rate of 56 Kb s for the outgoing call If the value of the parameters is equal or only the Global Adaption Rate parameter is set the router uses the global value and ignores the outgoing phone number s value If no value is set for either parameter the router uses the default 64 Kb s MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 10 117353 A Rev A A 95 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Remote Pool Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Dial and Bandwidth o
160. cation Protocol For network security the router must identify itself in the call setup message that it sends to the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol To specify the CHAP information for the local router 1 Scroll down the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window to the CHAP parameters 2 Enter values for the CHAP Local Name and CHAP Secret parameters The CHAP Local Name must be unique but the CHAP Secret must be the same on both sides of the connection Site Manager CHAP Local Name parameter page A 37 Site Manager CHAP Secret parameter page A 38 3 Do one of the following If you have ISDN lines in the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 1 36 If you have only Raise D TR lines in the pool click on Done in the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 1 40 1 32 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines If the demand line becomes congested the router can provide 29 additional dial up lines to reduce congestion To do this you enable bandwidth service for the demand line by associating it with a configured bandwidth pool To add bandwidth service for a demand circuit 1 Select Dialup gt Demand Cir
161. circuits 9 Keep the Primary Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Specifying the Backup Mode 1 26 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Specifying the Backup Mode The backup mode determines which router initiates a backup connection To specify the backup mode 1 Scroll down the Primary Circuit Definition window to the Backup Mode parameter Select a value for the Backup Mode parameter Master is the default If this router is set to Master the peer must be set to Slave Site Manager Backup Mode parameter page A 58 3 Go to the next section Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information For network security the master router must identify itself when it calls the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol To specify the CHAP information for the local router do the following 1 Scroll down the Primary Circuit Definition window to the CHAP parameters Enter values for the CHAP Local Name and CHAP Secret parameters The CHAP Local Name must be unique but the CHAP Secret must be the same on both sides of the connection Site Manager CHAP Local Name parameter page A 37 Site Manager CHAP Secret parameter page A 38 Do one o
162. cols WiINdOW ccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeseneeeesaaeeeeneeess 9 9 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window csccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeenees 9 13 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window ccsccceeeeeeeteeeteeteeeeteeeeeaees 9 14 Completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window n se 9 15 Demand Circuit Groups Window cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetaeeeeneeees 9 16 Enter a Demand Pool WiINdOW ecceeeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaeeeeneenaees 9 17 Caller Resolution Info Window cccccceeseeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaaeeeenes 9 18 Completed Demand Circuit Groups WindOW sesser 9 19 Demand Circuit Group Window cceeeeeeee ects eeeeeee sees eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 9 21 xvii xviii Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 Figure 10 12 Figure 10 13 Figure 10 14 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 Figure 12 6 Figure 12 7 Figure 12 8 Figure 12 9 Figure 12 10 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 Figure 13 3 Primary Circuit Definition WindOW sssssessseseseeesseessieerresrisssrrsssrnssrnnses 10 2 Circuit Options WiNdOW ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeesaaeeseeeeeesnaeeeeaes 10 3 Completed Primary Cir
163. congestion on a leased line Incoming Call Filtering Incoming call filtering is a security feature that works with the ISDN caller ID service Incoming call filtering lets the router filter incoming calls based on the calling party s phone number This feature is available for BRI and PRI service Caution To use incoming call filtering you must purchase caller ID service from your ISDN service provider If you enable incoming call filtering without caller ID service the router rejects all incoming calls The router filters incoming calls based on a list of phone numbers that you specify in an incoming phone list The phone number you enter must exactly match the phone number that the switch sends to the router If the phone number is included in the router s list the router accepts the call If not the router rejects the call This ensures that only authorized users have access to your network To activate this feature enable the Incoming Filter parameter and create an incoming phone list Refer to Chapter 12 for instructions Rate Adaption Rate adaption enables the router to accommodate data transmission at a rate of 56 Kb s over a 64 Kb s B channel Bay Networks only supports 56 Kb s adapted to 64 Kb s using the ITU T V 110 type of rate adaption You can enable rate adaption for BRI and PRI service For incoming calls the router automatically adapts the data received at 56 Kb s to the 64 Kb s channel based on i
164. cting ISDN a complex networking technology is further explained in Chapter 3 117353 A Rev A 2 3 Configuring Dial Services Dial on Demand Service Dial on demand service enables you to establish a network connection only when the router has data to send across the network or when you dynamically configure the router to establish a connection By using dial up lines you significantly reduce the high costs associated with leased lines which connect remote locations even if there is no data to transmit or receive To implement dial on demand the router establishes a demand circuit that is the logical connection over a physical line The router establishes a demand circuit when e The router has data to send across the circuit e You specify a time of day to activate the circuit e You enable the Force Dial parameter which instructs the router to force a connection The router terminates the circuit when e The configured inactivity time expires because the router is not sending or receiving data e You schedule a time of day to take the circuit down e You enable the Force Take Down parameter which instructs the router to force the termination of a connection Refer to Activating Demand Circuits on page 2 9 for more information Dial on demand is supported on asynchronous RS 449 synchronous RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces Figure 2 2 shows a demand line connecting two routers W
165. ction Mode parameter A 28 Connection Type parameter A 97 customer support programs xxix Technical Solutions Centers xxix D D channel description 3 2 function 3 3 role of LAPD 3 3 data channel See D channel data compression 117353 A Rev A advantages 5 19 6 1 backup circuits 6 1 demand circuits 5 19 Days parameter A 45 Debug Mode parameter A 8 defaults dial service parameters C 1 demand circuit groups configuring 9 16 configuring caller resolution 5 12 parameters Associated IP Address A 54 Bridge Enable A 56 IP Enable A 54 IPX Enable A 55 IPX Routing Protocol A 55 IPXWAN Enable A 56 Number of Circuits A 51 OSPF Enable A 55 Pool ID A 51 RIP Enable A 55 protocols 5 13 relationship with demand pools 5 11 sample application 6 4 demand circuits activating 2 4 adding bandwidth 2 11 circuit duration 2 9 configuring 9 2 configuring availability 2 10 criteria for activating 2 4 criteria for deactivating 2 4 2 10 customizing 9 10 data compression 5 19 deleting 9 23 enabling a force dial 2 9 relationship with demand pools 2 6 scheduling availability 9 13 demand lines types of lines used 2 4 Demand Pool ID parameter A 4 A 26 demand pools Index 3 description 2 5 IDs for 2 5 dial backup circuit backup description 2 14 circuits configuring 10 17 data compression 6 1 for failed primary lines 2 19 Frame Relay 10 5 Frame Relay filters 10 12 Fram
166. ctivates a circuit from the specified circuit group Site Manager prompts you for this information because demand circuit groups cannot initiate calls Site Manager ensures that you make an entry for the remote router in the caller resolution table so that the local router configured with the demand circuit group can accept incoming calls 117353 A Rev A 9 17 Configuring Dial Services Caller Homs CHAP Generic Pir Paced Figure 9 14 Caller Resolution Info Window Complete the Caller Resolution Info window as follows 1 Enter values for the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A You can make additional entries in the caller resolution table Refer to Chapter 13 for instructions 2 Click on OK when you are finished You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window which shows the new demand circuit group and its demand pool Figure 9 15 9 18 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits i Add Grom jit Poets Apm lip Ti IP Crate Mamati UP odin RIF Enatla Fay Greate IPR Enable TPS Routing Protoni Figure 9 15 Completed Demand Circuit Groups Window 3 Enable the unnumbered protocols that you want for this demand circuit group For parameter descriptions refer to Appendix A 4 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 9 19 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the Demand Circuit Group Configuration To modify the demand circuit group configuration 1 Begin at the Configu
167. cuit Router A is not limited to calling Router B Router A dials the next phone number in its outgoing phone list Router C s phone number and makes a connection 117353 A Rev A 6 3 Configuring Dial Services For Router A to dial Router C configure the routers as shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Configuration Requirements for Routers A and C Router A Router C Configure an unnumbered PPP primary Configure a demand pool with unnumbered circuit demand circuits Configure routing protocols for the Configure routing protocols on the demand primary circuit circuit to match Router A s routing protocol configuration for the primary circuit N A Set Connection Mode parameter to No Dial Include CHAP Local Name CHAP Configure the caller resolution table to include Secret or PAP Local ID PAP Password Router A s CHAP Name CHAP Secret or PAP for the primary circuit ID PAP Password Simplifying Unnumbered Configurations with Demand Circuit Groups You can simplify configurations for large networks by using a demand circuit group and dial backup service A demand circuit group is a set of demand circuits that share the same user defined unnumbered protocol configuration An unnumbered protocol configuration does not restrict the router to a specific destination address Instead it enables the router to use any circuit in the group for an incoming call eliminating the need to configure a unique demand circuit f
168. cuit Definition Window 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeees 10 4 FR Primary Interface Definition WiINGOW eeccceeeeesteeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaees 10 5 FR Interface WINdOW ea sirno eanna Een E EAAS TEE 10 6 Completed FR Primary Interface Definition Window cccceeeee 10 7 FR Backup Interface Window for Primary Shared Interfaces 10 8 Frame Relay Backup Service List Window ccccseeeeseeeeteeeteneeeees 10 9 Frame Relay Backup PVC List Window ccsccesseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteneees 10 10 Frame Relay PVC Add Window ccecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesenaeeeeneees 10 11 Priority Outbound Filters WindOW ccceceeeeseceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeneeeees 10 12 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window ccccceeeceeeeeseeeeeteeeteneeeeees 10 15 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window ccccceeceeeeeteeeetteeeeneeeeeees 10 16 Completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window ceeeeeeee 10 16 Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Window cccceeeeeeeeeeees 11 2 Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Window ccceeeeeeeees 11 5 Bandwidth On Demand Pools Window css eeesceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseaees 11 7 Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool Window ccccccssteeeeeeees 11 8 Circuit List WindOW 2 25 c00 seit dite Goede iets IMac 11 10 Circuit Definition WINKOW cccccesessecceceeeceecesceesseaeeaeceeeeeseeseeeeseeaes 11 11 Edit BAP Ci
169. cuits gt PPP Circuits Site Manager displays the PPP Demand Circuits window Figure 1 25 Demand Pool tf Force Take ipin Force Dial Tract ti Tiet Ferry Nnw Ratry Dalay Figure 1 25 PPP Demand Circuits Window 2 Click on BW on Demand Site Manager displays the Enter a BOD Pool window Figure 1 26 117353 A Rev A 1 33 Configuring Dial Services Bane dhem n Pool TD Bande lath Modi HAI MOT TOF Figure 1 26 Enter a BOD Pool Window 3 Enter the ID number of a configured bandwidth pool 4 Click on OK Site Manager displays the BOD Configuration window Figure 1 27 The parameters in this window determine whether the router acts as the monitor router which means that it monitors congestion on the line and whether the router activates additional lines to relieve congestion 1 34 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Banda lith on lemand Fool th MY Cirma Mets BN Esas Parizi ED Full Thresa Bm Purioda To Fali Preferred Hancwidth Sinot Baran Qari Thee Haim LL BM Rocovery Trini Iil Ga Ported te Recowor Figure 1 27 BOD Configuration Window 5 Click on OK to accept the defaults You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window 6 Click on Remove BOD only if you want to remove bandwidth service for the demand circuit otherwise go to the next step 7 Do one of the following If you have ISDN lines in the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 1 36
170. d Enables dial optimized routing for this interface Select Enabled to exchange RIP or RIP SAP updates only when a connection is active for data transmission or when the protocol makes an update request at the expiration of the Broadcast Timer IP or Update Interval IPX Routing updates alone cannot initiate connections Accept the default Disable if you do not want to limit updates in this way If you enable or disable dial optimized routing dynamically while your demand connection is active the router deactivates the connection If there is still data to send after the call is cleared the router places another call using the new value for this parameter If you do not enable dial optimized routing you may want to limit routing updates using another method Refer to Chapter 5 for more information about limiting broadcast traffic 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 47 A 30 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Routing Update Hold Time Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits 0 0 to 600 seconds Tells the router how long to wait before sending RIP or SAP updates across the Frame Relay demand circuit This parameter works together with dial optimized routing If you enable dial optimized routing enter the number of seconds that the router should wait after placing a call to send routing update
171. d the router again uses only the leased line demand line or bundle Refer to Chapter 11 for details about the monitor parameters 2 24 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Terminating Secondary Lines The router terminates secondary lines when e The leased line or multilink bundle fails e The leased circuit is no longer congested e The remote router terminates the connection e There is a physical problem with the dial up line Sample Bandwidth on Demand Application In Figure 2 11 the leased line is congested due to bridge routing protocol traffic The BLN in Rome designated as the monitor router has determined the line is congested based on the monitor parameter values Consequently the router brings up an ISDN B channel as a secondary line Z a Rome at Backbone link node TA 7 i E S J Secondary dial up line gt ISDN B channel Slot 3 N Avignon octal sync Be N EA E arte access node Leased line 9 6 Kb s EAN dual sync dual ethernet 64 Kb s leased line to Florence Z Fa Dial up line to Interlaken DS0001A Figure 2 11 Sample Bandwidth on Demand Network The monitor router brings down the secondary line once the level of congestion falls below the configured percentages In addition to supporting the leased line
172. d circuit group Refer to Chapter 5 for more information about demand circuit groups To configure a demand circuit group 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Groups window Figure 9 12 fo ised Circuit rope a WANS riss md Group help IP ihl Romio CP address RIP Doriaaiti Lia EFT Diiis IFE Drible IFE Mimiingj Fral Figure 9 12 Demand Circuit Groups Window 3 Click on Add Group Site Manager displays the Enter a Demand Pool window Figure 9 13 9 16 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits Valimi Help Peal If 2 l pusiu of Elna i Figure 9 13 Enter a Demand Pool Window 4 Enter the demand pool ID that this group should use Site Manager Pool ID parameter page A 51 5 Enter the number of circuits you want in the group Site Manager Number of Circuits parameter page A 51 6 Click on OK 7 Go to the next section Caller Resolution Information for Demand Circuit Groups Caller Resolution Information for Demand Circuit Groups After you specify the demand pool ID and the number of circuits for a demand circuit group Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Info window Figure 9 14 You use this window to enter the CHAP name or PAP ID of the remote routers associated with this demand circuit group When a remote call comes in the router a
173. d slot and finally the local slot Assign a number to each line in the pool The lower the number the higher the priority For pools that combine modem and ISDN lines coordinate the priority assignments for this interface with those you set using the Pool Channel Priority parameter for the ISDN interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 97 A 6 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters External Modem Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Retry Delay COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface 3 seconds 0 to infinity Specifies the number of seconds the router waits between attempts to reestablish the connection Enter the number of seconds you want the router to wait between retry attempts 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 10 Redial Count COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface 3 1 to 10 Specifies the maximum number of times that the router can attempt to connect to a dial up line before it is disconnected Select a number between 1 and 10 inclusive 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 16 Ring Indicator COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface Enable Enable Disable Enables o
174. d that they can broadcast routing updates IP and IPX can also send triggered updates if any occur while the connection is active The connection remains active for the time you specify in the Minimum Duration Time parameter This timer specifies the minimum amount of time the connection is active The timer must be set long enough to send complete routing updates to the remote routers The inactivity time which starts at the same time as the minimum duration timer determines how long the connection remains active by monitoring data inactivity When there is no more data transmitting the inactivity time expires and the router deactivates the connection If you enable or disable dial optimized routing dynamically while your demand connection is active the router deactivates the connection If there is still data to send after the call is cleared the router places another call using the new configuration for the dial optimized routing feature Enabling Dial Optimized Routing for Frame Relay Demand Circuits When you enable dial optimized routing for Frame Relay demand circuits you must also set the Routing Update Hold Time parameter This parameter instructs the router to wait for an active connection to the destination device before sending RIP or SAP routing updates This timer is necessary if the UNI between the router and the switch is a dynamic UNI which means that the router learns the PVCs when it calls the Frame Relay switch The ro
175. de a circuit scheduled for Monday between 9 a m and 11 a m before it provides a circuit scheduled for a weekday between 8 a m and 12 noon 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 4 117353 A Rev A A 45 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Start Time Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule 0 0 to 2400 Specifies the time of day the demand or backup circuit is available The router uses this parameter and the End Time parameter to establish a time period when the circuit is available This parameter also specifies the time of day any secondary lines are available if you configure bandwidth on demand service for a PPP demand circuit Enter an hour of the day using the 24 hour system of expressing time For example to activate the circuit at 5 00 p m enter 1700 For the router to activate the circuit at the configured start time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default Available If you do not want the router to activate th
176. dial service should be operating To further modify your configuration refer to the appropriate chapter for instructions Chapter 2 provides an overview of each service Chapter 3 provides an overview of ISDN Chapter 4 describes Bay Networks implementation common to all dial services Chapters 5 through 7 describe Bay Networks implementation of dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand respectively These chapters provide information to help you make appropriate customizing choices Chapters 8 through 13 provide instructions for customizing your configuration Appendix A contains parameter descriptions for all dial services Appendix B provides some basic configuration examples Appendix C lists parameter defaults for all dial services Appendix D explains how to order ISDN lines in the United States Appendix E lists the AT initialization commands for the ARN 117353 A Rev A 1 43 Chapter 2 Dial Services Overview A dial service provides access to a central switched network for remote users such as people in branch offices telecommuters and sales people in the field To make these remote connections dial services use dial up lines also called switched lines which are activated only when needed If you send a limited amount of data or your data transmission is intermittent dial up lines can be less expensive than leased lines and they improve network performance and flexibility This chapter intro
177. different network layer address and data link layer configuration PVCs and filters from the primary circuit Note If the backup circuit connects to a different interface at the destination than the primary circuit you do not need to configure unique PVCs for the backup circuit In this case the switch informs the destination router of the available PVCs Activating the Backup Line When the router detects a failure on the primary line it selects a line from a backup pool The router activates a backup line when e The primary circuit is not operating e All of the primary circuit s lines have failed e An active backup line has failed If the backup line itself fails an inactive backup line can replace it only if you configure multiple lines in the backup pool If the first line fails for every phone number in the router s phone list and the primary line is still down the router tries the next line in the pool If you are backing up a Frame Relay primary circuit the router not the network activates and terminates the Frame Relay backup connection The router rejects incoming calls from the Frame Relay network 117353 A Rev A 2 19 Configuring Dial Services Reestablishing the Backup Connection If the remote site has several telephone lines attached to individual dial units the backup circuit uses the telephone numbers stored in the primary circuit s record to connect to the site If one telephone number
178. displays the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 3 Click on Edit Pools Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Group window refer to Figure 9 16 117353 A Rev A 9 21 Configuring Dial Services 4 Click on Add Site Manager displays the Enter a Demand Pool window refer to Figure 9 13 5 Enter a new value for the Pool ID parameter then click on OK Site Manager Pool ID parameter page A 51 6 Modify the value of the Number of Circuits parameter if necessary Site Manager Number of Circuits parameter page A 51 7 Click on Done You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 8 Click on Done Removing a Demand Circuit Group To remove a demand circuit group 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 3 Click on Edit Pools Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Group window Figure 9 16 4 Select the demand circuit group you want to remove 5 Click on Delete to remove a demand circuit group 6 Click on Done You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 7 Click on Done 9 22 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits Removing Demand Circuits To remove a demand circuit 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Sit
179. duces Bay Networks dial services Chapters 4 through 7 describe Bay Networks implementation of each dial service Bay Networks Dial Services The router provides three types of dial services dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand Each dial service serves a different purpose e Dial on demand service reduces your line costs by establishing a connection between two devices only when there is data to send You do not incur the cost of a leased line that is active regardless of data traffic e Dial backup service provides a backup circuit when a leased circuit fails The backup circuit serves as an alternative path for data to reach its destination e Bandwidth on demand service provides up to 29 additional lines for a congested leased line dial on demand line or leased multilink bundle This provides a total of 30 lines for communication The additional lines increase bandwidth for data traffic improving communication and reducing network delays 117353 A Rev A 2 1 Configuring Dial Services The names of the dial services are sometimes abbreviated in this manual Table 2 1 lists the full and abbreviated names of each dial service Table 2 1 Dial Service Names Full Name Abbreviated Name Dial on demand Demand Dial backup Backup Bandwidth on demand Bandwidth All three dial services work over Public Switched Telephone Networks PSTNs such as a standard telephone network a switched 56 Kb s
180. e ccccecescceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeessaeeeeenes 11 13 117353 A Rev A xi Chapter 12 Customizing Phone Lists Types of Phone Lists ssc noite aii ieee ini Aide ends nities diners EAR a 12 1 How ISDN Calls Use Phone Lists 00 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaaeeeseaeesecaeeeeeaeeeeeaees 12 2 Outgoing and Incoming Phone Lists ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeteaeeeseneeess 12 2 Local Phone EISts vacic aA eta Ane 12 2 How V 25bis and Hayes Calls Use the Outgoing Phone List c ceseceeeeeeeeeseeeeees 12 2 Creating an Outgoing Phone List c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseas 12 3 Modifying the Outgoing Phone List cccccceseeeseeee cece eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeneeeesaeeeseaeeeeaas 12 7 Enabling PRI MUultirate oiei eo A eiA EES EEEE KEA TAERA PESEE AAEREN 12 8 Creating an Incoming Phone List ISDN only ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseaeeeeeas 12 9 Modifying the Incoming Phone List 00 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaas 12 11 Creating a Local Phone List ISDN only cecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 12 12 Chapter 13 Customizing Caller Resolution Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Group ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneeeseas 13 1 Adding Entries to the Caller Resolution Table cccceccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeeas 13 2 M
181. e 8 5 2 Specify the modem for your network Click on Values to display a list of modems If the modem you are using is not on the list accept the default Custom Site Manager Modem Type parameter page A 8 If you select a modem from the list Site Manager automatically supplies the defaults for the Speaker Volume Speaker Control and No of Rings to Answer parameters 3 Enter a value for the Modem Init String parameter if you selected Custom for the modem type Site Manager Modem Init String parameter page A 9 4 Optionally change the modem s speaker volume and control Site Manager Speaker Volume parameter page A 10 Site Manager Speaker Control parameter page A 10 5 Optionally change the number of rings that the router waits for the modem to answer Site Manager No of Rings to Answer parameter page A 11 6 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window refer to Figure 8 3 7 Click on Done 8 8 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Modifying Modem Initialization Commands You can change the modem initialization command that the router sends to the modem Refer to Modifying Modem Configurations on page 8 6 to access the Modem Interface window To change the modem initialization command 1 Inthe Sync Modem Interface window change the modem command This is optional Raise DTR and V 25bis signaling do not requ
182. e Circuit Type parameter to Normal then click on OK Site Manager asks you to confirm your change Click on OK Site Manager removes the dial up circuits and treats the leased circuit as a regular circuit Click on OK You return to the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 11 13 Chapter 12 Customizing Phone Lists The router uses phone lists for calls to and from remote routers If any of the lines in your pool are ISDN lines or synchronous lines using V 25bis or Hayes signaling you must set up phone lists If a line uses Raise DTR signaling the phone numbers are already stored in the modem so phone lists are unnecessary Types of Phone Lists There are three types of phone lists you can define for the router e The outgoing phone list e The incoming phone list for ISDN only e The local phone list for ISDN only The outgoing phone list and incoming phone list contain the phone numbers of remote routers The router places calls using numbers in the outgoing phone list and verifies incoming calls using numbers in the incoming phone list Each remote router may have one or more phone numbers The local phone list contains the local router s phone numbers It uses these numbers to identify itself when it places a call Note Outgoing phone lists are associated with a specific circuit not with the line which the router uses for many different circuits Consequently the p
183. e Manager displays the Demand Pools window refer to Figure 9 1 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits Site Manager displays the appropriate demand circuit window refer to Figure 9 3 as an example 4 Select the circuit you want to remove 5 Click on Delete Site Manager removes the demand circuit 6 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 9 23 Chapter 10 Customizing Backup Circuits The router activates a backup circuit when a leased circuit fails To configure backup service you designate a leased circuit as a primary circuit This designation tells the router to activate a backup circuit if the leased circuit fails If you have not configured a leased circuit the Dialup gt Backup Circuits option is not available You should have set up a backup pool according to the instructions in Chapter 1 and for PPP configurations only added PPP backup circuits This chapter describes how to configure and customize backup circuits for Frame Relay PPP and Standard primary circuits Refer to Chapter 2 for a complete description of Frame Relay and PPP backup service Table 10 1 lists the instructions you should use to configure backup circuits Table 10 1 Dial Backup Configurations Backup Circuit Primary Circuit Protocol Protocol Instructions Standard PPP async or sync Creating Backup Circuits Chapter 1 PPP PPP async or sync Frame Relay backing up PPP async or sync Creating a PPP Back
184. e Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Up to 25 numeric characters For V 25bis Hayes and ISDN calls specifies a subaddress or extension for a phone number further identifying the remote router For ISDN calls this subaddress is useful when there are several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider only assigns the destination one phone number An incoming call must specify the number and subaddress to reach a specific router Enter an extension subaddress of up to 25 characters Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 5 117353 A Rev A A 91 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Outgoing Phone Delimiter Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Any string of up to five characters An example of a single character delimiter is
185. e Raise DTR or V 25bis signaling for modem connections The asynchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling for modem connections Hayes signaling requires that you use AT modem commands to send dialing instructions to the modem The ISDN lines use ISDN signaling for network connections 117353 A Rev A 2 5 Configuring Dial Services How Demand Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together When you create demand circuits you assign a demand pool ID to each circuit Note that many demand circuits can use the same demand pool and therefore can use the same lines in that pool The line itself does not have a specific network address it is the circuit that has the associated network address When the router has data to send across a demand circuit the circuit searches for an available demand line from its associated demand pool When it finds an available line the router establishes a dial up connection to the remote router The router terminates the connection when there is no more data to send or receive when you manually take down the connection or the scheduled time for an active connection expires Figure 2 3 shows the relationship between demand lines pools and circuits using PPP as the data link layer protocol Circuit 1 192 32 14 2 e f Line 1 mS Ea Demand pool 1 A p 2 device Los Angeles
186. e Relay demand circuits and the parameters you use to make those changes Table 9 1 Customizing Demand Circuits Location in Task Site Manager Parameter Appendix A Force the circuit to activate or Force Dial page A 26 deactivate Force Take Down page A 26 Deactivate the circuit based on Inactivity Time page A 27 inactivity Retry the connection if it fails Retry Max page A 27 Retry Delay page A 28 Change which router initiates a call Connection Mode page A 28 continued 9 10 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits Table 9 1 Customizing Demand Circuits continued P Location in Task Site Manager Parameter Appendix A Terminate a failed connection and use Auto Demand Termination page A 29 another circuit to reach the same Auto Demand Term Reset page A 29 destination Modify PPP authentication CHAP Local Name page A 37 information PPP only CHAP Secret page A 38 PAP Local ID page A 39 PAP Password page A 40 Outbound Authentication page A 41 Specify the duration of the circuit Maximum Up Time page A 42 Max UpTime Termination page A 42 UpTime Term Reset page A 43 Minimum Call Duration page A 43 Inactivity Mode page A 44 Change the demand circuit name Circuit Name page A 30 Enable dial optimized routing Dial Optimized Routing page A 30 Configure standby circuits Standby Mode page A 32 PPP only Standby Failback Mode page
187. e Relay service records 10 9 initiating calls 6 2 terminating 2 20 default parameter settings C 1 to C 10 Frame Relay description 2 19 implementation notes 6 1 to 6 6 introduction 2 1 lines activating 2 19 for failed primary circuits 2 17 location in router slot 2 17 link backup description 2 15 overview 2 13 to 2 20 parameters Backup Mode A 58 Backup Pool ID A 4 A 57 Cable Type A 6 CHAP Local Name A 37 CHAP Secret A 38 Circuit Type A 57 Days A 45 Directory Number A 87 End Time A 47 Ext SubAddr A 87 Global Adaption Rate A 19 Incoming Filter A 18 Interface Type A 59 Line Media Type A 5 Max UpTime Termination A 42 Maximum Up Time A 42 Modem Command String A 9 PAP Local ID A 39 PAP Password A 40 Pool Channel Count A 20 Index 4 Pool Channel Priority A 21 Pool ID A 60 Port Application Mode A 15 port application mode A 16 Priority A 6 Sending Complete IE A 18 SPID A 88 Start Time A 46 Switch Type A 16 UpTime Term Reset A 43 Use Backup Interface Filters A 61 WAN Serial Interface Type A 4 pools configuring 1 5 retrying backup connections 2 20 dial optimized routing description 5 15 5 17 maintaining routing tables 5 15 5 17 Dial Optimized Routing parameter A 30 dial services advantages of 1 1 2 1 default parameter settings C 1 to C 10 descriptions 2 1 types of 1 1 2 1 dial on demand circuits See demand circuits default parameter settings C 1 to C 10 enabli
188. e Way Authentication Figure 4 2 illustrates one way authentication For CHAP or PAP the calling router does not try to authenticate the called router but it does recognize and respond to CHAP challenges or PAP authentication requests from the called router The called router does authenticate the calling router Using one way authentication the router can communicate with other devices that may not support two way authentication One Way Authentication CHAP l Router A Router B Calling router Called router outbound authentication disabled lt Challenge Response gt x Response match One Way Authentication PAP Router A N Calling router Called router outbound authentication disabled Router B Authenticate request lt Authenticate response DS0031A Figure 4 2 One Way Authentication 117353 A Rev A 4 3 Configuring Dial Services The receiving router can use PAP and CHAP in a single line pool If Router A rejects the CHAP challenge and Router B has the PAP Fallback parameter enabled Router B switches to PAP and reattempts authentication If PAP Fallback is not enabled the connection is activated Configuring the Type of Authentication The Outbound Authentication parameter determines the type of authent
189. e caller resolution table 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Table window refer to Figure 13 1 3 Click in the field whose value you want to change and enter a new value For the Local Circuit and Local Group parameters you must click on Values and select a different circuit from the list then click on OK Refer to Appendix A for parameter descriptions 4 Click on Apply to accept the new entry 5 Click on Done 13 6 117353 A Rev A Appendix A Dial Service Parameters Once a dial service is operating you can modify any parameter for your network This appendix describes each of the dial service parameters you can configure The parameters are grouped by function and do not always follow the order in which they appear in the Site Manager windows Table A 1 shows how the parameters are organized Table A 1 Organization of Parameters Parameter Section Location Pool ID Parameter page A 4 WAN Serial Interface Type Parameter page A 4 Sync and Async Line Media Type Parameters page A 5 External Modem Parameters page A 7 V 34 Modem Parameters page A 12 BRI Port Application Mode Parameter page A 15 PRI Port Application Mode Parameter page A 16 ISDN Switch Parameters page A 16 Pool Channel Count and Priority Parameters page A 20 BR
190. e circuit at the start time set the Availability Mode to Not Available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 5 A 46 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters End Time Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule 2400 0 to 2400 Specifies the time of day the demand or backup circuit is no longer available The router uses this parameter and the Start Time parameter to establish a time period when the circuit is available This value also specifies the time of day that all secondary lines are deactivated if you set up bandwidth on demand service for a PPP demand circuit Enter an hour of the day using the 24 hour system of expressing time For example to deactivate the circuit at 10 00 p m enter 2200 For the router to deactivate the circuit at the configured end time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default Available If you do not want the router to deactivate the circuit at the end time set the Availability Mode
191. e following Bay Networks platforms can operate as a RADIUS client e Backbone Link Node BLN e Backbone Concentrator Node BCN e Access Stack Node ASN Note The BLN BCN and ASN also support RADIUS authentication but only with dial on demand service Refer to Chapter 5 for more information 4 8 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services IP Adjacent Hosts If you configure IP numbered interfaces over a dial circuit you must configure adjacent hosts to ensure that data follows the correct path An IP adjacent host is the next hop that is IP address along the transmission path that the data must follow For example in Figure 4 5 the Los Angeles router is an adjacent host to the New York router Circuit 1 192 32 14 2 El j anne Dial Demand pool 1 Age device plies Los Angeles Dial device 192 32 15 0 or lt gt Circuit 2 192 32 15 2 El New York device 79 32 16 Chicago 0 Configuration of the New York router Circuit 3 192 32 16 2 Circuit 1 192 32 14 1 Da the local interface to Los Angeles device Dallas DS0017A Figure 4 5 IP Adjacent Hosts To reach the Los Angeles router you must configure the New York router s local IP address which is 192
192. e interface BRI 3 2 primary rate interface PRI 3 3 using the ping command 4 20 Interface Type parameter A 59 IP Enable parameter A 54 IPX Enable parameter A 55 117353 A Rev A IPX Routing Protocol parameter A 55 IPXWAN Enable parameter A 56 ISDN Numbering Plan parameter A 94 ISDN Numbering Type parameter A 90 A 91 A 92 A 94 L LAPD See link access procedure D leased line operation for ISDN BRI 4 12 Line Media Type parameter A 5 line pools adding 1 10 adding BRI lines 1 11 line terminator LT description 3 5 lines adding more to pools 1 10 for demand pools 2 4 note about leased COM lines 1 7 using in the same line pools 2 26 link access procedure D LAPD description 3 3 function 3 3 LAPD frame contents 3 4 Q 921 3 3 Q 931 3 5 link backup for dial backup service 2 15 Local Circuit parameter A 103 Local Group parameter A 104 local phone number configuring 1 38 Max UpTime Termination parameter A 42 Maximum Links parameter A 83 Maximum Up Time parameter A 42 MCE1 modifying parameters 8 14 MCT1 modifying parameters 8 14 117353 A Rev A Mgmnt Type parameter A 63 MIB Object ID using A 2 Minimum Call Duration parameter A 43 Modem Command String parameter A 9 Modem Config String parameter A 12 modem configuration AT initialization commands 4 7 customizing 8 6 parameters Debug Mode A 8 Expert Config A 12 Modem Command String A 9 Modem Config Stri
193. e is Monitor The router uses the CHAP secret when it brings up the secondary line If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify the CHAP secret If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 32 A 38 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters PAP Local ID Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition None Any text string maximum of 25 characters Specifies the PAP ID that you assign to this interface It identifies the calling router to the called router During the authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct PAP ID or the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK and does not bring up the connection For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only configurable if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Monitor If you are using PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP ID for this circuit If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 37 117353 A Rev A A 39 Configuring Dial Services
194. e leased circuit leased PPP multiline circuit or leased multilink circuit as a primary circuit If the primary circuit fails the router activates a backup circuit to continue transmitting data To configure Frame Relay backup circuits skip this section and go to Chapter 10 To configure PPP backup circuits 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP Site Manager displays the Primary Circuit Definition window Figure 1 20 which lists the leased circuits that you have configured Hactup Hode CHAF Loca Mame CHAP Secret Figure 1 20 Primary Circuit Definition Window 3 Highlight a circuit name and click on Cct Circuit Type Site Manager displays the Circuit Options window Figure 1 21 117353 A Rev A 1 25 Configuring Dial Services _ _ mre a Circ Type Barto Pil E Figure 1 21 Circuit Options Window 4 Select Primary for the Circuit Type parameter Site Manager Circuit Type parameter page A 57 5 Enter the ID of the backup pool that you want this circuit to use Site Manager Backup Pool ID parameter page A 57 6 Click on OK You return to the Primary Circuit Definition window which shows the new circuit and the defaults for each parameter Site Manager also adds the buttons Apply Schedule and Phone Out 7 Click on OK 8 Repeat steps 2 through 6 to configure more primary
195. e name of the remote router that this circuit supports This enables the local non monitor router receiving the call to identify the remote router placing the call Enter values for the Caller Name and CHAP Secret parameters then click on OK Site Manager Caller Name parameter page A 102 Site Manager CHAP Secret parameter page A 102 1 30 117353 A Rev A Getting Started e If you selected Monitor Site Manager does not prompt you for caller resolution information However if this is the first monitor circuit associated with a pool that uses multiple slots Site Manager displays the Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool window Figure 1 24 Preformed laraidh Slew Rasorvind Boni lon Slot Figure 1 24 Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool Window Enter a number for the Preferred Bandwidth Slot and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters and click on OK Site Manager Preferred Bandwidth Slot parameter page A 82 Site Manager Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameter page A 83 You return to the Circuit Options window refer to Figure 1 23 3 Click on OK to exit the Circuit Options window You return to the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 1 22 4 Keep the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Specifying the Authentication Protocol 117353 A Rev A 1 31 Configuring Dial Services Specifying the Authenti
196. e number for the monitor router and you want the non monitor router to supply phone numbers for dial up connections This option minimizes the task of configuring the outgoing phone list Select Disable only for configurations where the default values of the ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters located in the outgoing phone list are acceptable to the ISDN switch NOTE Certain countries have ISDN networks where the default values of the ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters do not work Ask your sales engineer for details 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 68 A 86 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Local Phone Number Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Directory Number Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Add gt Phone Number None A maximum of 20 numeric characters Specifies the phone number of the router The value of this parameter must match the phone number that your service provider assigns to you when you receive ISDN service Any remote party that calls the router must include this phone number in the Called Party IE field of the call setup message The Called Party IE must match the directory number exactly or the router will not answer the call Enter the p
197. e the connection should remain active For dial optimized routing circuits this timer should allow enough time to send all routing updates to the remote nodes in the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 45 117353 A Rev A A 43 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Inactivity Mode Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Both Directions Both Directions Transmit Only Receive Only Either Direction Measures data inactivity for a specific direction across a line Specifically it lets you decide in which direction the router determines inactivity Together with the Inactivity Time parameter this parameter informs the router to deactivate the connection if there is no data going in the specified direction NOTE The router does not consider the following as data so it does not consider them when determining inactivity PPP s LQR LCP periodic CHAP messages Frame Relay DLCML and other signaling messages Select the option that best suits your application Both Directions If the router does not receive data and does not transmit data it terminates the connection The inactivity has to be in both directions Transmit Only If there is no data to transmit the router terminates the connection The router disregards data it receives Select this option if you are using di
198. e two types of standby circuits Hot standby A hot standby circuit backs up a failed primary circuit When the primary circuit fails the router activates the hot standby circuit to provide another route to the destination A hot standby circuit can connect to another standby circuit a demand circuit or a demand circuit group Hot standby circuits can support the following types of primary circuits e Single leased PPP circuit e PPP multilink circuit e PPP multiline circuit e Frame Relay primary circuit that has a service record with only one PVC Hot standby circuits can back up primary circuits on any slot not just the slot on which the hot standby circuit resides For example if a primary line on Slot 4 fails the router can activate a standby connection from Slot 3 Standby A standby circuit has no relationship with the primary circuit It does not back up a primary circuit if that circuit fails Instead a standby circuit answers incoming calls destined for it A standby circuit can also carry data when you activate it manually The router activates a standby circuit activates when A primary circuit fails The router activates a hot standby circuit when the primary circuit fails The hot standby takes over data transmission To determine if a primary circuit failed the router relies on Breath of Life BofL messages for PPP primary circuits and A bit notification for Frame Relay primary circuits When you associate a P
199. ect external timing for the transmit clock amp X2 Select slave receive timing for the transmit clock amp YO Recall stored profile 0 upon power up amp Y1 Recall stored profile 1 upon power up amp Zn x Store dial string x to 34 to location n 0 to 3 EO Disable line quality monitor and auto retrain E1 Enable line quality monitor and auto retrain E2 Enable line quality monitor and fallback fall forward L Return received line signal level Q Report the line signal quality MS Select modulation HO Disable RPI H1 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 19200 b s H2 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 38400 b s H3 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 57600 b s H11 Enable RPI mode SDR 0 Disable Distinctive Ring SDR 1 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 SDR 2 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 2 SDR 3 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 2 SDR 4 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 3 SDR 5 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 3 SDR 6 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 2 and 3 SDR 7 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 2 and 3 SSE 0 Disable DSVD SSE 1 Enable DSVD a Serial interface operation only 117353 A Rev A A Acceptable LAPD MTUs parameter A 22 access methods to switched network ISDN 2 3 activating secondary lines for bandwidth 2 24 Adaption Rate parameter A 95 Address Length parameter A 65 Address parameter A 64 adjacent hosts for IP dial connections 4 9 Aggregate Bandwidth parameter A 98
200. ed For information about using demand circuit groups and dial backup refer to Chapter 6 117353 A Rev A 5 13 Configuring Dial Services RADIUS Authentication Services for Demand Circuit Groups As networks grow to accommodate more remote users network security and billing become more difficult to manage RADIUS is an Internet draft specification that solves these issues by centralizing security and accounting information Centralizing these services improves security and provides a solution that can adapt to the changing size and needs of the remote user and service providers Ina RADIUS application there is a client and a server The router is the RADIUS client You can only configure RADIUS authentication for incoming calls that use unnumbered protocol interfaces in a demand circuit group configuration Demand circuit groups work well with RADIUS configurations because they simplify configuration for large numbers of remote users The unnumbered protocol configuration enables the incoming call to use any available circuit so many remote users can place calls even if their number exceeds the number of configured circuits For detailed information about RADIUS refer to Configuring RADIUS Managing Broadcast Traffic over Demand Circuits Many of the routing protocols that you can select for a demand circuit send update packets out to the network Update packets maintain routing tables and gather information about network resources
201. ee only BRI switch types when you click on Values In addition if the router is communicating with a Version 8 10 router you will only see BRI switch types that support Version 8 10 software Specifies the type of ISDN switch to which you are connecting Choose the appropriate ISDN switch Refer to Table A 3 on A 17 On the ASN you cannot configure two different switch types on the same slot 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 3 A 16 117353 A Rev A Table A 3 Switch Types by Country Country BRI Switch Types PRI Switch Types Austria Belgium Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden United Kingdom BRI NET3 PRI NET 5 Switzerland BRI SWISSNET3 PRI NET 5 United States BRI 5ESS BRI NI1 BRI DMS100 PRI 4ESS PRI 5ESS PRI DMS 100 Canada BRI NI1 BRI DMS100 PRI DMS100 Japan BRI KDD BRI NTT PRI KDD PRI NTT Australia BRI TS013 PRI TS014 Finland Greece Iceland lreland Luxembourg Portugal PRI NET 5 Dial Service Parameters 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Incoming Filter Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines De
202. eeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeees 9 11 x 117353 A Rev A Bandwidth on Demand Service for Demand Lines PPP only eccceeseeeeeseeeeeee 9 12 Adding Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits 0 ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeas 9 12 Scheduling When the Demand Circuit Is Available 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 13 Configuring Demand Circuit Group ececceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeesaeeeteneeeeaas 9 16 Caller Resolution Information for Demand Circuit Groups 9 17 Modifying the Demand Circuit Group Configuration cecccceeeeeeereeeetteeeeeeeees 9 20 Modifying the Number of Circuits in a Demand Circuit Group eeeeee 9 20 Modifying the Demand Pool That the Demand Circuit Group Uses 9 21 Removing a Demand Circuit Group ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseceeeesaaeeeeaees 9 22 Removing Demand Circuits ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeaeeeeaaeeseeeeesaaeeneeeeess 9 23 Chapter 10 Customizing Backup Circuits Creating a PPP Backup Circuit for One Frame Relay PVC 0 ccccceessseeeeeesteeeeeeeeaes 10 2 Creating Frame Relay Backup Circuits for Multiple PVCS c ceccseeeeeseeeeteeeteneeeeees 10 5 Modifying the Frame Relay Backup Interface ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaas 10 7 Modifying Frame Relay Service RecordS cc cccceceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeeetaeeeeneeess 10 9 Configuring
203. eeeeeneeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeesesnaeeesaes C 3 Table C 6 ISDN Switch Parameters iemaisa kaiean aa ieena a a a ak C 3 Table C 7 ISDN Logical Lines Parameters ccccsceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeees C 3 Table C 8 Local Phone Number Parameters c cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeessaes C 4 Table C 9 BRI Interface Parameters ceccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseueeeeenaeeeeaes C 4 Table C 10 Demand Circuit Parameters c cccceeceeeeecceeeeeeneeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenaeeesaes C 5 Table C 11 Demand Circuit Group Parameters c cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeaes C 6 Table C 12 Primary Backup Circuit Parameters ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeenaeeteaes C 7 Table C 13 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Parameters cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 8 xxii 117353 A Rev A Table C 14 Table C 15 Table C 16 Table D 1 Table D 2 Table E 1 117353 A Rev A Outgoing Phone List Parameters cccccccceeeeeeeeececeeeeseeeseeneeeeeaeeeeaes C 9 Incoming Phone List Parameters 0 ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeaes C 9 Caller Resolution Table Parameters cccccecccccessseseeceesseeeeeeseesneeeess C 10 BRI Parameters for the AT amp T 5ESS Switch 0 ccc cceccseeeeeesssteeeeeeeneaes D 1 BRI Parameters for the Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch 0 D 2 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands eceeee
204. eeeneees E 1 xxiii About This Guide If you are responsible for configuring dial services you need to read this guide If you want to Go to Start a dial service on a router using a default configuration Chapter 1 Learn about all three dial services Chapter 2 Learn about Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Chapter 3 communication Learn about special aspects of the Bay Networks implementation of Chapter 4 each dial service through Chapter 7 Change default settings for dial service parameters Chapter 8 through Chapter 13 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters this is the same Appendix A information you obtain using Site Manager online Help Review some configuration examples Appendix B Learn parameter defaults Appendix C Obtain information for ordering ISDN lines in the United States Appendix D Use an AT command string for modem configurations Appendix E 117353 A Rev A XXV Configuring Dial Services Before You Begin Before using this guide you must complete the following procedures For a new router e Install the router refer to the installation manual that came with your router e Connect the router to the network and create a pilot configuration file refer to Quick Starting Routers Configuring BayStack Remote Access or Connecting ASN Routers to a Network Make sure that you are running the latest version of Bay Networks Site Manager
205. eeesaeesennees B 5 Port Application Mode Parameter cccccsseeeeeesseeeeeeeneeeeseeenaeeeeeeeaaas B 7 MCT1 Clock Parameter Router 1 Only 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeed B 7 Demand Pools Parameter cccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas B 8 xxi Table B 11 ISDN Switch Configuration Parameter cccccsceeseeeeeeseteeeeeeeeseeeeees B 8 Table B 12 PPP Demand Circuits Parameters cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees B 9 Table B 13 Outgoing Phone List Parameter c ccccceeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes B 9 Table B 14 IP Parametern eosi a laninl aad B 10 Table B 15 IP Adjacent Host Parameter ccccceeeesceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeetcaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneeea B 10 Table B 16 Caller Resolution Table Parameters cccccccecceeeseeeeseteeeeeneeeeeeeeee B 11 Table B 17 Local Phone Number Parameters cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecieeeeeeenaeeeeeteea B 11 Table B 18 Backup Pools Parameter cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeeeeeeeaeeees B 13 Table B 19 Circuit Options Parameters ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesseeeseneees B 14 Table B 20 Primary Circuit Definition Parameters 0 cccceecceessteeeeeeeeessteeeteeees B 15 Table B 21 Outgoing Phone List Parameter ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeteneees B 15 Table B 22 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Router 2 only eses B 16
206. eeseeesteeeneeeees 2 25 Figure 3 1 Sample ISDN Network 0 0 0 eeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeecaeeeaee sae esaeeseeeseeeeneeeeeaeen 3 1 Figure 3 2 The BRI Interface eee cceeeceeeccceeeeeeeceeeeeeseceeeesneeceeeeseseceeeeeeneeeeeenenees 3 2 Figure3 3 LAPD Frame iis ciescnccdectee sd iceeatee sides anh tee aaea e i dh aacbukgbeaedagess 3 4 Figure 3 4 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Devices csceeeeeee 3 7 Figure 3 5 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Non ISDN Devices 3 7 Figure 4 1 Two Way Authentication 0 00 0 ccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeenee 4 2 Figure 4 2 One Way Authentication oo eee ee eee ecenee ere eeeesneeeneeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 4 3 Figure 4 3 Routers Using CHAP for Authentication cccccccesceecessneeeeeessteeeeeeees 4 4 Figure 4 4 Using Asynchronous PPP over Modem Lines 4 6 Figure 4 5 IP Adjacent Hosts ccc ccc tatceeteiivecneetiaseeteeeaidseutiveesententen decent 4 9 Figure 4 6 Router in an ISDN Network 00 ee ceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeesaeesnaesnaeesaeeeeas 4 10 Figure 4 7 Rate Adaption for a Network with a 56 Kb s Trunk Line eee 4 17 Figure 4 8 Rate Adaption for a Switched 56 Kb s Network csceeseeeeeeeeeeneees 4 17 Figure 4 9 X 25 over the D Channel eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeenaessaeesnaeeeeeseeeeaas 4 19 Figure 5 1 Example of Callback over a Demand Circuit 0 0 eee eee eeetereeenee 5 8 Figure 6 1 Dialing an Alte
207. emand circuits Non Monitor Monitor Dynamic Monitor demand circuits only Determines whether or not the router serves as the congestion monitor The level of congestion determines when the router provides an additional circuit to carry data across the network Refer to page A 78 for a description of this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 36 117353 A Rev A A 79 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options None 1 to 255 Identifies an existing bandwidth pool Enter the ID number of the bandwidth pool you want the circuit to use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 PPP Circuit Mode Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Multilink Multilink Multilink Monitor Dynamic Monitor Specifies the type of multilink connection for this interface and the value of the PPP interface parameter PPP Mode Select one of the following Multilink Site Manager supplies this value if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is Non Monitor It enables PPP multilink for this circuit
208. emote caller Site Manager Local Group parameter page A 104 7 Click on OK Site Manager displays the Local Circuit List window Figure 13 3 which lists the previously configured demand primary or bandwidth circuits 117353 A Rev A 13 3 Configuring Dial Services feb cal Circuit List PPP Demand 1 PPP Demand 2 PPP Demand 3 Figure 13 3 Local Circuit List Window 8 Select a local circuit to assign it to the remote caller specified in the Caller Name parameter This is the circuit that the router activates when the remote caller places a call Site Manager Local Circuit parameter page A 103 9 Click on OK Site Manager automatically assigns the local circuit to the remote caller You return to the completed Caller Resolution Table window Figure 13 4 13 4 117353 A Rev A Customizing Caller Resolution Lhen Paper Lig Rend oo Dee Lane WLL a a lt a becml Elrewdt CHAP eoret PAP Pagar Locmi Grii Figure 13 4 Completed Caller Resolution Table Window Figure 13 4 shows a completed table entry If the router receives an incoming call from Remote_A it will activate the circuit PPP Demand 1 10 To delete an entry select it and click on Delete 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117353 A Rev A 13 5 Configuring Dial Services Modifying Entries in the Caller Resolution Table To change entries in th
209. en Lines in a Multilink Bundle With multilink enabled for bandwidth on demand service the router divides the outbound data traffic among all links in the bundle The external clock speed of each line determines how much of the total traffic each link receives On the receiving end multilink resequences packets arriving on different links using the sequence number from the multilink header For more information about traffic distribution see Configuring PPP Services 117353 A Rev A 7 7 Configuring Dial Services Ensuring the Accuracy of the Congestion Thresholds The router uses several congestion threshold parameters to measure congestion on the bandwidth circuit The values of these parameters determine when the router activates additional lines to relieve congestion If you want to change the clock speed of your leased line to a value other than the default 64 Kb s this affects how the router calculates the congestion thresholds To ensure that the router s calculations are accurate you must modify the clock speed using the synchronous line parameter External Clock Speed Once you configure this parameter to match the line speed you ensure that the congestion thresholds will be correct The External Clock Speed parameter is part of the synchronous line configuration To access synchronous line parameters begin at the Configuration Manager window and select Circuits gt Edit Lines From here you can select the circuit tha
210. ending Complete IE parameter A 18 Service Advertising Protocol SAP broadcast timers 5 18 Service Name parameter A 71 service records configuring 10 9 Set Pulse Tone Dial Default parameter A 14 shared configuration for Frame Relay backup 2 19 Speaker Control parameter A 10 Speaker Volume parameter A 10 SPID parameter A 88 standby circuits balancing traffic 5 5 configuring 5 4 description 5 1 scheduling availability 5 6 Start Time parameter A 46 static routes for dial on demand 5 15 switch type modifications 8 18 8 19 Switch Type parameter A 16 Index 9 synchronous lines for bandwidth on demand 2 22 for dial backup 2 13 for dial on demand 2 4 T T reference point description 3 6 Technical Solutions Centers xxix TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D parameter A 25 TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D parameter A 25 terminal adapter TA description 3 5 terminal equipment 1 TE1 description 3 5 terminal equipment 2 TE2 description 3 5 terminating dial backup circuits 2 20 TimeOfDay Failback Mode parameter A 49 time sensitive protocols for dial backup 6 2 traffic filters 5 19 two way authentication 4 2 U U reference point description 3 6 unnumbered IP interfaces for demand circuit groups 6 2 UpTime Term Reset parameter A 43 Use Backup Interface Filters parameter A 61 V V 25bis signaling creating phone lists 12 1 electrical interfaces 2 3 A 5 W WAN Interface
211. equently the router can use only what is available If you select this option Site Manager lets you select only those channels available for communication For example if the provider offers channels B1 through B6 you configure only channels 1 through 6 You should not select all the B channels your configuration should match your service 4 14 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services PRI Multirate PRI multirate enables you to group B channels in multiples of 64 Kb s to dynamically allocate bandwidth on a call by call basis Depending on how many B channels you combine the bandwidth can range from 128 Kb s to 1472 Kb s This allows you to choose the most suitable bandwidth for an application Applications such as dial backup and video conferences benefit from the flexibility of multirate service These applications require more than one B channel but not the full complement of B channels for PRI Also ISDN service providers offer multirate service at lower tariffs than other ISDN services Multirate is especially useful when Frame Relay is used across an ISDN line You can group multirate dial lines to provide backup connections if the primary connection fails Multirate service is available for all three dial services on the ASN using only the Dual MCT1 Net Module and on the BLN and BCN using only the Dual or Single Port MCT1 and QMCT1 Link Modules The following switches for North America and Canada suppor
212. er If you later change these modes to any other callback mode Site Manager prompts you to disable incoming call filtering Site Manager requests caller resolution table information If you select Server Server Call ID Client or Client One Charge Site Manager prompts you to make a caller resolution table entry by displaying the Caller Resolution Info window These callback modes require a caller resolution table entry to authenticate callers on each side of the connection and for the server to indicate which circuit to activate for a call Site Manager requests an outgoing phone number If you select Server or Server One Charge and there are no entries in the outgoing phone list Site Manager prompts you to enter a phone number by displaying the Outgoing Phone Number window Callback and the Circuit s Connection Mode The server s callback configuration takes precedence over its Connection Mode parameter setting The Connection Mode parameter determines whether or not a router can place a call If you enable callback the router ignores the Connection Mode parameter to ensure that the server can always call the client 5 10 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Using the Incoming Phone List for Callback Service If the callback mode of your router is Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID the router uses incoming call filtering to identify the client not PPP authentication which relies on the c
213. er 2 S131 S12 Switch Type Ni Ni The ISDN Logical Lines window appears next Accept the default values Backup Circuit Configuration After you configure the backup pool configure the backup circuits Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits Remember that you do not actually configure a backup circuit designate a leased circuit as a primary circuit If this circuit fails the router provides a backup circuit that adopts the configuration of the primary circuit B 20 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Path Primary Circuit Definition select S131 or S12 then click on Cct Type gt Circuit Options Table B 28 Circuit Options Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S131 S12 Circuit Type Primary Primary Backup Pool ID 1 1 Return to the Primary Circuit Definition window from the Circuit Options window Path Circuit Options gt Primary Circuit Definition Table B 29 Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S131 S12 Backup Mode Master Slave CHAP Local Name ASN N A CHAP Secret ISDN N A 117353 A Rev A B 21 Configuring Dial Services Outgoing Phone List From the Primary Circuit Definition window click on Phone Out to open the Outgoing Phone List window Path Outgoing Phone List gt Phone Number window Table B 30 Outgoing Phone List Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S131 S12 Ou
214. er Disable Sending Complete IE Disable Global Adaption Rate 64K X 25 over ISDN D Channel Disable TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D_ Fixed TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D 1 Table C 7 ISDN Logical Lines Parameters Parameter Default Pool Channel Count Available B channels Pool Channel Priority 1 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Table C 8 Local Phone Number Parameters Parameter Default Directory Number None Ext SubAddr None Spid None Assigned Channel None Directory Number Type Unknown Directory Number Plan Unknown Table C 9 BRI Interface Parameters Parameter Default Acceptable LAPD MTUs 400 bytes BRI T3 Timer 10 seconds BRI T4 Timer 750 milliseconds BRI B Channel Loopback Disable BRI Line Type PTP 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Parameter Defaults Table C 10 Demand Circuit Parameters Parameter Default Demand Pool ID None Force Take Down Disable Force Dial Disable Inactivity Time 60 seconds Retry Max 2 attempts Retry Delay 3 seconds Connection Mode Collision Master Auto Demand Termination Disable Auto Demand Term Reset 60 minutes CHAP Local Name None CHAP Secret Unsecured PAP Local ID None PAP Password Unsecured Maximum Up Time 60 minutes Max UpTime Termination Disable UpTime Term Reset 60 minutes Days Weekday Star
215. er in the original call s setup message Client One Charge ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback client Also indicates that there will be no charge for the initial call to the server Use this mode when the other end of the connection uses Server One Charge or Server Once Charge Call ID The client places a call to the server expecting the call to fail The server refuses the call which eliminates any phone charge for the client The client then waits for a return call from the server This option saves the client the cost of the initial call Server One Charge ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server Also indicates that only the server will be charged for the return call to the client The server receives a call from the client The server using incoming call filtering verifies that the client is an authorized caller by matching the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list If the server finds a matching entry it refuses the call By refusing the call the server eliminates any phone charges for the client The server then returns the call using a phone number in its outgoing phone list for the matching circuit Server One Charge Call ID ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server using caller ID and indicates that only the server will be charged for the return call to the client The server receives a call f
216. er window click on a COM connector 3 Follow the path to the configuration windows and set the parameters according to Tables B 1 through B 7 Note These tables list only the parameter defaults you must change Demand Pool Configuration Path Select Dialup gt Demand Pools Table B 1 Demand Pools Parameter P amet i Router 4 Router 7 S25 S23 Pool ID 1 1 After entering a demand pool ID the Demand Lines Definition window appears Click on an available COM connector Site Manager displays the Choose WAN Serial Interface Type window where you determine whether you want to use Sync or Async communication Sync is the default so no changes are needed Next Site Manager displays the Line Media Type window Path Demand Lines Definition gt Line Media Type Table B 2 Line Media Type Parameters Parameter Router 4 Router 7 S25 S23 Line Media Type V 25bis V 25bis Cable Type Default Default Priority Default Default 117353 A Rev A B 3 Configuring Dial Services After you configure the line media type parameters return to the Configuration Manager window Demand Circuit Configuration Once the demand pool is configured configure the demand circuits Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window Click on PPP Circuits Site Manager displays the PPP Demand Circuits window The PPP Demand Circuits window has a Protoco
217. ervices for the DCE side of the connection as specified in Annex D to ANSI standard T1 617 1991 Annex A Switch provides limited management services for the DCE side of the connection as specified by the ITU T Select the management protocol for the Frame Relay network The LMI Switch Annex D Switch and Annex A Switch options are primarily for troubleshooting 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 6 117353 A Rev A A 63 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Address Type Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface ADDR Q922 ADDR Q922 ADDR Q922 November 90 ADDR Q922 MARCH 90 ADDR Q921 Specifies the DLCI addressing type ADDR Q922 selects addressing as specified in the final version of the Q 922 standard Q 922 provides for FECN BECN DE and EA bits While most Q 922 addresses are included within a 2 octet field the standard allows for 3 and 4 octet address fields The November draft of ADDR Q922 differs from ADDR Q922 in dropping the D C bit from the extended 3 and 4 byte forms The March draft of ADDR Q922 differs from ADDR Q922 in defining an 11 bit DLCI and dropping the DE bit from the second octet of the address
218. ervices that support only one channel With ISDN you can use the same lines and equipment for a variety of communication needs Also using digital lines as opposed to analog lines eliminates the need to convert digital to analog signals and provides faster and more accurate communication In addition to offering integrated services ISDN provides a number of standard universal interfaces to access ISDN services With a defined set of interfaces you can purchase ISDN equipment and services from different providers and all the parts of your network will have the same interfaces to connect to one another as well as to the ISDN network 117353 A Rev A 3 1 Configuring Dial Services ISDN is primarily a dial service that uses switched connections as circuits This means that you can use channels and services on an as needed basis instead of having a connection up all the time regardless of need This choice ensures a cost effective use of phone lines as well as bandwidth efficiency ISDN Standards The ITU T formerly CCITT has defined a set of standards to ensure universal implementation of ISDN technology The following sections describe some of these standards Basic Rate Interface BRI transmits data at a rate of 64 Kb s over each of two bearer channels also called B channels which are dedicated to data transmission Along with the two B channels BRI uses one data channel called the D channel The D channel handles all sign
219. es Bandwidth on Demand Terminology ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeneaeeees 7 1 PPP MUultiike sit acta h a Ata EAEE AA ater i tee eek tao a te 7 2 Multilink Fragmentation sosser taii aeaa a E EAE AEE A Ei 7 3 PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol sssssseessssssirsssssrrssssirrssstinnnnstinnnnstttnnnntnnnnnnstennnnnnt 7 4 HON BAP WOKE n Terris re eae aaae ra E E ease Hivsaetieteebanset tend beaetueehy 7 5 BAP Negotiation with Other Vendors Routers sssssseessseesseesiessrressrrssrrnssrrnssensne 7 6 Contiguring BAP riii i iiaa aea aneia a aiae ed an a A a a iaaa 7 6 Protocol PriOntZatlOni sentani n r ete eats 7 7 Defining the Role of the Router in the Network 0 00 eeecceeeeeeseeeeeeenneeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeneeee 7 7 Balancing Traffic between Lines in a Multilink Bundle oc eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 7 Ensuring the Accuracy of the Congestion ThreSholds ccccccccssceceeessseeeeeessneeeeeeeees 7 8 Testing the Bandwidth on Demand Connection ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeseeeeeestaaeeeeaes 7 8 Chapter 8 Customizing Line Pools Adding Line Pools seisoa A E E A NEEE EE AATE NT 8 1 117353 A Rev A Changing Pool IDS E EATA E fla teaceveentethed leebieet efit cheval EA 8 2 Deleting POO S sii ci caret fascia shea A ea Aaaa ANE aa ae AMi e A AAAA sit AEEA eTA AE Aa 8 3 Modifying the WAN Serial Interface Type and Line Media Type ccccceeeeeeeeerreees 8 4 Modifying
220. es B 7 Port Application Mode Configuration cceccccecceeeeeseeeeeceeeeneeeseeeeessaeeteeaees B 7 Demand Pool Configuration cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeaaeesecaeeesaeeeeeaees B 8 Demand Circuit Configuration cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeaaeesesaeeesaeeeeeaees B 9 Outgoing PHONE LISt arapa aT a r naa ar ara a a ea Aa aea ara enaA EAA B 9 Protocol Configuration cceeccceeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaaeseeneeecaaaeeseaeeesecaeeesaeeeeaas B 10 117353 A Rev A xiii Caller Resolution Table Configuration ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeseneeeseneeeseeeeeeeneeeee B 11 Local Phone Number Configuration 0 c ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeees B 11 Dial Backup with PPP on the Primary Line 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeneeeees B 12 Configuration Of Routeri oui maias e aa a aa aa aa aaea e aaa aaa B 12 Configuration of Router 2 oui eee ecesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaaaeseeeeeesaaaeedeneeessaeeteneees B 13 Backup Pool Configuration ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeee B 13 Backup Circuit Configuration cccccececeeeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeee B 14 Outgoing Phone List Configuration cccceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeees B 15 Caller Resolution Table Configuration 0 c cceeccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessneeseneees B 16 Dial Backup with Standard on the Prim
221. es a line of priority 1 before it uses a line of priority 2 For dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools lines can reside across slots but when you set this parameter it affects only lines on the same slot For example if the backup pool has two lines in slot 3 and three lines in slot 4 the router sets a priority for the lines in slot 3 then sets a priority for the lines in slot 4 For the bandwidth pool the router prioritizes lines in the preferred slot then the reserved slot and finally the local slot Instructions Assign a number to each line in the pool The lower the number the higher the priority If you have a pool that combines modem and ISDN lines you should coordinate the priority assignments for the ISDN lines with those you set using the Priority parameter for the modem lines MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 11 1 6 117353 A Rev A A 21 Configuring Dial Services BRI Configuration Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Acceptable LAPD MTUs Configuration Manager gt ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 400 bytes 3 to 1024 bytes Specifies the maximum number of bytes per LAPD transmission unit Enter a value for the maximum MTUs We recommend that you accept the default 400 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 12
222. es only one slot Site Manager automatically enters the slot number You do not have to enter a value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 56 Maximum Links Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 4 1 to 30 Specifies the maximum number of links both leased and dial up lines allowed in the multilink bundle for this circuit at any one time Enter the maximum number of links that you want in the bundle 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 58 117353 A Rev A A 83 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BOD Recovery Threshold Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 50 percent 10 to 400 percent Specifies a percentage of the maximum amount of data that the router transmits and receives The actual flow of data traffic must fall below this percentage before the router returns to the leased line or bundle exclusively Enter a percentage that the router should reach before it returns to the leased line or bundle 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 59 BOD Periods to Recover Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Moni
223. eslots used by the line pool Click on OK You return to the PRI Logical Lines window Click on Apply to save the changes Click on Done Modifying the ISDN Pool Channel Count and Priority The pool channel count and priority are part of the ISDN logical line configuration because they define the logical B channels not the physical line Before changing the logical line configuration you must delete all circuits associated with that pool Refer to the appropriate circuit customizing chapter for instructions To modify the pool channel count and priority 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays the Pools window refer to Figure 8 1 Select the pool containing the ISDN lines you want to modify Click on Edit Site Manager displays the Lines Definition window refer to Figure 1 4 Click on an ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 connector Site Manager displays the ISDN Logical Lines window Figure 8 10 8 16 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools ISDN Logical Lines Pool Channel Count Pool Channel Priority Figure 8 10 ISDN Logical Lines Window 6 Modify the pool channel count to change the number of B channels in the pool Site Manager Pool Channel Count parameter page A 20 7 Enter a new pool channel priority for each line in the pool Site Manager Pool Channel Priority parameter page A 21
224. esrinssrresens 1 17 ISDN Logical Lines Window ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 1 18 Demand Pools Window Listing Configured Pools s 1 19 PPP Demand Circuits Window c cccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeees 1 20 Completed PPP Demand Circuits Window cccceeeeeeeeeteeteteeeeeeees 1 21 Select Protocols WiINGOW cccceceeeeneeeceneeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeeeeeeeetaeeseenees 1 23 Primary Circuit Definition Window 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettaeeeeeneeees 1 25 Circuit Options Window ceccccececeeeeeneeececeeeeeaeeeseeaeeesaaeeseeaeeteeaaeeeeaees 1 26 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Window ccceceeeees 1 29 Circuit Options Window ccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeseaeeseeaeeeeeaaeeeeaees 1 29 Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool Window 1 31 PPP Demand Circuits Window 00 cc ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeetaeeeeeneeees 1 33 Enter a BOD Pool Window ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaaeeseeaeeeeaaeeeeneeess 1 34 BOD Configuration WindOW ccccceessceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeetaeeneneeess 1 35 Outgoing Phone List Window cececceceeeeeeeeeee esas eeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeteaees 1 36 Phone Number Window eeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeneeaees 1 37 XV Figure 1 30 ISDN Local Phone Lines Window 0 0 0 eee ee eeereeeeeeeeeeesaeenaeeeseeenaes 1 38 Figure 1 31 ISDN Lo
225. eters window refer to Figure 1 10 4 Modify the parameters according to the descriptions in Configuring WAN Line Services 5 Click on OK You return to the PRI Logical Lines window 6 Click on Apply to save the changes 7 Click on Done 8 14 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Changing PRI Timeslots For most networks you have configured all of the available B channels for PRI service Refer to Configuring PRI Lines in Chapter 1 If you have purchased selective PRI service you can modify the number of individual B channels for the interface To modify individual PRI timeslots 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector Site Manager displays the PRI Logical Lines window refer to Figure 8 8 3 Click on a B channel Site Manager displays the Timeslots window Figure 8 9 om Timenlii Lajical Lina Timmi Leng bec iims i I Chancel i iraznedd Z B hamal i taam Taal g H Chamel tuuedd Fi a so aod OD Chanel 2 p Ere Cal B Chamel i aa O up Urni j z ries 5 Liua e i e Tt So lect leatierct Al Carcel 2 Oam M 2 maa F Figure 8 9 Timeslots Window 117353 A Rev A 8 15 Configuring Dial Services Select additional B channels or deselect existing B channels Site Manager does not let you remove B channels if the number of channels will be less than the number of tim
226. ev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters UpTime Term Reset Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition 60 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Determines the amount of time the router waits before making the demand circuit available again after an uptime termination Max UpTime Termination parameter The circuit is not established at this point but the next time the router receives data the circuit will be available and the router can activate it The router invokes this timer only after an invoking the UpTime Termination parameter Enter the time period that the router should wait before making the circuit available again You must enter a value for this parameter if you configured the Max UpTime Termination parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 34 Minimum Call Duration Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 60 seconds 10 to 2 147 483 647 Specifies the minimum amount of time that the connection remains active regardless of whether there is data traffic Enter the minimum amount of tim
227. f B channels you selected in the Timeslots window and the number out of this total that you assign to each pool For example if you have a total of 20 B channels and five of those channels are configured for Pool 1 the range of this parameter for Pool 2 is 1 to 15 channels Five of the original 20 channels are not available because they are used by Pool 1 Determines the number of B channels in the line pool Enter the number of B channels that you want in the line pool If you are configuring a multirate call be sure that the value for this parameter is not less than the maximum value that you can set for the Aggregate Bandwidth parameter which you configure when you set up an outgoing phone list For example if the aggregate bandwidth is 256 Kb s the value for this parameter should be 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 11 1 5 A 20 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Parameter Pool Channel Priority Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Configured Switches gt OK gt ISDN Logical Lines OR Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt select pool gt Edit gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Logical Lines Default 1 Options 1 to 50 Function Prioritizes a group of lines in a pool For example the router us
228. f the dial up options For networks in Germany and Japan if you want to have the dial up line up at all times and your ISDN switch can support permanent connections select one of the leased options 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 34 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services PRI Port Application Mode Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Port Application Mode MCT1 or MCE1 Connector gt Port Application NonPRI NonPRI PRI Determines if this port is for PRI service The NonPRI option indicates that this is a standard synchronous interface The PRI option indicates that this is a PRI port If your application calls for PRI select PRI Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 16 ISDN Switch Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Switch Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration BRI NET3 PRI Net5S BRI NET3 BRI SWISSNET3 BRI SESS BRI DMS100 BRI KDD BRI NTT BRI TS013 BRI NII PRI SESS PRI DMS100 PRI 4ESS PRI KDD PRI NTT PRI Net5 PRI TS014 Site Manager displays only those switch options for the interface you are configuring For example if you are setting up BRI service you will s
229. f the following Ifyou have ISDN lines in the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 1 36 If you have only Raise DTR lines in the pool click on Done and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 1 40 117353 A Rev A 1 27 Configuring Dial Services Creating Bandwidth Circuits There are two ways to enable bandwidth on demand service designate a single leased circuit or a leased multilink circuit as a bandwidth on demand circuit or assign a bandwidth pool to a demand circuit If these circuits become congested the router provides up to 29 dial up circuits to relieve the congestion for a total of 30 dial up lines for communication For configuration instructions refer to the next section for leased circuits or to Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines on page 1 33 Configuring Leased Circuits as Bandwidth Circuits You should have already configured PPP multilink for the leased circuits that you will designate as bandwidth circuits To configure leased circuits as bandwidth circuits 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Select Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Figure 1 22 which lists the leased circuits that you previously configured 1 28 117353 A Rev A Getting Started atin tera cen bene Wi Feel TM Theres Bri Che Lical Homa CHAP
230. f the latter schedule The router deducts the amount of failback time already elapsed from the latter schedule refer to Example 1 Failback Times That Overlap Table 5 1 shows the Time of Day schedule for Standby Circuit 1 Table 5 1 Time of Day Schedules for Standby Circuit 1 Time of Day Schedule 1 Time of Day Schedule 2 Time of Day Schedule 3 Start Time 8 a m End Time 11 a m Start Time 11 a m End Time 5 p m Start Time 7 p m End Time 11 p m Failback Time 60 minutes Failback Time 10 minutes Failback Time 10 minutes 5 6 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Example 1 Failback Times That Overlap 7 00 a m 8 00 a m 10 30 a m 11 00 a m The primary circuit fails The standby circuit becomes available The primary circuit recovers and the failoack timer starts counting down from 60 minutes Data is still traveling over the standby circuit Since 10 30 a m 30 minutes of failback time have elapsed for Time of Day Schedule 1 but Time of Day Schedule 2 is now active This new schedule has a failback time of 10 minutes which supersedes the previous failback time of 60 minutes Because 10 minutes have passed data traffic returns to the primary circuit If you schedule the standby circuit to terminate before the failback time expires the router still terminates the standby circuit The router does not wait for the primary circuit to
231. faults for the TEI Type and TEI Value parameters if necessary Site Manager TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D parameter page A 25 Site Manager TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D parameter page A 25 6 7 Click on OK If this is the first BRI line that you are configuring Site Manager displays the ISDN Switch Configuration window similar to the window shown in Figure 8 11 Accept the defaults and click on OK Site Manager then displays the X 25 Packet and Service configuration windows You must configure certain parameters in each of these windows Refer to Configuring X 25 Services for instructions Once you exit from the X 25 windows you return to the ISDN Dialup window refer to Figure 8 6 Click on Done Disabling X 25 over the D Channel When you configure X 25 over the D channel Site Manager automatically enables the Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter in the ISDN Configured Switches window refer to Figure 8 11 This parameter disables the feature on a per slot basis For routers with only one slot disabling this parameter removes the feature from the router altogether To disable X 25 over the D channel 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters Site Manager displays the ISDN Configured Switches window refer to Figure 8 11 117353 A Rev A 8 21 Configuring Dial Services 3 Select Disable for the Global X 25 over
232. field ADDR Q921 differs from ADDR Q922 MARCH 90 in that it does not use FECNs or BECNs Select the addressing type for the Frame Relay interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 8 A 64 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Address Length Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface Two Byte Two Byte Three Byte Four Byte Specifies the length of the Frame Relay address field The length of this field determines the range of valid numbers for the DLCI number set in the Frame Relay PVC List window Refer to Configuring Frame Relay Services for more information Select the address length for the address field This must match what the network specifies 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 9 Polling Interval Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface 10 seconds 5 to 30 seconds Specifies the interval
233. figuration First configure the backup pools Path Dialup gt Backup Pools Table B 18 Backup Pools Parameter Param ter Router 1 Router 2 S11 8331 Pool ID 1 1 After you enter a backup pool ID the Backup Lines Definition window appears Click on a COM connector Site Manager displays the WAN Serial Interface Type window where you determine whether you want to use Sync or Async communication Sync is the default so no changes are needed 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Next Site Manager displays the Line Media Type window In this application Raise DTR the default is the signaling method so no changes are needed After you configure the line media type parameters return to the Configuration Manager window Backup Circuit Configuration Once the backup pool is configured configure the backup circuits Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP Remember that you do not actually configure a backup circuit designate a leased circuit as a primary circuit If this circuit fails the router provides a backup circuit that adopts the configuration of the primary circuit Path Primary Circuit Definition select S11 or S331 then click on Cct Type gt Circuit Options Table B 19 Circuit Options Parameters Param ter Router 1 Router 2 S11 331 Circuit Type Primary Primary Backup Pool ID 1 1 Return to the Primary Circuit Definition window from the Circuit O
234. finition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration Disable Enable Disable The incoming filter enables you to use the security feature caller ID It compares the phone number of the calling party with the phone numbers you entered in the incoming phone list described in Chapter 12 You must purchase caller ID service so that the provider includes the calling party s number in the call setup message Enable this parameter if you want the router to filter all incoming calls based on the calling party s number Disable this parameter if the router should not screen calls or if the switch does not include the calling party s number in the incoming call 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 5 Sending Complete IE Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration Disable Enable Disable Instructs the router to include the sending complete information element IE in the outgoing call setup message to the switch The sending complete IE is a number that the router includes in the call setup message to indicate that the setup is complete and no other setup information will follow There are some switches that rely on this information during call setup Select Enable if you want to include this IE in the call setup message and if your ISDN switch supports this
235. for identification and security purposes and it must be the same on both sides of the connection When one router places a call to another router an authentication process takes place During this phase the routers exchange challenge packets that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify the CHAP secret If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 4 A 102 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters PAP Password Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password None Any text string maximum of 25 characters Specifies the PAP password you assign to this interface The PAP password is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the connection During the authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct password If the password is not correct the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK message and the calling router does not activate the connection If you configured PAP as the authentication protoco
236. going call setup message This number along with SPIDs in the United States and Canada also identifies the router to the ISDN switch Certain switches require this number before they agree to activate a circuit Your ISDN service provider assigns the numbers for your local phone list The router also uses the local phone list during BAP negotiations for bandwidth on demand service The non monitor router passes a local phone number to the monitor router when the monitor router requests additional bandwidth When the monitor router receives the phone number it uses that number to call back the non monitor router which then activates another line How V 25bis and Hayes Calls Use the Outgoing Phone List For V 25bis and Hayes calls the router uses the outgoing phone list to pass the remote router s phone number to the modem to establish a connection 12 2 117353 A Rev A Customizing Phone Lists Creating an Outgoing Phone List If you set up an ISDN configuration in Chapter 1 you have already set up an outgoing phone list To modify this list go to Modifying the Outgoing Phone List on page 12 7 To create an outgoing phone list 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Circuits For backup and bandwidth circuits Site Manager displays the appropriate Circuit Definition window Figure 12 1 shows an example of the Primary Circuit Definition window for
237. h Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Enable Enable Disable Specifies whether the router performs authentication when it places an outbound call Disabling outbound authentication improves interoperability with devices that do not perform two way authentication or support CHAP Accept the default Enable if you want to use two way authentication that is both sides of the connection will authenticate the other s identity Select Disable to use one way authentication which means that only the router receiving the call performs authentication If you disable this parameter to use one way authentication you must enable the PPP Fallback parameter which is part of the PPP interface configuration Refer to Configuring PPP Services for information about PPP Fallback 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 48 117353 A Rev A A 41 Configuring Dial Services Circuit Duration Parameters Demand and Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The circuit duration parameters determine how long the connection remains active It does not determine the days and hours that the circuit is available Maximum Up Time Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup g
238. h the setting you specify for the Frame Relay Interface Congestion Control parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 25 A 74 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Congestion Timer Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List 1 second 0 5 to 5 seconds in 0 5 second intervals Specifies the length of time during which the router counts congestion notifications If the router receives the number of congestion notifications set by the Congestion Counter parameter the router stops transmitting data The router resumes transmission once it stops receiving congestion notifications Set the length of time the router should count congestion notifications from the network If you set this parameter for a long time period the router may be less likely to stop transmission for an intermittent congestion condition However the router may be slow to detect congestion resulting in long transmission delays o
239. have to enter a value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 55 A 82 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Reserved Bandwidth Slot Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options None Available slots in the bandwidth pool For example if the bandwidth pool has lines from slot 3 and slot 4 you cannot enter a value of 5 Specifies the slot the router chooses when adding a line to a multilink bundle if the preferred slot cannot provide a line For BAP configurations the non monitor router uses this parameter to determine which lines are available It then sends the local phone number associated with an available line to the monitor router which then dials the number to activate the line for additional bandwidth Enter the number of the slot you want the router to use after checking the preferred slot but note the following e Site Manager looks for another circuit configured as Monitor in the same pool as the newly created circuit If one exists Site Manager copies the value for the existing circuit s Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameter and enters it for this parameter You do not have to enter a value e If this is the first circuit configured as Monitor in a pool that us
240. he ASN BLN and BON c ccccccccccceccecesecaeaeseseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 4 13 117353 A Rev A vii B Ghannel Support erea ea teste een etna darian aa aa eea relent aa 4 13 D Channel Support nt accAtie titi deeded eink Aa aaia Raia 4 14 Selective PRI Service 0 2 ceccceccccceseneeececeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaaeeseaeeeseaaeeenaeeeesaeesseneeees 4 14 PRI Multirate tanya ahah ae ata 4 15 Placing Multirate Calls oo cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeceaeseaeesaeecsaeeseeseeeeaeeseeeees 4 15 Incoming Call Filtering 42 080 eine ae Oeil de tii a 4 16 Rale AUAPUON nire raea etek Av AA E OA tds ete hte a grea ete 4 16 X 25 Service over an ISDN D Channel BRI Only eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 4 18 Configuring X 25 Service over the D Channel ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 4 19 Using the ping Command for ISDN Connections cccsscceeeeesneeeeeeseseeeeeeeaes 4 20 Chapter 5 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Standby Circuits aroa Boe eck Bec a ae aaie aaa a a a laaa aaaea d a aa Ea dees ead oaaao LE 5 1 Comparing Standby Circuits with Dial Backup Circuits 0 ccceeessseeeeeesteeeeeeeeees 5 2 How Standby Circuits Work cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseeeeeesaeeseeneeeniaeeesenes 5 3 Guidelines for Configuring Standby Circuits ccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeees 5 4 Balancing Traffic between a Primary Circuit and a Hot Standby Circuit 5 5
241. he router to fragment the packet 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 57 117353 A Rev A A 85 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Enable Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Circuit List gt select circuit gt Edit gt Circuit Definition gt Protocols gt Add Delete gt BAP gt OK gt Protocols gt Edit BAP gt Edit BAP Circuit Interface Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables BAP service to manage the allocation of bandwidth across a multilink bundle BAP is available only for ISDN lines To enable BAP choose Enable otherwise accept the default Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 65 No Phone Number Needed Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Circuit List gt select circuit gt Edit gt Circuit Definition gt Protocols gt Add Delete gt BAP gt OK gt Protocols gt Edit BAP gt Edit BAP Circuit Interface Enable Enable Disable Instructs the non monitor router whether to send its local phone number to the monitor router during BAP negotiations for more bandwidth Accept the default Enable if all the numbers that the monitor router requires are in the outgoing phone list This value tells the non monitor router not to supply phone numbers Select Disable if you configured only one outgoing phon
242. he router to send a full status inquiry every 6 polling intervals For example with a polling interval of 10 and a full enquiry interval of 6 the router transmits a full status inquiry every 60 seconds with a polling interval of 20 and a full enquiry interval of 30 the router transmits a full status inquiry every 10 minutes 600 seconds Enter a value from 1 to 255 according to what the network dictates Full Enquiry Interval does not function if you set Mgmnt Type to DLCMI None 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 11 A 66 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Error Threshold Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface 3 0 to 2 147 483 647 Together with the value of the Monitored Events parameter establishes a criterion to evaluate the quality of the router Frame Relay network connection If you accept the default values for both Error Threshold and Monitored Events three status exchange errors in a sequence of four attempted exchanges will bring the connection down With Error Threshold set to 5 and Monitored Events set to 10 five status exchange errors in a continuous sequence of ten attempted exchanges will br
243. hen the router has data to transmit or when you configure the router to bring up a demand circuit the router instructs the dial device to establish a connection 2 4 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Data arrives at the New York router but the final destination is Dallas A port in the demand pool transmits the data Los Angeles Dial device Demand pool 1 Slot 2 Chicago New York Dial e Dial device J device Back of router Dial device Dallas Dial g L device DS0013A Figure 2 2 Dial on Demand Service Demand Lines and Pools Demand lines provide the physical connections over which the demand circuits transmit and receive data To maximize the number of circuits that can be active simultaneously you establish a demand pool A demand pool is a group of one or more lines that reside in the same slot on the router You identify each demand pool by assigning a demand pool ID Lines in a demand pool can connect to a modem directly to a PSTN using the ARN with the V 34 Modem Adapter Module or directly to an ISDN network using a router with internal ISDN capability You can combine asynchronous synchronous and ISDN interfaces in a single pool The synchronous interfaces can us
244. his type of application requires the following interfaces e One synchronous interface for SDLC or X 25 traffic e One synchronous interface for the primary link to the backbone network e One ISDN B channel for the dial backup link If you use 2B D service without configuring floating B the AN provides only one synchronous interface so you cannot integrate the dial service with other network applications However by configuring floating B you can configure two synchronous interfaces one Ethernet link and one B channel The router software maps whichever B channel is in use to a single SCC To implement the floating B option select Dialup Floating B for the Port Application Mode parameter refer to Chapter 8 The router makes the necessary adjustments so that only one B channel is available PRI Service on the ASN BLN and BCN The ASN BLN and BCN provide PRI service using the following modules e 120 ohm Single Port MCE1 II Net Module ASN only e Single or Dual Port MCT1 Link Module BLN and BCN only e 120 ohm Single or Dual Port MCE1 II Link Module BLN and BCN only e QMCTI Link Module BLN and BCN only PRI allows you to connect directly to the ISDN network instead of connecting via a terminal adapter PRI is a cost effective solution when the number of BRI channels required for an application exceeds the cost of a single PRI line The cost savings depend on each country s tariffs All three dial services can use
245. hone numbers are part of each circuit s configuration not the line s configuration The following sections describe how the router uses phone lists for different types of calls 117353 A Rev A 12 1 Configuring Dial Services How ISDN Calls Use Phone Lists For ISDN calls the router uses the local outgoing and incoming phone lists The instructions to configure each phone list begin on page 12 3 Outgoing and Incoming Phone Lists The router uses the outgoing phone list to place calls to remote routers on an ISDN network The router uses the incoming phone list to implement incoming call filtering You use incoming call filtering with caller ID service which lets you identify a remote caller If you enable incoming call filtering the router matches the caller s phone number with a number in the incoming phone list which identifies and authorizes the caller Features such as callback for demand circuits rely on incoming call filtering for certain callback modes Refer to Chapter 5 for more information about the callback feature Caution To use incoming call filtering you must purchase caller ID service If you enable incoming call filtering without having caller ID service the router rejects all incoming calls Local Phone Lists For BRI connections the local phone list numbers identify the local calling router to remote routers on the network The router places the local phone number in the ISDN out
246. hone number your ISDN provider supplied when you received ISDN service For switches in the United States do not include the area code when you enter the phone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 4 Ext SubAddr Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Add gt Phone Number None A maximum of 25 numeric characters Specifies a subaddress or an extension line for a main phone number that further identifies the local router The subaddress is useful when you have several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to the destination site An incoming call has to specify the number and the subaddress to reach a specific router Enter the extension subaddress You may assign this number or your ISDN provider may assign it when you receive ISDN service Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 5 117353 A Rev A A 87 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID SPID Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Add gt Phone Number None A maximum of 20 numeric characters For switches in the United States and Canada the Service Profile Identif
247. how often the router checks the bandwidth circuit to determine if the line or bundle is congested Enter a value specifying how often you want the router to check the congestion on the bandwidth circuit For example entering a value of 200 means that the router checks the line every 20 seconds 200 x 0 10 seconds 20 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 52 BOD Full Threshold Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 70 percent 10 to 400 percent Specifies a percentage of the maximum amount of data that the router transmits and receives The data traffic must reach or exceed this percentage before the router considers the line or bundle congested Enter a percentage that the router uses to measure congestion If you configured data compression on the circuit you may want to configure a threshold greater than 100 percent 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 53 117353 A Rev A A 81 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BOD Periods to Fail Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 10 1 to 100 Specifies the number of consecutive times the router finds that data traffic on the b
248. ialing only enter a phone prefix that is an AT command string Site Manager Outgoing Phone Prefix parameter page A 99 9 Click on OK when the phone entry is complete You return to the completed Outgoing Phone List window Figure 12 4 117353 A Rev A 12 5 Configuring Dial Services The first four fields and the last field are completed based on the entries in the Phone Number window refer to Figure 12 3 Gutia Pieria Mier taotpodrag Fhonre Ert ifik Du going Flema Mallaitar Plans Homir Tuge MDR Messer ding Tipe EH hrag Pan Figure 12 4 Completed Outgoing Phone List Window 10 If the Phone Number Type parameter is set to ISDN accept the defaults for the ISDN Numbering Type and ISDN Numbering Plan parameters unless your service provider instructs otherwise For Dial Sync or Async phone numbers ignore the ISDN parameters 11 Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters or modify them according to the descriptions in Appendix A 12 Repeat the procedure for each phone number you want to add to the list 13 Click on Done when you finish entering outgoing phone list numbers You return to the appropriate circuit window 14 Click on Done 12 6 117353 A Rev A Customizing Phone Lists Modifying the Outgoing Phone List To modify the outgoing phone list 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand C
249. ialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface 20 notifications 1 to 500 notifications Indicates the maximum number of congestion notifications that the router can receive during the congestion timer period before it stops transmitting If the router reaches the value set by this parameter it determines the line is congested and stops transmitting Specify the congestion count The smaller the number the more quickly the router detects congestion and stops transmitting The value of this parameter applies to all PVCs that you do not individually configure 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 24 Hangup on DLCMI Failure Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface Disable Enable Disable Indicates whether to terminate the backup connection if the Frame Relay switch does not initially respond to the call with a full status message Select Enable if you want the router to clear the backup circuit when the switch does not respond Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 32 A 70 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Service List Parameter Demand and Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function
250. ication the router uses You enable this parameter to use two way authentication and disable it to use one way authentication The parameter is in the circuit definition window of each dial service Refer to the appropriate chapter for configuring circuits Using CHAP Names and PAP IDs for Authentication Authentication occurs before the routers establish a connection The router at one or both ends of the connection must agree on the CHAP name and secret or PAP ID and password so PPP can identify the caller and activate the correct circuit Figure 4 3 shows an example of routers using CHAP for authentication PAP works in a similar way This example uses two way authentication PPP link between Router A and Router B ge outer B y Dial devi Router A SS E L JI Dial Local CHAP Name Branch_B Router C Local CHAP Name Branch_A Dial device Local CHAP Name Branch_C Router A Router B Caller resolution table Caller resolution table Caller Name Local Circuit Caller Name Local Circuit Branch_B 27 Branch_A 5 Branch_C 13 DS0019A Figure 4 3 Routers Using CHAP for Authentication 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services In Figure 4 3 Routers A and B each have a caller resolution table that maps local circuits to
251. idth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Non Monitor for leased circuits Dynamic Monitor for demand circuits Non Monitor Monitor Dynamic Monitor demand circuits only Determines whether the router serves as the monitor router The level of congestion determines when the router provides an additional circuit to carry data across the network Select one of the following options Monitor Instructs the router to watch the congestion on the line or bundle Only one router on the link can serve as the monitor router and activate a secondary line The other router must be set to Non Monitor If both are set to Monitor they may try to activate a secondary line simultaneously resulting in a collision on the network If you configure bandwidth on demand service to aid a demand circuit and this parameter is set to Monitor ensure that the demand circuit s Connection Mode parameter is set to Collision Master or Collision Slave Non Monitor Instructs the non monitor router to wait for the monitor router to activate secondary lines This router is not responsible for monitoring the congestion and it cannot initiate a connection Dynamic Monitor Select this option for configurations that use BAP to allocate bandwidth It enables the router to function as the monitor or non monitor router based on the direction of the call With this value set the router who initiates the c
252. ier SPID identifies an ISDN device to the switch so it knows which services to provide Enter the SPID that your ISDN provider supplied when you received ISDN service Ignore this parameter if you have a 5ESS switch on a point to point line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 6 ISDN Numbering Type Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers Unknown Unknown International National Specific Subscriber Abbreviated Indicates the standard that the phone number follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch Accept the default value Unknown unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 9 A 88 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ISDN Numbering Plan Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers Telephony Unknown Telephony X121 Telex Standard Private Indicates the standard that the phone number plan follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch If you set the Switch Type parameter to BRI NTT BRI KDD or BRI NI select the value Unknown For all other switches Site Manager uses the default value Telephony Accept Telephony unless your service provider instructs otherwise 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 10
253. ies whether the circuit over the selected leased line uses dial backup service This line is not part of the backup pool For a standard leased circuit the router does not provide a backup if the original circuit fails For a primary circuit the router provides a backup to carry the data Accept the default Normal if you do not want a backup circuit for the data Select Primary if you want to use dial backup service 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 1 1 31 Backup Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options None 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool for the primary circuit If you select Primary for the Circuit Type parameter enter the ID of the backup pool that this circuit should use If you accept the default Normal for the Circuit Type parameter do not enter a value for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 117353 A Rev A A 57 Configuring Dial Services PPP Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition None 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool for the primary circuit Enter the ID number of the backup pool this circuit should use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 Backup Mode Dialup gt
254. ilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Bay Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Bay Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Bay Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Bay Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Bay Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Bay Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Bay Networks is not liable to Licensee for dam
255. ing the connection down After the network clears the connection status exchanges continue and the router monitors line integrity When the number of consecutive successful status exchanges is equal to the Error Threshold value the router restores the Frame Relay connection Error Threshold and Monitored Events are nonfunctional if you set Mgmnt Type to DLCMI None Enter the number of faulty status exchanges that will bring the connection down 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 1 117353 A Rev A A 67 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Monitored Events Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface 4 0 to 2 147 483 647 Together with the value of the Error Threshold parameter establishes a criterion to evaluate the quality of the router Frame Relay network connection Refer to the description of the Error Threshold parameter for more information Enter the number of consecutive status exchanges you want the router to monitor 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 13 Multicast Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt
256. inology that Site Manager and this manual use to refer to circuits in a bandwidth on demand configuration Table 7 1 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service Type of Circuit Referred to As Leased circuit Bandwidth circuit Leased multilink circuit You designate a leased circuit as a bandwidth circuit to enable bandwidth on demand service Dial on demand circuit Demand circuit This is a demand circuit for which you can provide bandwidth on demand service You do not designate this as a bandwidth circuit Dial up circuit that helps the Dial up or secondary circuit congested leased circuit 117353 A Rev A 7 1 Configuring Dial Services PPP Multilink Multilink is a feature of PPP that you can enable for individual PPP links Site Manager automatically configures PPP multilink when you configure circuits for bandwidth on demand service Links are logical communication channels between two routers A typical link includes two ISDN B channels one dial up modem connection and a leased 64 Kb s line Multilink enables you to e Group lines of different speeds e Distribute traffic more evenly among the lines e Maintain packet sequence e Monitor traffic volume for bandwidth on demand service These features are particularly beneficial for bandwidth on demand configurations where the router activates additional dial up lines to relieve congestion over a single leased line a leased multilink bundle o
257. ion for detailed instructions 4 Click on Done 10 12 117353 A Rev A Customizing Backup Circuits Configuring Filters for Primary Shared Interfaces To configure filters for primary shared interfaces 1 2 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay Site Manager displays the FR Primary Interface Definition window refer to Figure 10 6 Click on Backup Def Site Manager displays the FR Backup Interface window refer to Figure 10 7 Click on Filters Site Manager displays the Priority Outbound Filters window refer to Figure 10 11 Create enable and modify traffic filters Refer to Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for detailed instructions If you do not configure filters for a primary shared interface the interface uses the primary circuit s filters Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 10 13 Configuring Dial Services Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Backup Circuits After you configure a primary circuit Site Manager adds several buttons to the Primary Circuit Definition window and the FR Primary Interface Definition window Apply Schedule Phone Out Use them to modify the backup circuit To edit the backup circuit 1 Select the desired primary circuit and enter new values for the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A 2 Click on Apply to save your changes 3 Click on Done to return
258. ircuits For backup and bandwidth circuits Site Manager displays the appropriate Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 12 1 as an example For demand circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window Select a circuit and click on Phone Out Site Manager displays the Outgoing Phone List window refer to Figure 12 4 Modify the phone number according to the descriptions in Appendix A using these guidelines e Order of numbers The order in which you enter the phone numbers is the order in which the router dials the numbers To insert a number between two existing numbers select the number that the new number should follow then click on Add After e Changing numbers If you want to change a phone number click in the field for the parameter you want to modify Enter a new value then click on Apply The phone number appears with the changes at the top of the window e Deleting numbers If you want to delete a phone number select the phone number and extension if any and click on Delete Site Manager deletes the number Click on Apply to ensure that the router accepts the changes Click on Done Table 12 1 lists all the changes you can make to the outgoing phone list 117353 A Rev A 12 7 Configuring Dial Services Table 12 1 Customizing the Outgoing Phone Li
259. ire a modem command Site Manager Modem Command String parameter page A 9 2 Inthe Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface window modify the modem initialization string Appendix E lists the modem initialization commands for the ARN Site Manager Modem Init String parameter page A 9 3 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window refer to Figure 8 3 4 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 9 Configuring Dial Services Modifying How the Modem Connects to the Network You can change how the modem connects to the network Refer to Modifying Modem Configurations on page 8 6 to access the Modem Interface window To change how the modem connects to the network 1 Modify the amount of time the router waits between connection attempts sync interfaces async interfaces async Hayes interfaces Site Manager Retry Delay parameter page A 7 2 Modify the number of connection attempts the router makes sync interfaces async interfaces async Hayes interfaces Site Manager Redial Count parameter page A 7 3 Enable the Ring Indicator parameter for only Raise DTR interfaces Site Manager Ring Indicator parameter page A 7 4 Enable the Debug Mode parameter to see debug messages that the router logs sync interfaces async interfaces async Hayes interfaces Site Manager Debug Mode parameter page A
260. ist Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Multiple Single Multiple Indicates whether the router uses the phone number for a single call or multiple calls for applications that use bandwidth on demand to aid congested demand circuits If you select Single the router checks whether this phone number is already in use for a circuit on the same slot If the remote device is already busy the router does not attempt to place the call using this number Choosing the Single option is particularly important if the line is connected to an external device such as a modem If the router places a call to device that is busy it takes a long time before the router determines that the device is unavailable By selecting Single you eliminate this loss of time If you select Multiple the router can use the phone number for many calls For example if you are using PRI service you have many channels that can use the same phone number to place a call Therefore you would select Multiple for this parameter Choose Single if the remote destination can only support a single connection with this outgoing phone number If a circuit on the same slot is already using this phone number the router will use another phone number in the list Otherwise accept
261. it 1 128 32 17 1 the local interface to Phoenix Circuit 2 128 32 18 1 the local interface to San Francisco BSOA Figure 2 9 Example of Backup Pools Lines and Circuits You can assign the same backup pool ID to more than one primary circuit If you want only one backup line dedicated to a primary circuit then you should configure only one line in a pool and assign that pool exclusively to that circuit 2 18 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Configuration of the Backup Circuit The configuration of the backup circuit depends on the protocol for that circuit If Standard or PPP is running over the primary circuit the backup circuit inherits the primary s network layer address configuration Unlike the network layer address configuration the data link layer configuration can be unique If Frame Relay is running over the primary circuit the backup circuit can inherit the primary s configuration or it can use its own configuration When the Frame Relay primary and backup circuit use the same configuration it is called the shared configuration The shared configuration allows a backup circuit to use the same network layer address as the primary circuit The backup circuit s data link layer configuration PVCs DLCIs and filters can be the same or different from the primary circuit If the backup circuit uses a unique configuration it is called the secondary configuration A secondary configuration uses a
262. ity may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties 117353 A Rev A Bay Networks Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH BAY NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Bay Networks Inc Bay Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license
263. k Monitor If you selected Monitor for the bandwidth mode when you configured a bandwidth circuit in Chapter 1 Site Manager sets the PPP Circuit Mode parameter accordingly Site Manager PPP Circuit Mode parameter page A 80 5 Accept the defaults or modify the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A 117353 A Rev A 11 5 Configuring Dial Services Table 11 3 explains how to change the monitor parameters Table 11 3 Changing the Monitor Parameters Location in Task Site Manager Parameter Appendix A Specify how often the router checks for BOD Exam Period page A 81 congestion Specify a percentage of the maximum BOD Full Threshold page A 81 amount of data that can be transmitted across the line Indicate the number of consecutive times BOD Periods to Fail page A 82 the line exceeds the BOD Full Threshold and is considered congested Instruct the router which slots to use to Preferred Bandwidth Slot page A 82 activate additional lines for BAP and Reserved Bandwidth Slot page A 83 non BAP bandwidth on demand service Specify the maximum number of links in a Maximum Links page A 83 multilink bundle Specify a percentage that the data traffic BOD Recovery Threshold page A 84 must be reduced before the line is no longer considered congested Specify the number of consecutive times BOD Periods to Recover page A 84 the line falls below the BOD
264. ker on at all times On For Answer Turns the speaker on only when the modem is answering a call and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Not applicable A 10 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters No of Rings to Answer COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface 0 0 to 255 Determines the number of rings the router allows to connect to the modem This parameter is available only if you select a modem from the list that Site Manager provides Enter an integer indicating the number of rings the router allows For some modems the modem may not answer after one ring so you may want to set this value for two rings or more Not applicable 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services V 34 Modem Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID These parameters are available only for the ARN using the V 34 Modem Adapter Module Expert Config COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Disabled Enabled Disabled Enables or disables configuration of the Modem Config String parameter To use only the factory default configuration leave this set to Disabled Set to Enabled to enter an AT command string in the Modem Config String field
265. kup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Telephony Unknown Telephony X121 Telex Standard Private This parameter indicates the standard that the phone number plan follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch If you set the Switch Type parameter to BRI NTT BRI KDD or BRI NII select the value Unknown For all other switch types Site Manager uses the default Telephony Accept Telephony unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 9 A 94 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Parameter Adaption Rate Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Default 64K Options 64K 56K Function For ISDN calls only specifies the rate at which the lo
266. l specify a unique PAP password If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 5 Local Circuit Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table None Available demand primary or bandwidth circuit Identifies a previously configured demand primary or bandwidth circuit You assign this circuit to a remote router which you specify in the Caller Name parameter When the local router receives a call from the remote router it matches the remote router s CHAP name or PAP ID with a caller name in the caller resolution table The router then activates the circuit assigned to that remote router If you enter a value for this parameter you cannot enter a value for the Local Group parameter Select a circuit from the Local Circuit List window Site Manager automatically supplies the value for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 3 117353 A Rev A A 103 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Local Group Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password 0 0 to 1000 Identifies a previously configured demand circuit group You assign this demand circuit group to a remote router which you specify in the Caller Name parameter When the local router receives a call from the remote router it matches the remote router s CHAP name or PAP ID with a caller name in the caller resolution table The router then activates
267. le Although dial optimized routing limits the amount of routing information sent across the network you can maintain the accuracy of the routing tables using the following methods Set the Hold Down Timer parameter to a higher value than the Broadcast Timer or Update Interval parameter The Hold Down Timer parameter specifies how long unusable routes are advertised after the route is invalid This ensures that unreachable routes remain in the routing table long enough to be broadcast over an active connection Synchronize protocol requests for a connection When a connection is active the router sends status messages to IP or IPX alerting the protocol that it can send routing updates If IP or IPX does not receive this connection message it makes a separate request for a connection This request resets the Minimum Duration Time parameter and the connection then remains active for the specified time 117353 A Rev A 5 17 Configuring Dial Services e Configure the router to handle oversubscription of lines If you do not have enough lines to accommodate the number of circuits you can enable an oversubscription timer This timer determines how often the router retries a connection so it can send routing updates if the previous attempt failed The router keeps a list of circuits requesting connections and tries to establish these connections when the timer expires To configure the oversubscription timer you must use the Tech
268. lists the types of leased lines that you can select Refer to Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for instructions on setting up leased interfaces Setting Up a Dial Service Each dial service has many configurable parameters but for a basic configuration you change only a subset of these parameters Setting up a dial service involves three main tasks 1 Enabling a physical interface 2 Creating line pools 3 Assigning and configuring circuits that use the configured line pools Each task involves several steps Table 1 2 on page 1 4 lists the basic tasks required to set up a dial service These tasks apply to modem and ISDN configurations This basic configuration assumes the following e Your router interfaces are synchronous e PPP is the layer 2 protocol e JP is the layer 3 protocol e There is no ISDN caller ID service therefore no incoming phone list is required This basic configuration does not address every application 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Table 1 2 Setting Up a Default Modem or ISDN Configuration Task Parameters to Set DOD DB BOD 1 Create a line pool and assign an ID to the Pool ID x X x pool Port Application Mode ISDN interfaces only Before creating a line pool select an ISDN port and configure it for BRI or PRI service 2 Add one or more lines to the pool and for None accept the default x x x modem lines
269. ll ID These modes do not require an outgoing phone list to place a call they rely only on the phone number in the call setup message If you cannot use caller ID or the phone number in the call setup message is not sufficient to place an outgoing call for example you have to dial 9 to get an outside line do not select a Call ID mode Determines the role of the router in relation to its peer router and how the router identifies which phone number to call back Select one of the following options Inactive Disables the callback feature for this circuit Server Designates the router as the callback server The server receives a call from the client It authenticates the caller disconnects the call and returns the call using a phone number in the outgoing phone list continued A 34 117353 A Rev A Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters continued Client Designates the router as the callback client Use this mode when the other end of the connection uses Server or Server Call ID The client initiates a call to the server then waits for the server to return the call Once it receives the return call the client authenticates the call before accepting it Server Call ID ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server using caller ID The server receives a call from the client authenticates the call and disconnects it The server then returns the call using the phone numb
270. lly deactivates the hot standby circuit and sends data traffic back across the primary circuit when it recovers This option takes precedence over any Time of Day schedule Manual Controls the primary and hot standby circuits by operator intervention To return traffic to the primary circuit you manually deactivate the standby circuit This option overrides the Time of Day schedule None Instructs the router to rely exclusively on the Time of Day schedule for primary and standby circuit operation and to ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 51 A 32 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Manual Standby Action Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits No Action No Action Activate Deactivate Allows you to manually control the standby circuit Select Activate to activate a standby or hot standby circuit Select Deactivate to bring down a standby circuit Accept the default No Action if you do not want to manually activate a standby circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 52 Standby Primary Circuit Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits None Circuit number of a leased line Specifies the primary circuit that the hot standby circuit backs
271. ls button in the top left corner Select Protocols gt Add Delete to configure protocols for the demand circuit In this example IP is the only protocol configured Path Protocols gt Select Protocols Table B 3 IP Parameters Paramet r Router 4 Router 7 S25 23 IP Address 150 1 1 2 150 1 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Path IP gt IP Adjacent Host Table B 4 IP Adjacent Host Parameter Parameter Router 4 Router 7 S25 S23 IP Adjacent Host 150 1 1 1 150 1 1 2 Path IP Adjacent Host gt PPP Demand Circuits Table B 5 PPP Demand Circuits Parameters Baraniei r Router 4 Router 7 S25 23 CHAP Local Name BLN1 case sensitive BLN2 case sensitive CHAP Secret East case sensitive East case sensitive Connection Mode Default Collision Master Collision Slave B 4 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Outgoing Phone List Configuration From the PPP Demand Circuits window click on Phone Out to display the Outgoing Phone List window Path Outgoing Phone List gt Phone Number Table B 6 Outgoing Phone List Parameter Parameter Router 4 Router 7 S25 23 Outgoing Phone 4362323 4368989 Number Do not use hyphens or other Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters nonnumeric characters Caller Resolution Table Configuration After configuring the demand circ
272. m 20 characters This name is part of the incoming call and informs the local router of the remote router s identity Enter a text string no longer than 20 characters that identifies a remote router If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol enter the remote router s CHAP name If you configure PAP enter the remote router s PAP ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 2 CHAP Secret Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool gt OK gt Caller Resolution Info Unsecured Any text string maximum 20 characters Specifies the CHAP secret you assign to this interface The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the connection When one router places a call to another router the authentication process takes place During this phase the routers exchange challenge packets that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same CHAP secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify the CHAP secret If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 4 A 52 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters PAP Password Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool gt OK gt Caller Re
273. mand circuit group In this case the router verifies the remote router s name in the incoming call setup message If it does not match a name in the caller resolution table the router disconnects the call Protocol Configuration for Demand Circuit Groups You must configure a demand circuit group using one of the following unnumbered protocols e IP with either RIP RIP II or OSPF as the routing protocol e IPX with RIP SAP and or NLSP as the routing protocol e Bridging Note When you configure a protocol for a demand circuit group Site Manager requires that you also configure a routing protocol A single protocol configuration applies to all circuits in the group and can be used by many remote nodes calling the recovery router Without the use of specific network addresses the recovery router must use routing updates to determine the data path to the remote nodes Unlike individual demand circuits you can enable routing protocols for a demand circuit group without establishing a dial up connection The demand circuit group and its protocol interface are active only when the physical connection is active Without a physical line available no circuit or protocol information for example RIP update packets can pass from one router to the next Using Demand Circuit Groups with Dial Backup Service You can use demand circuit groups with dial backup service to dial an alternative site if the original destination cannot be reach
274. me Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List OFF ON OFF Allows you to use the same PVC for both routing and bridging Set to ON if you want to enable both routing and bridging services If not accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 24 Congestion Control Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List Inherit Disable Enable Inherit Enables or disables congestion control on this interface Set to Enable to activate congestion control This value tells the router to drop all traffic destined for a congested PVC until the congestion clears Select Disable to deactivate congestion control Accept the default Inherit if you want the Congestion Control setting for this PVC to matc
275. minal type A Onetouch is Y N No Default for terminal type A 117353 A Rev A D 1 Configuring Dial Services Table D 2 BRI Parameters for the Northern Telecom DMS 100 Switch Parameter Value Notes Signaling Functional Protocol Version 1or2 1 is NT1 Custom 2 is NI 1 National ISDN 1 TEI Assignment Dynamic Maximum of Keys 3 Specify any number equal to or greater than 1 Release Key is Nora Key No Not relevant for proper operation Number Ring Indicator is Y N No Not relevant for proper operation EKTS is Y N No Ordering PRI Lines When ordering ISDN PRI lines for use in the United States note the following The switch must be a DMS 100 AT amp T S5ESS or AT amp T 4ESS switch Configure all 23 B channels for Circuit Switched Data CSD Configure the D channel for signaling only You cannot run the National ISDN 2 NI 2 protocol D 2 117353 A Rev A Appendix E AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Table E 1 lists the AT commands used by the ARN with the internal Modem Adapter Module Your modem may use a different set of commands so refer to the manual for your modem Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands Command Function A Reexecute command A Go off hook and attempt to answer a call BO Select V 22 connection at 1200 b s B1 Select Bell 212A connection at 1200 b s
276. modify the service configuration Refer to Configuring X 25 Services for parameter descriptions Click on OK 117353 A Rev A 8 23 Configuring Dial Services Configuring a BRI Leased Line Germany and Japan only If your ISDN service provider does not use the D channel for call setup or if you can use ISDN leased lines at an economical rate you may configure your ISDN line to act as a leased line Remember that BRI is only supported on the ASN AN ANH and ARN To set up a BRI leased line 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on an ISDN connector Site Manager displays the Port Application window refer to Figure 1 8 3 Select a leased option for the port application mode then click on OK Site Manager Port Application Mode parameter page A 15 Site Manager displays the ISDN Leased Line B Channels window Figure 8 14 which shows the two leased B channels hore E Oumal 2 Cramba Edit OD G an apply Dees Late Figure 8 14 ISDN Leased Line B Channels Window 4 Click on Done Site Manager displays the Add Circuit window Figure 8 15 8 24 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools Configuration Bode SHPO Fipperit Cireukt Hami wi Gelert dines Proe oveilohie Goennectoret Sle Canwest r COLE r i F WNR Figure 8 15 Add Circuit Window 5 Click on an ISDN connector Site Manager supplies a value for the Circuit Name parameter Accept
277. n Chapter 1 This chapter explains how to modify existing entries in the table and how to add new ones Before you set up your caller resolution table you should have completed your dial on demand dial backup or bandwidth on demand configurations To configure the caller resolution table 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Table window Figure 13 1 il Local Circuit CHIF Serret POF Panciamd Local Group Figure 13 1 Caller Resolution Table Window 3 Click on Add to add an entry to the table Site Manager displays the Caller Name and Secret Password window Figure 13 2 13 2 117353 A Rev A Customizing Caller Resolution Malai Helps Ea wr Name m CHAP Secret UNSECURED pi Paes LeeSECUREo Local Group o Figure 13 2 Caller Name and Secret Password Window 4 Enter a caller name which is the remote caller s CHAP name or PAP ID Site Manager Caller Name parameter page A 102 5 Enter the remote caller s CHAP secret or PAP password The CHAP secret or PAP password that you enter must be the same one that you specified for the local router in the Circuit Definition window Site Manager CHAP Secret parameter page A 102 Site Manager PAP Password parameter page A 103 6 If this entry is for a demand circuit group specify the local group for the r
278. n Demand Dial on Demand Bandwidth on Demand Dial and Bandwidth on Demand Specifies whether the remote router s line associated with the outgoing phone number is in a demand pool bandwidth pool or both The router then uses only the outgoing phone numbers whose values for this parameter match the pool type of the destination connection This parameter is for applications that use bandwidth on demand to aid congested demand circuits By configuring the Remote Pool Type parameter you prevent the local circuit from using a phone number associated the wrong type of remote pool If a demand circuit places a call to a bandwidth pool the remote router terminates the connection Enter the type of remote line pool associated with the outgoing phone number Use the following guidelines e Enter Dial on Demand if the line connected to the remote router is only in a demand pool e Enter Bandwidth on Demand if the line connected to the remote router is only in a bandwidth pool e Enter Dial and Bandwidth on Demand if the line connected to the remote router is in a demand pool and a bandwidth pool 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 11 A 96 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Connection Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone L
279. n device replacing standard analog phone lines Using signals on an ISDN line the router instructs the network to set up a call to a particular destination ISDN capability eliminates the need for dial devices such as modems because you no longer need to convert digital signals to analog An ISDN network also allows you to send data voice and video over the same digital line e Raise DTR A signaling method that enables access to the network by preprogramming the destination phone numbers into the dial device modem or ISDN terminal adapter Raise DTR signaling works with the following interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 e V 25bis A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device modem or ISDN terminal adapter This method lets the dial device support connections to multiple destinations V 25bis signaling works with the following interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 e Hayes A signaling method that enables network access by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device modem or ISDN terminal adapter Using Hayes signaling the router sends an AT initialization command to interact with the dial device The ARN internal V 34 modem uses Hayes signaling Hayes signaling works with RS 232 interfaces The method you choose depends on your application network resources and the type of network to which you are conne
280. n protocol WCP over any PPP demand circuit Enabling compression improves bandwidth efficiency by eliminating redundant strings in data streams This in turn improves network response times and yields line cost savings To implement data compression you must open the appropriate demand circuits window Once a demand circuit exists you will see a Protocols button in the window s top left corner WCP is one of the protocols you can choose Note that WCP does not work with any other router s compression protocol Refer to Chapter 9 for more specific instructions on how to configure protocols To learn more about data compression see Configuring Data Compression Services 117353 A Rev A 5 19 Configuring Dial Services PPP Multilink Multilink is a feature of PPP that you can enable for individual PPP links Links are logical communication channels between two routers A typical link includes one ISDN B channel one dial up modem connection and a leased T1 line Multilink is important for demand circuits that use bandwidth on demand service because it enables you to e Group lines of different speeds e Distribute traffic more evenly among the lines e Restore packet sequence e Monitor traffic volume for bandwidth on demand service These features enable the router to add bandwidth to relieve a congested demand circuit When you enable multilink you can combine a set of lines between two routers into a single bundle E
281. nce the congestion has cleared If you set the Congestion Control parameter to Inherit the PVC uses DLCMI for congestion control not the value of this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 27 117353 A Rev A A 75 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Congestion Counter Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List 20 notifications 1 to 500 notifications Sets the maximum number of congestion notifications that the router can receive during the Congestion Timer period before it stops transmitting Specify the congestion count The smaller the number the more quickly the router detects congestion and stops transmitting Note however that if you set the Congestion Control parameter to Inherit the PVC uses DLCMI for congestion control not the value of this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 28 Compression Control
282. ndow Frame Relay The windows are the same but the titles are different Figure 9 9 Tajn tart Time Erai Tits neii tag Tihei ini labiiity Hope Figure 9 9 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window 5 Click on Add 117353 A Rev A 9 13 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager displays the Circuit Time of Day Schedule window Figure 9 10 This window is the same for PPP and Frame Relay circuits Cancel OK Values Help Days WEEKDAY Start Time e Figure 9 10 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window 6 Accept the parameter defaults or specify a new schedule according to the parameter descriptions in Appendix A 7 Click on OK You return to the completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule window Figure 9 11 or the Pool Availability window which shows a schedule entry 9 14 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits WEEKDAY 0000 2400 Lone Add Apply Delete Values Help Cd Pj Days Start Time End Time 2400 Inactivity Timeout DISABLE Availability Mode AVAILABLE Figure 9 11 Completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window 8 You can revise the schedule by changing the parameters values and clicking on Apply Refer to Appendix A for parameter descriptions Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 9 15 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Demand Circuit Groups To simplify configuration of unnumbered interfaces in a large network you can configure a deman
283. ne 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool that the primary circuit uses If you selected primary shared or primary secondary as the interface type enter an existing backup pool for the primary circuit If you selected Normal as the interface type do not enter a pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 A 60 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Frame Relay Primary Interface Definition Parameters Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition None 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool for the primary circuit Enter the ID number of the backup pool this circuit should use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 Primary Down Time Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition and Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits 5 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Specifies the amount of time the router waits after it boots before activating a backup connection This timer ensures that the primary connection is not operating before the router activates a backup connection Enter the amount of time the router should wait before activating a backup connection 1 3 6
284. nels for MCE1 ports Ervaida iT ied a Lina Tipa Lins Cont lrg niggal eres timi Stu Alma Threshold aecoonta Clear Alma Threshold seconds Fi Conf liurakilen hme PIN ii fibrann Paia crepi Lioph czh Repent Lacpihack Ca ijma Figure 1 10 MCT1 Port Parameters Window 5 Click on OK to accept the default values for the port parameters Note In most cases you can use the defaults for MCT1 and MCE1 parameters If you want to modify these values refer to Configuring WAN Line Services Site Manager displays the PRI Logical Lines window Figure 1 11 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services AT Size itatea Figure 1 11 PRI Logical Lines Window For the first PRI interface you configure the Timeslots window Figure 1 12 appears immediately after the PRI Logical Lines window Figure 1 12 shows the MCT1 Timeslots window The MCE1 Timeslots window is similar but has 31 timeslots 1 14 117353 A Rev A Getting Started a it Timma liri L gical Lins T beer Lert L pinal iira Dist it e P Linii nm iiia Uimed mi me lvasned Lk cor UY Oru Lr easel ined i Tne Urisseel Unused a O imed 4 liimer E i a Teaclerct All MET Figure 1 12 MCT1 Timeslots Window Each PRI port supports up to 23 logical B channels for MCT1 ports or 30 logical B channels for MCE ports 6 Click on Select All to change all timeslots to B channels
285. ners Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Bay Networks Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Bay Networks Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product are Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the Univers
286. nfiguration windows as examples For dial backup or bandwidth on demand the window may have a different title but the procedure is the same Remember these guidelines about line pools e When adding lines to a pool configure all lines in the pool to use the same authentication protocol You cannot have a pool with one line using CHAP and another using PAP e Both individual circuits and demand circuit groups can use demand pools e If you plan to configure RADIUS for any dial service all lines in a line pool must use RADIUS Adding Line Pools You should have already created line pools in Chapter 1 To create additional line pools refer to Chapter 1 117353 A Rev A 8 1 Configuring Dial Services Changing Pool IDs Before you can change a pool ID you must first delete all circuits associated with that pool Site Manager will not let you modify a pool ID otherwise Refer to the appropriate circuit customizing chapter to learn how to delete circuits To change a pool ID 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Backup or Bandwidth On Demand Pools Site Manager displays the Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window Figure 8 1 Demand Peal ID i ry Desert Pool ID Figure 8 1 Demand Pools Window 3 Select a pool entry at the top of the window 4 Click in the Pool ID field Site Manager Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID parameter page A 4
287. nfiguration to suit your needs How to Use This Manual Understanding how this manual is organized should make it more useful to you The manual is organized as follows e Getting Started which explains how to set up a basic configuration using all of the defaults Begin by reading this chapter This gives you a general idea of the configuration tasks you will perform however it does not describe many features that you may want to implement for your network e Overviews and features of each dial service This information is included in Chapters 2 through 7 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Instructions for modifying the default configuration in Chapter 1 These instructions are in Chapters 8 through 13 Most of the instructions assume that you have read Chapter 1 and explain how to modify the configuration In the procedures any step that instructs you to set a parameter value is followed by a box that includes the Site Manager parameter and the location of the parameter description in Appendix A To read more about the parameter before specifying a value refer to the specified page Appendixes that include parameter descriptions configuration examples parameter default tables ISDN ordering information and a list of AT modem initialization commands The names of the dial services are sometimes abbreviated in this manual Table 1 1 lists the full and abbreviated names of each dial service Ta
288. nformation in the call setup packet For outgoing calls the router sets the rate to either 64 Kb s or 56 Kb s depending on how you configure the rate adaption parameters 4 16 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services To determine which rate to select ask your service provider for information about the network and connecting to the destination device For information about configuring rate adaption refer to Chapter 8 and Chapter 12 The following two examples describe how rate adaption works Example 1 Between two end nodes there are seven switches One switch uses a 56 Kb s trunk line Figure 4 7 To accommodate this switch the router sends data at 56 Kb s over the 64 Kb s line that connects the switch to the network The router drops one of the eight bits of data from each byte and sends only seven bits of data at a time 64 Kb s Router Router DS0015A Figure 4 7 Rate Adaption for a Network with a 56 Kb s Trunk Line Example 2 For a connection between an ISDN and switched 56 Kb s network Figure 4 8 the router adapts the data rate for the outgoing call to 56 Kb s to match that of the destination device which can handle data only at 56 Kb s To do this you set the adaption rate for the outgoing phone number to 56 Kb s
289. ng A 12 Modem Factory Defaults A 13 Modem Init String A 9 Modem Type A 8 No of Rings to Answer A 11 Originate Answer A 13 Phone Number A 13 Redial Count A 7 Retry Delay A 7 Ring Indicator A 7 Set Pulse Tone Dial Default A 14 Speaker Control A 10 Speaker Volume A 10 selecting modems 4 7 Modem Factory Defaults parameter A 13 Modem Init String parameter A 9 Modem Type parameter A 8 Monitored Events parameter A 68 Multicast parameter A 68 A 73 multilink fragmentation 7 3 Multilink Fragmentation parameter A 85 multilink See Point to Point Protocol PPP multirate description 4 15 N network terminator NT1 description 3 5 network terminator NT2 description 3 5 Index 7 No of Rings to Answer parameter A 11 O one way authentication 4 2 Originate Answer parameter A 13 OSPF Enable parameter A 55 outbound traffic filtering 5 19 outgoing phone lists creating 1 36 12 3 modifying 12 7 12 11 parameters Adaption Rate A 95 Aggregate Bandwidth A 98 Channel Bandwidth Type A 98 Connection Type A 97 ISDN Numbering Plan A 94 ISDN Numbering Type A 90 A 91 A 92 A 94 Outgoing Phone Prefix A 99 Phone Number Type A 93 Remote Pool Type A 96 Outgoing Phone Number Type parameter A 93 Outgoing Phone Prefix parameter A 99 P PAP IDs used by PPP 4 4 See also caller resolution table PAP Local ID parameter A 39 PAP Password parameter A 40 A 53 A 103 PAP See Password A
290. ng Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Frame Relay Demand Service List window refer to Figure 9 5 6 Select Protocols gt Add Delete in the top left corner of the window Site Manager displays the Select Protocols window Figure 9 8 i Figure 9 8 Select Protocols Window 7 Select one or more protocols for this demand circuit then click on OK For each protocol you select Site Manager displays windows that prompt you for required information Consult the appropriate protocol manual 8 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 9 9 Configuring Dial Services Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Demand Circuits After you configure a PPP or Frame Relay demand circuit Site Manager adds several buttons Apply Schedule Phone Out and Delete to each demand circuit window You use these buttons to edit the parameter defaults To edit the demand circuit parameters 1 2 6 7 Begin at the Configuration Manager window Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window refer to Figure 9 1 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits Site Manager displays the appropriate demand circuit window refer to Figure 9 3 as an example Select a circuit you want to modify Enter new values for the parameters according to Table 9 1 and the parameter descriptions in Appendix A Click on Apply to save the changes Click on Done Table 9 1 lists ways to customize PPP and Fram
291. ng protocols 1 23 9 8 Frame Relay description 2 7 implementation notes 5 1 introduction 2 1 overview 2 4 parameters Auto Demand Term Reset A 29 Auto Demand Termination A 29 Availability Mode A 49 Cable Type A 6 CHAP Local Name A 37 CHAP Secret A 38 Circuit Name A 30 Connection Mode A 28 Days A 45 Demand Pool ID A 4 A 26 Dial Optimized Routing A 30 117353 A Rev A Directory Number A 87 Ext SubAddr A 87 Force Dial A 26 Force Take Down A 26 Global Adaption Rate A 19 Inactivity Mode A 44 Inactivity Time A 27 Inactivity Timeout A 48 Incoming Filter A 18 Line Media Type A 5 Max UpTime Termination A 42 Maximum Up Time A 42 Minimum Call Duration A 43 Modem Command String A 9 PAP Local ID A 39 PAP Password A 40 Pool Channel Count A 20 Pool Channel Priority A 21 Port Application Mode A 15 port application mode A 16 Priority A 6 Retry Delay A 28 Retry Max A 27 Routing Update Hold Time A 31 Sending Complete IE A 18 SPID A 88 Start Time A 46 Switch Type A 16 TimeOfDay Failback Mode A 49 UpTime Term Reset A 43 WAN Serial Interface Type A 4 pools configuring 1 5 DLCI Number parameter A 72 E End Time parameter A 47 Error Threshold parameter A 67 exchange terminator ET description 3 5 Expert Config parameter A 12 Ext SubAddr parameter A 87 117353 A Rev A F filters for Frame Relay 10 12 floating B option 4 12 Force Dial
292. nician Interface you cannot do this using Site Manager The attribute entry is wfSwservOptsEntry wfS wservOptsOverSubRetryTimer The default value is two minutes the maximum value is 1440 minutes Refer to Configuring IP Services for information about RIP and Configuring IPX Services for information about RIP SAP IP RIP Triggered Updates and Broadcast Timers To prevent broadcast messages from keeping the demand circuit active you can configure the RIP broadcast timer and triggered updates The broadcast timer lets you configure how often the router sends routing updates to the network Unlike the broadcast timer triggered updates are sent immediately after the router detects a routing change in the network If you set the broadcast timer to a high value for example several hours and you enable triggered updates you limit the frequency of broadcast traffic while maintaining the accuracy of the routing tables By limiting broadcast traffic you prevent the demand circuit from remaining active unnecessarily For more information about these RIP features refer to Configuring IP Services IPX RIP and SAP Broadcast Timers To prevent broadcast messages from keeping the demand circuit active you can configure RIP and SAP broadcast timers for IPX transmission RIP and SAP broadcast timers enable you to control how often update transmissions occur You can even eliminate RIP and SAP broadcasts entirely By controlling broadcast traffic
293. nnection When Router A no longer needs the extra bandwidth it must ask Router B to deactivate the line Both routers must agree to deactivate the line to prevent one router from keeping the line active while the other tries to deactivate it BAP Negotiation with Other Vendors Routers If your Bay Networks router communicates with another vendor s router both routers may be monitoring congestion regardless of who initiated the call Bandwidth allocation algorithms or congestion thresholds may not always be the same on both sides of the line Therefore both routers must agree to activate or deactivate the line to prevent one side from keeping the line active while the other tries to deactivate it Configuring BAP To use BAP you must configure bandwidth on demand service for single leased lines leased multilink bundles or dial on demand circuits Once you have set up bandwidth on demand service you can configure BAP For configuration instructions refer to Chapter 11 You also need to set up a local phone list if your router is responsible for passing phone numbers to its peer router to activate additional lines To set up a local phone list refer to Chapter 12 If you do not configure BAP for your bandwidth connections the monitor router adds bandwidth without negotiating with the non monitor router 7 6 117353 A Rev A Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes Protocol Prioritization When you configure a router y
294. nnection to the regional router fails and if so invoke the dial backup connection e The circuits on Router 5 the recovery router are configured as a demand circuit group consisting of three circuits Router 5 uses an existing demand pool for the demand circuit group These circuits accept calls from the remote routers configured for dial backup The Connection Mode parameter for the circuits in the demand circuit group is set to No Dial because the recovery router does not initiate connections The remote router must establish the connection first e Router 5 s caller resolution table contains entries for Routers 2 3 and 4 Each entry specifies the same demand circuit group In the example if one of the branch offices detects a failure of the regional router s primary line it attempts to activate a dial backup connection by placing a call to the recovery router The number of branch offices that successfully connect to the recovery router depends on the number of circuits in the demand circuit group Once the connection is made data can continue across the network Note Demand circuit groups only work with PPP You cannot use them in a network where the dial backup circuits are using Frame Relay 6 6 117353 A Rev A Chapter 7 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes This chapter describes Bay Networks implementation of bandwidth on demand service Bandwidth on Demand Terminology Table 7 1 lists the term
295. nterface Select Enable to enable IPX for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 9 IPX Routing Protocol Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups RIP SAP RIP SAP Specifies an IPX routing protocol for the IPX interface Select an IPX routing protocol for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 12 117353 A Rev A A 55 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID IPXWAN Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables IPXWAN for this interface Select Enable to enable IPXWAN for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 13 Bridge Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables bridging for this interface Select Enable to enable bridging for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 10 A 56 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters PPP Circuit Options Parameters Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Circuit Type Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Normal Primary Normal Specif
296. obal Adaption Rate A 19 Incoming Filter A 18 Line Media Type A 5 Maximum Links A 83 Modem Command String A 9 Multilink Fragmentation A 85 PAP Local ID A 39 PAP Password A 40 Pool Channel Count A 20 Pool Channel Priority A 21 Port Application Mode A 15 PPP Circuit Mode A 80 Preferred Bandwidth Slot A 82 Priority A 6 Reserved Bandwidth Slot A 83 Sending Complete IE A 18 SPID A 88 Switch Type A 16 WAN Serial Interface Type A 4 pools configuring 1 5 PPP multilink 7 2 testing the circuit 7 8 bandwidth on demand circuits activating lines 2 24 configuring 1 28 defining role of the router 7 7 monitoring congestion on the line 11 4 Bandwidth on demand Pool ID parameter A 4 BAP See Bandwidth Allocation Protocol basic rate interface BRI configuring lines 1 11 implementation on router 4 11 leased line operation 8 24 leased line operation 4 12 overview 3 2 rate adaption 4 16 router as a TE device 4 10 signaling support for countries 4 11 subaddresses 4 12 Bay Networks Press xxviii Index 2 bearer channel See B channel BOD Exam Period parameter A 81 BOD Full Threshold parameter A 81 BOD Periods to Fail parameter A 82 BOD Periods to Recover parameter A 84 BOD Pool ID parameter A 77 A 79 BOD Recovery Threshold parameter A 84 Breath of Life BofL messages 2 16 BRI B Channel Loopback parameter A 23 BRI Line Type parameter A 24 BRI subaddresses 4 12 BRI T3 Timer parameter A
297. ocal Phone Lines Window 3 Click on Local Phones Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window Figure 12 9 12 12 117353 A Rev A Customizing Phone Lists a Mumbo i Fu hy lir Pta Direnni Humar Bet Sathfedede ul TaD Phamkeer ig Type MDH Pear tie Filan Figure 12 9 ISDN Local Phone Numbers Window The SPID parameter appears only for switches in the United States and Canada 4 Click on Add Site Manager displays the Phone Number window Figure 12 10 Directoy Humer fected pid Figure 12 10 Phone Number Window 117353 A Rev A 12 13 Configuring Dial Services 5 Enter your local phone number and an extension if any Site Manager Directory Number parameter page A 87 Site Manager Ext SubAddr parameter page A 87 6 If you need to configure the SPID parameter enter the ID assigned by the service provider otherwise go to step 7 Site Manager SPID parameter page A 88 7 Click on OK You return to the completed ISDN Local Phone Numbers window 8 Click on Done 12 14 117353 A Rev A Chapter 13 Customizing Caller Resolution For security purposes all three dial services use a PPP identification mechanism to determine who is calling the router PPP performs this identification process using one of two authentication protocols CHAP or PAP CHAP is the default authentication protocol To configure PAP you m
298. ocoll ai sasi abies aeaa aie Allee lian AEE E EE 4 1 PPP Authentication ii ines daca ied idee eeu a eee eed 4 1 Types Of AUtNENtiCatiON oe eee iina eean aa ee eee eae eee eee ea E a AY 4 2 Two Way Authentication cececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeaeeees 4 2 One Way Authentication seccccscecvtecgeeuinecesseceghethyegeteareeiarhecaeebedeees te aa ienna eai 4 3 Configuring the Type of Authentication cccccececeteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeesneeesenes 4 4 Using CHAP Names and PAP IDs for Authentication 0 c cccceceseeeeeteeeeseeeeees 4 4 Asynchronous PPP moraru a pistenivsite e E A O E E 4 6 Configuring Modems for Asynchronous PPP Interfaces cccceeseeeseeeeeeeneeeeees 4 7 RADIUS Accounting Servies rre ieas astaan aea aa a et aaa na eaae aaant 4 8 PF Adacent HOSS zrenia oraa e eke eset AA ASTO AE A ANE AE A 4 9 ISDN Services niiina eed aa aaa a a adele a A ts 4 10 BRI Service on the AN ANH ASN and ARN u ccccssseseseseeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 11 B Channel Support siina ai aaa i a aa e aiaa 4 11 D Channel Support minnena a a daaa aaa iaaa a ene 4 11 BRI Leased Line Operation for Germany and Japan ceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 4 12 BRI Subaddresses 0 ccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeceaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeseeeeesaeesseaeeeeaas 4 12 Floating B Option for the AN and ANH cccccccccseeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaaeeeeaees 4 12 PRI Service on t
299. odifying Entries in the Caller Resolution Table c ccccsceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeneeeeeneeeeeaees 13 6 Appendix A Dial Service Parameters POOI ID Parameter riean esne E EE EEEE E E A ENEA A 4 WAN Serial Interface Type Parameter ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeesaeeseeeeeetaeeesenees A 4 Sync and Async Line Media Type Parameters cccceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeesetaeeeeeneeees A 5 External Modem Parameters cccceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeneaeess A 7 V 34 Modem Parameters ccccceeccceceeeeeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeaeeeeecenenenseeeeeenenes A 12 BRI Port Application Mode Parameter eeecccceeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeneeaaes A 15 PRI Port Application Mode Parameter ecceeccceeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeneeaaes A 16 ISDN Switch Parameters ccccccccceeceescececeeeeeaee ences eeeaaaeseeeeeeeaaeseeneeeseaaeeteeeeeees A 16 Pool Channel Count and Priority Parameters cccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees A 20 BRI Configuration Parameters cc cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaaeeseeeeesenaeeseneees A 22 Demand Circuit Parameters PPP and Frame Relay cccceeseseeeseteeeeeneeees A 26 Standby Circuit Parameters PPP Demand Circuits only 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 32 Callback Parameters PPP Demand Circuits only 0 c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 34 Authentication Protocol Par
300. ol D Fanos lake irin Foroa Mal Imootivity Tle L Fine Entry Debay Figure 1 17 PPP Demand Circuits Window 4 Click on Add to add a demand circuit You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window which shows the new circuit and the defaults for each parameter Figure 1 18 Site Manager also adds the following buttons Apply Schedule Phone Out BW on Demand and Delete 1 20 117353 A Rev A Getting Started HH or Lem Vali H lp Dani Pool Ti Forie Take iman Foroa Mial Imoctiyiiy TIt Fanny Hna Butry Dalay Figure 1 18 Completed PPP Demand Circuits Window 5 Repeat step 4 for each demand circuit you want to add 6 Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the next section Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information 117353 A Rev A 1 21 Configuring Dial Services Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information For network security the router must identify itself in the call setup message that it sends to the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol To specify the CHAP information that the router uses when it calls a remote site 1 2 Scroll down the PPP Demand Circuits window to the CHAP parameters Enter values for the CHAP Local Name and CHAP Secret parameters Each CHAP Local Name must be unique bu
301. om the standby circuit back to the recovered primary circuit You do not have this option with dial backup circuits In dial backup configurations the router terminates the backup circuit when the primary circuit recovers For example to ensure the stability of a recovered primary circuit before bringing down the standby circuit you can delay the return of data to the primary circuit Standby circuits support PPP multilink You can assign a bandwidth on demand pool to the hot standby circuit to relieve congestion Bandwidth on demand connections use PPP multilink which lets the router use multiple dial up lines simultaneously to transmit data You do not have this option with dial backup circuits If you associate a bandwidth on demand pool with a hot standby circuit the router monitors the hot standby circuit for congestion If the circuit becomes congested the router activates lines from the bandwidth on demand pool until congestion is relieved For maximum flexibility and control when setting up alternative connections and for quick responses to failed primary circuits standby circuits are the best choice However for more straightforward applications where you do not need to configure an alternative site for the backup connection dial backup circuits are more suitable Either option ensures that critical data reaches its destination 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes How Standby Circuits Work There ar
302. oming Phone Numbers Site Manager displays the Incoming Phone List window Figure 12 5 penning Pheer Mme incoming Phone Et tude Callback Mam Circuli Hawa Figure 12 5 Incoming Phone List Window 3 Click on Add to add a phone number Site Manager displays the Phone Number window Figure 12 6 117353 A Rev A 12 9 Configuring Dial Services Incoming Phone Number Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr Figure 12 6 Phone Number Window 4 Enter a phone number and extension if applicable Site Manager Incoming Phone Number parameter page A 100 Site Manager Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr parameter page A 100 If this is a demand circuit for which you enabled the callback feature the Phone Number window displays a third parameter Callback Demand Circuit Name 5 If you enabled the callback feature and the callback mode is Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID enter a value for the Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter Site Manager Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter page A 101 6 Click on OK when the phone entry is complete 7 Repeat this procedure for each phone number that you want to add to the list Be sure to enter the phone number of each remote node from which the router should accept calls You return to the completed Incoming Phone List window Figure 12 7 12 10 117353 A Rev A Customizing Phone Lists a a a
303. ommands in the user specified string take precedence over the factory default command string Enable or disable the exclusive use of the factory default modem initialization string 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 8 Originate Answer Configuration Manager gt COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Originate Originate Answer Determines whether the modem answers or originates calls Set the modem to answer or originate calls Not applicable Phone Number COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters None An ASCII text string Specifies the number to dial for calls that the modem originates Enter a complete dial out phone number including applicable country and area codes Valid dial modifiers are the comma exclamation point ampersand amp hyphen and parenthesis 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 18 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Speaker Volume COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Medium Low Medium High Sets the volume of the modem speaker or disables the speaker Turn the modem speaker off or set the volume to Low Medium or High Not applicable Speaker Control
304. onfiguration refer to Chapter 9 The Schedule option also allows you to configure whether the router uses the Inactivity Time parameter to dynamically deactivate the connection e The inactivity time expires To deactivate the connection you can configure the Inactivity Time parameter which dynamically terminates the connection after a specified amount of time elapses without data activity If there is data going across the line the inactivity time resets and the connection remains active To ensure that a connection is not up longer than necessary you can configure traffic filters that allow specific types of data to go across a line without resetting the inactivity time For PPP connections the router does not consider Link Quality Report LQR Link Control Protocol LCP and periodic CHAP messages as data so these messages do not reset the inactivity timer For Frame Relay circuits DLCMI messages and other signaling packets are not treated as data so they do not reset the inactivity timer The router usually terminates Frame Relay demand connections not the Frame Relay network e The Frame Relay DLCMI fails If the DLCMI messages cannot be exchanged across the Frame Relay demand circuit the router deactivates the circuit 2 10 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Overview Bandwidth on Demand Service for Congested Demand Lines To relieve congestion across a demand line you can use up to 29 additional lines from
305. onfiguration of Router 2 To configure Router 2 1 2 3 Configure a leased synchronous interface named S12 Select PPP as the WAN protocol Select IP RIP as the LAN protocol and configure the interface as follows e JP Address 140 1 1 2 e Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 e IP Adjacent Host Address 140 1 1 1 From the Configuration Manager window click on an ISDN1 connector Follow the path to the configuration windows and set the parameters according to Tables B 25 through B 32 Note These tables list only the parameter defaults you must change Port Application Mode Configuration First configure the port application mode Path ISDN1 connector gt Port Application Table B 25 Port Application Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S131 S12 Port Application Mode Default Default Dialup 2B D Dialup 2B D 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Backup Pool Configuration Configure the backup pool Path Dialup gt Backup Pools Table B 26 Backup Pools Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 8131 S12 Pool ID 1 1 After entering a backup pool ID the Backup Lines Definition window appears Click on the ISDN1 connector Site Manager automatically displays the ISDN Switch Configuration window Path Backup Lines Definition gt ISDN Switch Configuration Table B 27 ISDN Switch Configuration Parameter Parameter Router 1 Rout
306. ons MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Availability Mode Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Available Available Not Available Determines whether the router activates the circuit between the configured time interval specified with the Days Start Time and End Time parameters Accept the default Available to allow the router to establish the circuit between the time interval you specified in the Days Start Time and End Time parameters Select Not Available to prevent the router from establishing the circuit during this time interval For demand circuits only you must set the Inactivity Timeout parameter to Enable for this parameter to have any affect The Inactivity Timeout parameter is not applicable for backup circuits 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 8 TimeOfDay Failback Mode Demand Circuits only Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of D
307. or Congested Demand Lines on page 2 11 for information about adding bandwidth for demand lines When data traffic exceeds the capacity of a line or bundle bandwidth on demand service reduces congestion by adding up to 29 dial up lines The router can then provide a total of 30 lines for communication PPP multilink is the protocol that enables the router to use multiple dial up lines simultaneously to transmit data The actual number of lines in a multilink bundle depends on hardware platform constraints total speed of the bundle the speed of each link and the type of traffic you are sending You can manage the allocation of bandwidth for a multilink bundle using the PPP BAP This protocol is available only for ISDN lines you configure it after you configure bandwidth on demand service For more information about BAP refer to Chapter 7 Enabling Bandwidth on Demand Service The leased line demand line or leased multilink bundle is the physical connection over which the leased or demand circuit the logical connection carries traffic The procedure for enabling bandwidth on demand service differs for leased circuits and demand circuits For a leased circuit you designate the circuit as a bandwidth on demand circuit This instructs the router to provide secondary dial up lines if the leased circuit becomes congested 117353 A Rev A 2 21 Configuring Dial Services For a demand circuit the PPP Demand Circuits
308. or backup pool PPP is not configured automatically you must select it PPP routes or bridges datagrams over point to point lines Synchronous asynchronous and ISDN interfaces all use PPP PPP Authentication Dial circuits use a PPP identification mechanism to identify the calling router to the called router The identification mechanism relies on one of two PPP authentication protocols Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP or Password Authentication Protocol PAP These authentication protocols implement a security feature that identifies peer routers to one another CHAP is the default authentication protocol To select PAP you must open the PPP Interface List window select the line record for dial services and specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter For more information about CHAP and PAP see Configuring PPP Services The identification process takes place during PPP link negotiation which occurs before the routers establish a connection to send protocol data Enabling the called router to dynamically identify the calling router lets a single dial interface ISDN or modem at a remote router serve as the connection point to multiple routers 117353 A Rev A 4 1 Configuring Dial Services When you configure a PPP connection Site Manager automatically creates a generic PPP line record that all pools use for identification To implement authentication you must set up the router s caller re
309. or each remote router in the network One demand circuit group supports many remote routers thereby reducing the configuration tasks for a large network Refer to Chapter 5 for a detailed description of demand circuit groups Sample Network Using Demand Circuit Groups Figure 6 2 shows a sample network using demand circuit groups Router 1 is a regional router that supports hundreds of remote routers Router 5 serves as a recovery router for several branch offices if Router 1 fails 6 4 117353 A Rev A Dial Backup Implementation Notes Branch offices Regional router CHAP Name R1 Disaster recovery router Configured with an unnumbered demand circuit group CHAP Name R4 Remotes configured with dial backup Key Primary circuits Backup circuits DS0002A Figure 6 2 Dialing an Alternative Router Using Demand Circuit Groups This type of network is ideal for a demand circuit group because it supports many nodes If you were to configure each circuit individually the task of backing up each remote router would be difficult By using demand circuit groups however you need only one configuration on the disaster recovery router to support many remote sites 117353 A Rev A 6 5 Configuring Dial Services The configuration for this type of network is as follows e The branch offices are configured for dial backup and are connected directly to the regional router They determine if the co
310. ornia 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN BAY NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST BAY NETWORKS UNLESS BAY NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT 117353 A Rev A Contents About This Guide Before YOu SLE e1 sccncusie A teat ete Sa T xxvi GOMVEMMIONS ssn a a a a a hecaau tender aes xxvi ACONY INS EA EE E ed bap eben E E EE A ead E E TEE xxvii Ordering Bay Networks Publications c cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeeeeeaeeees xxviii Bay Networks Customer Service ccccceeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeceaaeeseeeeeseaeeeseeaeseceeeeesaeeneneees Xxix How to Get Help ac Ateacin ean tee a ee a ie ee atlas Xxix Chapier 1 Getting Started Flow to Use This Manual seeni urrena rRe EE EA bags deeentedeeiy RENEE 1 1 Before YoU BEI irre Sentra aE A AEA NE EAA A AE AE 1 2 Setting Up a Dial Service oo eeeecccceccceeeneeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeaaeesseneeesaeesseneees 1 3 Configuring Line Pools deian acs Alen ee AM Ae 1 5 Creating Line Pools with Modem Lines
311. ou can prioritize the different types of traffic sent across a line This process is called protocol prioritization When you configure leased bandwidth circuits the router automatically enables protocol prioritization PPP multilink automatically enables protocol prioritization but only for interrupt queuing You cannot specify filters or priorities Multilink assigns the highest that is interrupt level priority to link control packets giving PPP control messages priority over other types of data while preserving the packet sequencing For more information about protocol prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Defining the Role of the Router in the Network Leased bandwidth circuits are point to point connections For each circuit you must designate a router at one end of the connection as the congestion monitor The congestion monitor checks the congestion of the lines in a multilink bundle If this router discovers congestion it activates secondary lines The router at the other end of the connection the non monitor router does not have the authority to activate a secondary line Do not set the Bandwidth Mode parameter to the same value for both routers This will prevent the routers from activating a second line simultaneously You define the role of the router using the Bandwidth Mode parameter which is part of the bandwidth circuit configuration refer to Chapter 8 Balancing Traffic betwe
312. ou return to the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window which shows the new phone entry 7 Repeat the procedure for each phone number you want to add 8 Click on Done until you return to the Configuration Manager window 9 Go to the next section Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table For network security all three dial services use a PPP identification mechanism to determine who is calling the router PPP performs this identification process using one of two authentication protocols CHAP or PAP CHAP is the default protocol To identify an incoming remote caller you enter the name and CHAP secret of each remote caller in a caller resolution table and associate each name with a local demand primary or bandwidth circuit When a router receives an incoming call it checks the caller resolution table for an entry that identifies the caller If the caller is authorized the local router activates a circuit To configure the caller resolution table 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Select Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Table window Figure 1 33 1 40 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Lomi Circuit CHAP Secret PT Pancar Local troup Figure 1 33 Caller Resolution Table Window 3 Click on Add to add an entry to the table Site Manager displays the Caller Name and Secret Passwo
313. ovider assigns this number You must configure local phone numbers if you use the Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP with bandwidth service across ISDN connections The router designated as the non monitor uses the local phone number to identify additional lines to the peer To create a local phone list 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window refer to Figure 1 1 2 Select Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Lines window Figure 1 30 ISIN Local Phone Lines Slot 4 Module 3 ISDN1 Slot 4 Module 2 ISDN1 Done Local Phones Figure 1 30 ISDN Local Phone Lines Window 3 Click on Local Phones Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window Figure 1 31 1 38 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Direnni Humar Est Shade Tipid 1508 Pumbering Type MDH Hisberiig Pian Figure 1 31 ISDN Local Phone Numbers Window The SPID parameter appears only for switches used in the United States and Canada 4 Click on Add Site Manager displays the Phone Number window Figure 1 32 Directoy Humer fected pid Figure 1 32 Phone Number Window 117353 A Rev A 1 39 Configuring Dial Services 5 Enter a local phone number and a subaddress if any Site Manager Directory Number parameter page A 87 Site Manager Ext SubAddr parameter page A 87 6 Click on OK to accept the defaults for the other parameters Y
314. parameter A 26 Force Take Down parameter A 26 FR Service Control parameter A 62 Fragmentation Trigger Size parameter A 85 fragmentation See multilink fragmentation Frame Relay dial backup service 2 15 configuring 2 19 10 5 filters configuring 10 12 service records configuring 10 9 dial on demand service configuring 2 8 9 1 description 2 7 Frame Relay parameters Address A 64 Address Length A 65 Circuit State Set A 73 Compression Control A 76 Congestion Control A 69 Congestion Control PVC configuration A 74 Congestion Counter A 70 Congestion Counter PVC configuration A 76 Congestion Timer A 69 Congestion Timer PVC configuration A 75 DLCI Number A 72 Error Threshold A 67 FR Service Control A 62 Full Enquiry Interval A 66 Hangup on DLCMI Failure A 70 Hybrid Mode A 74 Mgmnt Type A 63 Monitored Events A 68 Multicast A 68 Multicast PVC configuration A 73 Polling Interval A 65 Primary Down Time A 61 Index 5 Service Name A 71 Full Enquiry Interval parameter A 66 G Global Adaption Rate parameter A 19 Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter A 19 Global X 25 over ISDN D channel parameter A 19 H Hangup on DLCMI Failure parameter A 70 Hayes signaling for modems 2 3 Hybrid Mode parameter A 74 implementation notes all dial services 4 1 to 4 10 bandwidth on demand 7 1 to 7 8 dial backup 6 1 to 6 6 dial on demand 5 1 ISDN 4 10 to 4 20 Inactivity Mode parame
315. ppropriate protocol manual Dial Optimized Routing Dial optimized routing lets you exchange IP RIP and IPX RIP SAP routing updates only when a connection is active By limiting when the router sends updates dial optimized routing reduces the number of connections as well as line costs For each dial on demand circuit you have the choice of enabling dial optimized routing If you enable dial optimized routing the router establishes a demand connection only for outbound data packets or if it receives a request from the protocol The presence of IP RIP and IPX RIP SAP packets alone will not trigger a dial connection If you disable dial optimized routing any packet can initiate demand connections To configure dial optimized routing refer to Chapter 9 117353 A Rev A 5 15 Configuring Dial Services Version 11 0 supports dial optimized routing only for IP and IPX For all other protocols the router activates a demand connection for any type of routing packet regardless of whether you enable dial optimized routing To avoid this problem you can configure traffic filters that prevent specific types of packets from activating a connection Refer to Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for information about configuring filters What Happens When You Enable Dial Optimized Routing The router activates a demand connection when there is data to send The router then alerts IP and IPX that a connection is active an
316. ptions Function Instructions MIB Object ID Cable Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync Line Media Type RS232 NULL RS232 RS422 V35 X21 Indicates the physical interface type supported by the attached dial device This parameter is for synchronous interfaces only Select the option that corresponds to the interface type supported by the attached dial device 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 83 Priority Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync or Async Line Media Type 1 1 to 50 Prioritizes a group of lines in the same pool For example the router uses a line of priority 1 before it uses a line of priority 2 For dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools lines can reside across slots but when you set this parameter it affects only lines on the same slot For example if the backup pool has two lines in slot 3 and three lines in slot 4 the router sets a priority between the lines in slot 3 then sets a priority between the lines in slot 4 For bandwidth on demand the router prioritizes lines in the preferred slot then the reserve
317. ptions window B 14 117353 A Rev A Path Circuit Options gt Primary Circuit Definition Configuration Examples Table B 20 Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S11 S331 Backup Mode Master Slave default CHAP Local Name BLN N A CHAP Secret West N A Outgoing Phone List Configuration From the Primary Circuit Definition window click on Phone Out to open the Outgoing Phone List window Path Outgoing Phone List gt Phone Number Table B 21 Outgoing Phone List Parameter Number Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S11 S331 Outgoing Phone 4362222 4368888 Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters 117353 A Rev A Configuring Dial Services Caller Resolution Table Configuration Router 1 the master router does not require a caller resolution table Router 1 initiates calls to Router 2 it does not receive them therefore Router 1 does not need to verify Router 2 s identity In contrast Router 1 must have a CHAP name and secret that it places in the call setup message to identify itself to Router 2 Router 2 the slave router does require a table entry Router 2 receives calls from Router 1 and must identify the incoming caller After configuring the primary and backup circuits you can configure the caller resolution table Path Dialup gt Caller Resolution Ta
318. r You assign a pool ID for each leased circuit or demand circuit If the line or bundle becomes congested the router activates a dial up line from the pool The dial up circuit that runs over this line inherits the configuration and protocol characteristics of the leased circuit You can assign the same bandwidth pool ID to more than one circuit If you want a pool of dial up lines dedicated to a specific bandwidth circuit assign the pool exclusively to that circuit Remember to first configure a leased or demand connection before configuring bandwidth on demand service Activating Dial up Lines to Relieve Congestion If one dial up line from the bandwidth pool does not relieve the congestion the router adds up to 29 lines until the congestion is relieved The router activates additional lines only for a congested line not for a failed line PPP multilink detects a state of congestion based on byte counts and the user defined monitor parameters Byte counts are measured prior to data compression The monitor parameters let you define congestion thresholds for the leased or demand circuit If data traffic exceeds a threshold the router tries to activate a dial up line At this point if you configure BAP it manages the addition and removal of lines from the multilink bundle based on the monitor parameters For more details about BAP refer to Chapter 7 Once the volume of traffic on the congested line falls below the congestion threshol
319. r a demand line Multilink lets you combine a set of lines between two routers into a single bundle which can consist of up to 30 links of different speeds The actual number of links in the bundle depends on the hardware platform total bundle speed the speed of each link in the bundle and the type of traffic Each bundle belongs to a separate circuit Multilink distributes traffic over each logical line in a bundle in an amount proportional to the bandwidth of the link The router sending the data divides the outbound traffic among all the lines in the bundle Once data reaches the destination router multilink reassembles and resequences packets arriving on different lines Figure 7 1 shows how multilink and bandwidth on demand work together In this figure one router is the congestion monitor This router monitors traffic volume over the bandwidth circuit If the monitor router detects congestion it activates an additional line in this case an ISDN B channel If the volume of traffic is still heavy the monitor router adds more channels until congestion is relieved 7 2 117353 A Rev A Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes New York City Boston Leased line 2 el 7 F z Non monitor router 2 Monitor router 7 7 7 Key Secondary circuits that are part of a multilink bundle DS0003A Figure 7 1 Multilink and Bandwidth on Demand Operation For more information about PPP multilink
320. r disables the Ring Indicator RI signal for Raise DTR signaling If the dial on demand line is configured to use Raise DTR and you have a Series 5 router running 7 60 software set this parameter to Disable Hardware versions earlier than 7 60 do not support RI Otherwise accept the default Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 28 117353 A Rev A A 7 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Debug Mode COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface Disable Enable Disable Allows you to print debug log messages concerning the V 25bis Raise DTR or Hayes connection setup Select Enable if you want to see the debug log messages If not accept the default Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 29 Modem Type COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface Custom List of supported modems Click on Values to see the list Lets you specify the modem you are using in your network Select one of the modems from the list If the modem you are using is not listed select Custom and be sure to enter a modem initialization string If you do not enter a string Site Manager prompts you to do so 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 21 A 8 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Inst
321. r the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Bay Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not sublicense assign or otherwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Bay Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Bay Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Bay Networks and properly installed and operated on Bay Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Bay Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Bay Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date Softw
322. r to Figure 9 1 Click on PPP Circuits Site Manager displays the PPP Demand Circuits window refer to Figure 1 17 Select Protocols gt Add Delete in the top left corner of the window Site Manager displays the Select Protocols window refer to Figure 9 8 Select one or more protocols for the demand circuit For each protocol you select Site Manager displays windows that prompt you for required information Consult the appropriate protocol manual Click on OK You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window Click on Done Note You cannot configure protocol prioritization for demand circuits running PPP multilink Protocol prioritization modifies the order in which packets are sent over the line which could change the multilink assigned order of packets and cause problems with the data 9 12 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits Scheduling When the Demand Circuit Is Available After you finalize the demand circuit s configuration you schedule when the circuit is available To do this 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window refer to Figure 9 1 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits Site Manager displays the appropriate demand circuit window refer to Figure 9 3 as an example 4 Click on Schedule Site Manager displays the Circuit Time of Day Schedule window PPP or the Pool Availability wi
323. ration PTP PTP MTP Indicates whether you have a point to point PTP or multipoint MTP configuration on the BRI line Enter the value of the type of line supplied by your ISDN provider If you have a PTP line connected to a 5ESS switch you do not have to configure SPIDs Refer to the SPID parameter on page A 88 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 33 X 25 over ISDN D Channel ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables X 25 service over the D channel for each BRI line Select Enable to enable this feature Otherwise accept the default CAUTION If you enable or disable this feature dynamically the router disconnects all existing calls over the B channels as the ISDN software makes changes for the feature Once the changes are complete the software restarts and you can make calls again 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 39 A 24 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Fixed Fixed Auto Specifies how you choose to configure the TEI value for the DTE You can preassign the identifier value at the time you order ISDN service or the router can learn the
324. ration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 3 To add a demand circuit group click on Add Group then click on Apply 4 To change the protocol that the circuit group uses disable the current protocol and enable another one then click on Apply For parameter descriptions for each protocol refer to Appendix A 5 Click on Done Modifying the Number of Circuits in a Demand Circuit Group To modify the number of circuits in a demand circuit group 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 3 Click on Edit Pools Site Manager displays the Demand Circuit Group window Figure 9 16 9 20 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits i Twas Lay Dalita Valued Pea dir ueiber af Cireulta Figure 9 16 Demand Circuit Group Window 4 Change the number of circuits in the group Site Manager Number of Circuits parameter page A 51 5 Click on Done You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window refer to Figure 9 15 6 Click on Done Modifying the Demand Pool That the Demand Circuit Group Uses To modify the demand pool used by the demand circuit group 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups Site Manager
325. rcuit Interface WINdOW cccceccsssceseeeeeeceeseessesteaaeeeeees 11 12 Circuit Options WiINGOW eeecceeeceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeaeeseeaeeesaeeseceeesiaaeeeeaes 11 13 Primary Circuit Definition WindOwW cccccceeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteaeeeees 12 3 Outgoing Phone List Window cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeneneees 12 4 Phone Number Window ccccccccccccecceeeececececaeaeeeeeeeeeeseseceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 12 5 Completed Outgoing Phone List WiNdOW cececceeeseeeeeeeeeeetaeeteeeees 12 6 Incoming Phone List Window 0000 0 eee cece eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeneaaes 12 9 Phone Number Window cccccccccccecceceeeececesaeaeaeaeseaeeseseseseseseseseeeeeees 12 10 Completed Incoming Phone List Window for ISDN n se 12 11 ISDN Local Phone Lines WiINdOW ccccceeeessecaeeeeeeeeeeseesseessaeeaeees 12 12 ISDN Local Phone Numbers Window c scccceeseseeeseessssssnteeaeees 12 13 Phone Number Window cccccccccccccececeecececaeaeaeseseeeesssesecseeseseseeeeeeees 12 13 Caller Resolution Table Wind OW ccccccscccscceceecsessesteaeeceseeeeeeeeeees 13 2 Caller Name and Secret Password WindOW ecccceeesteeeeeeessteeeeees 13 3 Local Circuit List WINdOW esii n na aaa a daa a i aei 13 4 117353 A Rev A Figure 13 4 Figure B 1 Figure B 2 Figure B 3 Figure B 4 117353 A Rev A Completed Caller Resolution Table Window
326. rcuit Referred to As Leased circuit Bandwidth circuit Leased multilink circuit You designate a leased circuit as a bandwidth circuit to enable bandwidth on demand service Dial on demand circuit Demand circuit This is a demand circuit for which you can provide bandwidth on demand service You do not designate this as a bandwidth circuit Dial up circuit that helps the Dial up or secondary circuit congested leased circuit 117353 A Rev A 11 1 Configuring Dial Services Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service Once bandwidth on demand service is set up Site Manager adds three new buttons to the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Apply Phone Out and Options You can use these buttons to modify the parameter defaults To modify the configuration 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Figure 11 1 are Ppa ly Phono Out Options Hol Pool ID limra ttt Pieris CHAP Lima Pimm HRP Secret PAF Locel OM PAP Parad Figure 11 1 Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Window This window lists the bandwidth circuit that you configured in Chapter 1 3 Select an existing circuit or add a new circuit then enter new values for the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A 11 2 117353 A Rev A Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circui
327. rcuits supporting a congested demand circuit 117353 A Rev A 5 21 Chapter 6 Dial Backup Implementation Notes This chapter describes Bay Networks implementation of dial backup service Most of these notes apply only to circuit backup that is they apply only to a primary Bay Networks Standard PPP or Frame Relay PVC Data compression is the only feature that you can use with circuit and link backup Data Compression Site Manager allows you to configure Bay Networks proprietary data compression protocol WCP over any PPP or Frame Relay primary and backup circuit Enabling data compression improves bandwidth efficiency by eliminating redundant strings in data streams This in turn improves network response times and yields line cost savings To implement data compression you must enable WCP on the leased circuit that you selected before configuring the backup pools For more information about data compression see Configuring Data Compression Services 117353 A Rev A 6 1 Configuring Dial Services Defining the Role of the Router in the Network When you configure a router for dial backup you must specify whether the router initiates calls or waits to receive calls The router placing the backup call waits until the primary circuit fails The other router then waits for the call without trying to initiate one If you do not specify the role of each router they try to call one another simultaneously and each rou
328. rd window Figure 1 34 Cal Lene Aa CHAP Secret PW e a Local mroup Figure 1 34 Caller Name and Secret Password Window 117353 A Rev A 1 41 Configuring Dial Services 4 Enter the name and CHAP secret of the remote router The CHAP secret must be the same for routers on both sides of the circuit Site Manager Caller Name parameter page A 102 Site Manager CHAP Secret parameter page A 102 The Caller Name parameter identifies a remote router Do not confuse this parameter with the CHAP Local Name parameter which identifies the local router that is the router you are currently configuring Click on OK Site Manager displays the Local Circuit List window Figure 1 35 which lists the demand primary or bandwidth circuits that you have configured PPP Demand 1 PPP Demand 2 PPP Demand 3 Figure 1 35 Local Circuit List Window 6 Highlight the local circuit that the router should activate when it receives a call from the remote router specified in the Caller Name parameter Site Manager Local Circuit parameter page A 103 7 Click on OK You return to the caller resolution table window When you select a caller name in the window the parameters display the caller s information Click on Done when you finish adding table entries 1 42 117353 A Rev A Getting Started What to Do Next Now that you have completed the steps in this chapter your
329. re Site Manager prompts you to configure the X 25 packet and service configuration Note Site Manager modifies the ranges that you can set for certain packet and service parameters to accommodate data over the D channel 117353 A Rev A 4 19 Configuring Dial Services Using the ping Command for ISDN Connections To check the availability of a remote device in an ISDN network you can use the ping command The ping command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request to a remote address that you specify You can issue this command using Site Manager s Administration option Ping from Router or by using the Technician Interface Call setups for dial connections require more time than setups for ISDN connections When you ping a remote device using the default timeout value 5 seconds it may fail because the router does not wait long enough for a response from the remote device Therefore you may want to increase the timeout value so the router will allow enough time for a response For information about using the ping command refer to Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager For information about using the Technician Interface refer to Using Technician Interface Software 4 20 117353 A Rev A Chapter 5 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes This chapter describes Bay Networks dial on demand implementation Standby Circuits The expansion of enterprise networks to remote branch sites
330. recover There is no circuit available until the primary circuit reactivates or the standby circuit is available again refer to Example 2 Failback Time Results in No Available Circuit Example 2 Failback Time Results in No Available Circuit 3 00 p m 4 55 p m 5 00 p m 5 05 p m The primary circuit fails and a standby circuit is activated as specified in Time of Day Schedule 2 The primary circuit recovers The failback timer starts counting down from 10 minutes After 5 minutes Time of Day schedule 3 is active The standby circuit is brought down and will not be available until 7 00 p m For 5 minutes there is no circuit available to transmit data Data traffic transfers back to the primary circuit 117353 A Rev A 5 7 Configuring Dial Services Callback Callback is a dial on demand feature for use between two peer routers such as a central router and a remote router over a PPP circuit You cannot use callback with Frame Relay demand circuits or demand circuit groups With this feature you can configure a router to call back an incoming caller You can configure callback across any demand circuit including those configured for bandwidth on demand service Callback offers the following advantages e Reduces tariffs because you can place calls using the lowest cost path e Secures access for authorized callers only e Consolidates accounting of phone charges Figure 5 1 shows how callb
331. requires reliable access to these sites Therefore it is important to have more than one connection to the remote sites in case a primary connection fails To provide additional connections you can use standby circuits A standby circuit is a special type of demand circuit that gives the router another path to the destination The destination can be a different interface at the primary circuit s original site or an entirely different site Standby circuits support asynchronous RS 449 synchronous RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces PPP is the only data link layer protocol that you can configure over a standby circuit you cannot use Frame Relay 117353 A Rev A 5 1 Configuring Dial Services Comparing Standby Circuits with Dial Backup Circuits Both standby circuits and dial backup circuits can back up failed primary circuits however they differ in the following ways Each standby circuit has a unique configuration it does not adopt the primary circuit s configuration In contrast most dial backup circuits inherit the primary circuit s configuration This unique standby configuration offers flexibility when setting up other paths to remote sites For example you may want the standby circuit to have a different destination than the primary circuit or you may enable compression on the standby circuit but not on the associated primary circuit Standby circuits let you control when the router switches fr
332. rn speaker on during handshaking and while receiving carrier M3 Turn speaker off during dialing and receiving carrier and turn speaker on during answering NO Turn off automode detection N1 Turn on automode detection 00 Go online O1 Go online and initiate a retrain sequence P Force pulse dialing Qo Allow result codes to DTE Q1 Inhibit result codes to DTE Sn Select S Register as default Sn Return the value of S Register n continued 117353 A Rev A AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function V Set default S Register to value v Return the value of default S Register T Force DTMF dialing Vvo Report short form terse result codes V1 Report long form verbose result codes WO Report DTE speed in EC mode Wi Report line speed EC protocol and DTE speed W2 Report DCE speed in EC mode X0 Report basic call progress result codes For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER also for busy if enabled and dial tone not detected NO ANSWER and ERROR X1 Report basic call progress result codes and connection speeds For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER also for busy if enabled and dial tone not detected NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX and ERROR X2 Report basic call progress result codes and connection speeds For example
333. rnative Router Using IP Unnumbered Interfaces 6 3 Figure 6 2 Dialing an Alternative Router Using Demand Circuit Groups 6 5 Figure 7 1 Multilink and Bandwidth on Demand Operation eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 xvi 117353 A Rev A Figure 7 2 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 9 12 Figure 9 13 Figure 9 14 Figure 9 15 Figure 9 16 117353 A Rev A BAP Negotiation between Two Routers ou eee cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteas 7 5 Demand Pools Window 0000 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaaees 8 2 Edit Connector Window ccccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseneeeesaaeeseeeeeesnaeeeeenes 8 4 Edit Connector Window sasia aeetas ie aaiae aada aana iaiaaeaia daai 8 6 Sync Modem Interface Window ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeneees 8 7 Async Hayes Modem Interface Window eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 8 7 ISDN Dialup Window MEE 8 12 BRI Interface Configuration Window cceeeeeeeteeeeeceeeeeeeettaeeeeeeeees 8 13 PRI Logical Lines WiINdOW csie teiti en eaae a a E 8 14 Timeslots WiN
334. rol Disable primary secondary Enable primary shared Disable demand Hangup on DLCMI Failure Disable Service Name None Days Weekday Start Time 0 End Time 2359 Outbound Authentication Enable 117353 A Rev A C 7 Configuring Dial Services Table C 13 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Parameters Parameter Default Circuit Type Normal BOD Pool ID None Bandwidth Mode Non Monitor CHAP Local Name None CHAP Secret Unsecured PAP Local ID None PAP Password Unsecured PPP Circuit Mode Normal BOD Exam Period 10 0 10 second intervals BOD Fail Threshold 70 percent BOD Periods to Fail 10 times Preferred Bandwidth Slot None Reserved Bandwidth Slot None Maximum Links 4 BOD Recovery Threshold 20 percent BOD Periods to Recover 10 times Multilink Fragmentation Permitted Fragmentation Trigger Size 256 Outbound Authentication Enable Enable BAP Disable No Phone Number Needed BAP Disable 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Parameter Defaults Table C 14 Outgoing Phone List Parameters Parameter Default Phone Number None Phone Ext SubAddr None Phone Delimiter None Phone Prefix ATDT Phone Number Type ISDN ISDN Numbering Type Unknown ISDN Numbering Plan Telephony Adaption Rate 64K Remote Pool Type Dial and Bandwidth on Demand Connection Type Multiple Channel
335. rom the client The server using incoming call filtering verifies that the client is an authorized caller by matching the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list If the server finds a matching entry it refuses the call By refusing the call the server eliminates any phone charges for the client The server then returns the call using the phone number in the original call s setup message 11 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 53 117353 A Rev A A 35 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Callback Server Delay Time sec Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits 0 0 to 1800 seconds Specifies the amount of time the server waits before calling back the client Delaying the call allows time for the client s modem to disconnect or for its ISDN connection to stop retrying the original call This parameter is available only if the Callback Mode parameter is set to one of the server options Enter the amount of time you want the server to wait before calling the client back If you are using a modem enter a value greater than 6 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 54 Callback Client Delay Time sec Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand
336. ronous PPP provides communication for asynchronous interfaces on the AN ASN and ANH using the Dual Sync Net Module ARN using any Serial Expansion Module and BLN and BCN using the Octal Sync Net Module There are several advantages to asynchronous communications Low cost Analog lines are less expensive than high speed digital lines Asynchronous modems are less expensive than synchronous modems You can also dial directly into the router without using a terminal server or other port concentration devices Effective use of router hardware You can use an available serial port on the router for a dial up application Line availability Analog lines are available in most locations enabling you to dial in from any remote location Throughput With the V 34 standard throughput for asynchronous modems is 28 8 Kb s Using the V 42bis compression standard throughput can be higher Figure 4 4 shows a network that uses asynchronous PPP over modem lines Bogs ee FE n gt So ee N Za DS0028A Figure 4 4 Using Asynchronous PPP over Modem Lines Using low cost asynchronous modems makes asynchronous PPP ideal for customers with small networks who are trying to lower expenses 4 6 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services All dial services can use asynchronous PPP for connec
337. rs window 4 In the Edit SYNC Parameters window find and modify the following parameters e WAN Serial Interface Type Change this value from the default Sync to Async if you want to use asynchronous PPP across your dial up lines If you are already using asynchronous PPP you can change the type from Async to Sync Remember that for the BLN and BCN this parameter is available only on the Octal Sync Link Module Site Manager WAN Serial Interface Type parameter page A 4 8 4 117353 A Rev A Customizing Line Pools e Sync Media Type called Line Media Type for dial services Choose Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes Disregard the other options Site Manager Line Media Type parameter page A 5 e Cable Type Change this value to specify the physical interface to the attached modem or TA Site Manager Cable Type parameter page A 6 5 Click on OK 6 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 5 Configuring Dial Services Modifying Modem Configurations If your dial application uses modems you can modify the default modem parameters for each type of modem signaling Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes To modify the modem parameters 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on the COM connector whose modem interface you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it Site Manager displays the Edit Connector window Figure 8 3 Edit Modem
338. ructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Modem Command String COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Line Media Type OR Dialup gt Pools gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync or Async Line Media Type None Any valid modem command string Raise DTR and V 25bis only Enables you to test and modify the configuration of your modem For example if you want to change the speed of your modem you can enter a command string to do this Also if you are having trouble placing calls enter a string to test whether the modem responds Enter a command string that your modem supports 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 13 1 4 Modem Init String COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface AT amp F An AT modem command string which is an ASCII text string from 3 to 34 characters For asynchronous interfaces only this parameter specifies the modem initialization string the router sends to the modem This command string takes precedence over factory default commands Enter an AT command string that the modem should use to make calls You must enter a value for this parameter if you selected Custom as the modem type If you fail
339. ry circuits which instructs the router to provide backup service if the primary line and circuit fail If a primary circuit fails and you configure dial backup service for that circuit the router activates an available backup line When the primary circuit is restored the router reroutes all traffic from the backup circuit to the primary circuit and clears the dial backup connection Dial backup is supported on asynchronous lines RS 449 synchronous lines RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces Table 2 2 lists the primary and backup lines you can configure Table 2 2 Primary and Backup Lines Line Type Primary Any leased line up to T1 E1 rates including multiline Standard and PPP only and multilink connections Frame Relay multiline circuits cannot be dial backup primaries Frame Relay PVCs Backup Any WAN line including ISDN B channels Lines must be in the dial backup pool Table 2 3 lists the protocols for each type of primary and backup circuit Table 2 3 Primary and Backup Circuit Protocols If the primary circuit s protocol is The backup circuit s protocol can be Standard Async or Sync PPP only PPP Async or Sync PPP only Frame Relay backing up only one PVC Async or Sync PPP only Frame Relay backing up the entire Frame Frame Relay only Relay interface 117353 A Rev A 2 13 Configuring Dial Services Circuit Backup versus Link Backup
340. s Configuring IPX Services or Configuring Bridging Services 6 2 117353 A Rev A Dial Backup Implementation Notes Sample Network Using Unnumbered Interfaces Figure 6 1 shows a sample network using IP unnumbered interfaces and dial backup service Router A the remote router connects to Router B the regional router via a primary leased line Router B connects to Router C the central router via a regular leased line that is a leased line without dial backup service Remote Regional Central Router A Router B Router C El E 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 E E 92 32101 2 192 32 10 2 E TEN Primary Leased ooog Nn pee eee Backup gt __ 4 _ Demand Line 1 Primary line between routers A and B Line 2 Leased line between routers B and C Line 3 First attempt backup line for router A Line 4 Second attempt backup line for router A Demand line for router C DSO018A Figure 6 1 Dialing an Alternative Router Using IP Unnumbered Interfaces If the primary connection between Routers A and B goes down the backup circuit takes over adopting the configuration of the primary circuit The backup circuit tries to call Router B but it cannot establish a connection Because you configure unnumbered IP addresses on the primary cir
341. s The time interval you specify should be long enough so that the connection to the destination site activates not just the connection to the Frame Relay switch If you send routing updates before the connection to the destination is active routing updates may not reach the destination 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 57 117353 A Rev A A 31 Configuring Dial Services Standby Circuit Parameters PPP Demand Circuits only Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Standby Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Demand Normal Demand Normal Standby Hot Standby Indicates whether this circuit operates as a demand circuit or a standby circuit Accept the default if you want this circuit to operate as a demand circuit Select Hot Standby if you want this circuit to back up a failed primary circuit Select Standby to act as a standby circuit for incoming calls 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 50 Standby Failback Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits None None Automatic Manual Controls the failback from the hot standby circuit to the primary circuit This option is available only if the Standby Mode parameter is Hot Standby Select one of the following options Automatic Automatica
342. s and set the parameters according to Tables B 8 through B 17 B 6 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Configuration of Router 2 To configure Router 2 1 Select an ISDN BRI Net Module 2 From the Configuration Manager window click on an ISDN1 connector 3 Follow the path to the configuration windows and set the parameters according to Tables B 8 through B 17 Note These tables list only the parameter defaults you must change Port Application Mode Configuration Begin by setting the Port Application Mode parameter Path MCT1 or MCE1 Connector gt Port Application Mode Table B 8 Port Application Mode Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 Port Application Mode PRI Default Dialup 2B D Path Port Application Mode gt Clock Parameters Table B 9 MCT1 Clock Parameter Router 1 only Parameter neuter 1 MCT1 2 Primary Clock Port 2 Ext Loop The Port Parameters window appears next Accept the default values Path MCT1 or MCE Port Parameters gt PRI Timeslots Click on Select All in the PRI Timeslots window 117353 A Rev A B 7 Configuring Dial Services If you are using selective PRI service that is some B channels are blocked the timeslots that you configure as B channels should be the same channels assigned by the switch provider For example if the provider assigns you channels 1 to 10 configure timeslots 1 to 10 as
343. s in the call request message The router uses E 164 addresses for communication across the D channel to the ISDN network and uses X 121 addresses to call an X 25 network directly You specify the address in the X 25 packet configuration Refer to Configuring X 25 Services for more information One method of implementing X 25 over the D channel is to configure PDN service Refer to Configuring X 25 Services to learn how to configure PDN service Another method of implementing X 25 over the D channel is to use IPEX single node switching For information about IPEX and how to configure IPEX single node switching refer to Configuring X 25 Services 4 18 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services Figure 4 9 shows how X 25 is implemented over the D channel using PDN service 1 X 25 terminal 1 X 25 terminal Router Key ET Exchange terminator X 25 host DTE PH Packet handling PSPDN Packet switched public data network DS0035A Figure 4 9 X 25 over the D Channel Configuring X 25 Service over the D Channel To configure X 25 service over the D channel you enable the X 25 over the D Channel parameter in the BRI Interface Configuration window The parameter enables this feature for each BRI line You can configure multiple D channel interfaces with X 25 Refer to Chapter 8 for configuration instructions Once you enable the X 25 featu
344. s that you use AT modem commands to send dialing instructions to the modem The ISDN lines use ISDN signaling for network connections 117353 A Rev A 2 17 Configuring Dial Services How Backup Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together For each leased circuit that needs a backup circuit you designate that circuit as a primary circuit and assign it a backup pool ID If the primary circuit fails the router activates the backup line to carry the backup circuit If your network uses a multiline or multilink primary the backup line is activated when the last line in the multiline or multilink bundle fails You must first configure a leased circuit and a backup pool before you can configure primary and backup circuits Figure 2 9 shows how backup lines pools and circuits work together The router in San Diego has two leased lines one going to a router in Phoenix and the other to a router in San Francisco The circuits for each of these destinations are associated with Backup Pool 1 If either of these leased lines fails the San Diego router activates Backup Line 1 from Backup Pool 1 to continue routing traffic to the destination 128 92 17 2 128 32 17 0 eae Backup pool 1 Sa E J aeee see 7 _ Backuplinet_ ign San Diego OT Sic 128 32 18 2 128 32 18 0 a San Francisco Configuration of the San Diego router Circu
345. sed for call setup The adaption rate is 64 Kb s CHAP is the PPP authentication protocol IP is the only LAN protocol configured The Ethernet segments shown in the network illustration are not configured Only one phone number and SPID are used BRI lines usually have two phone numbers and SPIDs 117353 A Rev A B 1 Configuring Dial Services We assume that you are familiar with the configuration procedures for dial services Refer to the configuration chapters for details Refer to Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for more information about setting up an interface Dial on Demand with PPP Figure B 1 shows Routers 4 and 7 connected via a demand line The demand line uses PPP and V 25bis signaling LaL pe Router 7 IP address Sync line S23 150 1 1 1 23 Group mode PVCs Frame Relay non fully meshed Demand line V 25bis EL z CE S25 Direct mode PVC Router 4 IP address Sync line S25 150 1 1 2 DS0023A Figure B 1 Dial on Demand Configuration with PPP 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Configuration of Routers 4 and 7 Configure Routers 4 and 7 as follows 1 Select a synchronous link module 2 From the Configuration Manag
346. solution Info None Any text string maximum 25 characters Specifies the PAP password you assign to this interface The PAP password is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the connection During the authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct password If the password is not correct the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK message and the router does not activate the connection If you configured PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP password If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 5 117353 A Rev A A 53 Configuring Dial Services Demand Circuit Group Protocol Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID IP Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables IP for this interface Select Enable to enable IP for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 5 Associated IP Address Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups None Any valid IP address Specifies an address that IP uses when sending a packet All circuits in the demand circuit group use this address which specifies a numbered
347. solution table Types of Authentication You can configure one way authentication or two way authentication In two way authentication both routers can authenticate each other In one way authentication only the called router can authenticate Two Way Authentication Figure 4 1 shows an example of two way authentication Two Way Authentication CHAP Router A or B can initiate authentication z Router A Router B Challenge gt x Response Response match Two Way Authentication PAP Router A or B can initiate authentication ESS Router A Router B Authenticate request lt Authenticate response DS0030A Figure 4 1 Two Way Authentication For CHAP Router A initiates a CHAP challenge and Router B responds Router A responds with a response match and the connection is activated Router B can also initiate a CHAP challenge 4 2 117353 A Rev A Implementation Notes for All Dial Services For PAP Router A sends an authenticate request to Router B Router B sends an authenticate response and then activates the connection Router B can also initiate an authenticate request Both Routers A and B can use PAP and CHAP in a single line pool If Router B rejects the CHAP challenge and Router A has the PAP Fallback parameter enabled Router A switches to PAP and reattempts the authentication On
348. ssistance If you purchased a Bay Networks service program call one of the following Bay Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone number Fax number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 508 916 3514 Santa Clara CA 800 2LANWAN 408 495 1188 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 33 4 92 96 69 98 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 61 2 9927 881 1 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 0180 81 3 5402 0173 117353 A Rev A XXix Chapter 1 Getting Started A dial service provides access to a central switched network for remote users such as people in branch offices telecommuters and sales people in the field To make these remote connections dial services use dial up lines also called switched lines which are activated when there is data to send across the network or when a failed or congested leased line needs a secondary dial up connection Dial up lines can be a cost effective alternative to leased lines and packet networks which are permanent connections that are available regardless of network traffic This manual describes three dial services dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand In this chapter you will perform a basic dial service configuration that is a configuration using all available defaults Setting up a basic configuration will familiarize you with the configuration tasks Subsequent chapters explain how to customize the co
349. st Location in Task Site Manager Parameter Appendix A Change the phone number Outgoing Phone Number page A 90 Outgoing Phone Ext SubAdar page A 91 Qutgoing Phone Delimiter page A 92 Modify the type of phone connection Outgoing Phone Number page A 90 Modify the ISDN numbering ISDN Numbering Type page A 94 information ISDN Numbering Plan page A 94 Modify the adaption rate of the call Adaption Rate page A 95 Change the type of line pool for the Remote Pool Type page A 96 remote line demand and bandwidth only Specify whether the phone number is Connection Type page A 97 for a single call or multiple calls Enable multirate service Channel Bandwidth Type page A 98 Aggregate Bandwidth page A 98 Change the AT command string Outgoing Phone Prefix page A 99 Hayes only Enabling PRI Multirate PRI multirate lets you group B channels in multiples of 64 Kb s to dynamically allocate bandwidth on a call by call basis To configure multirate follow the instructions in the preceding section Modifying the Outgoing Phone List and set the Channel Bandwidth Type parameter to Multirate You can also specify the number of B channels the router can use for a call using the Aggregate Bandwidth parameter 117353 A Rev A Customizing Phone Lists Creating an Incoming Phone List ISDN only To create an incoming phone list for caller ID service 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Inc
350. state This timer prevents brief minor disturbances on a noisy line from forcing the router to deactivate the circuit Instead the router waits to see if the line recovers within the T4 timer period This enables the router to suppress minor line problems from the upper layer protocols Enter a time limit that the router waits for the line to recover before it deactivates the circuit If your line is noisy enter the maximum time for the router to wait for the line to reactivate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 15 BRI B Channel Loopback ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Disable Enable Disable This parameter is for Layer 1 ISDN BRI conformance testing It allows the external equipment to send data to the router over the B channels and loop it right back out the S T or U interface ARN only The external equipment can verify its physical connection to the router Select Enable if you want to run a loopback test between the network and the S T or U interface on the router Do not enable this parameter when the router is in normal operational mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 13 117353 A Rev A A 23 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BRI Line Type ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configu
351. t Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition 60 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Specifies the maximum duration of a call for a continuous period of time This parameter value ensures that the connection is not up longer than necessary For example you may configure the circuit s availability via the Start and End time parameters from 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m Then configure this parameter for 60 minutes If the connection comes up at 10 00 a m the router keeps the circuit active until 11 00 a m Then the router invokes the Max UpTime Termination parameter to deactivate the circuit Enter the maximum active time for a call during a continuous period of time 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 10 Max UpTime Termination Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition Disabled Enabled Disabled Automatically deactivates the circuit if the call reaches the maximum time that you specify in the Maximum Up Time parameter If the router receives data after the circuit is down the router does not establish a demand connection Enter Enable if you want the circuit to terminate upon reaching the maximum time limit for the call 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 33 A 42 117353 A R
352. t you want to edit For instructions on accessing and modifying the synchronous line parameters refer to Configuring WAN Line Services Testing the Bandwidth on Demand Connection To ensure that the router can activate a secondary line if a leased line becomes congested you can use the Technician Interface to execute the forced dial command The forced dial command tells the router that the leased line or bundle is congested even if it is not This forces the router to activate a secondary line If the router cannot activate a secondary line there is a problem with the line To issue the forced dial command set the value of the forced dial attribute to 1 The command syntax is as follows set wfSwservOpitsEntry wfSwservOptsForcedDial lt circuit_no gt 1 commit To deactivate a forced dial connection issue a forced take down command The command syntax is as follows set wfSwservOptsEntry wfSwservOptsForcedTakedown lt circuit_no gt 1 commit You cannot use this test for demand circuits using bandwidth on demand service 7 8 117353 A Rev A Chapter 8 Customizing Line Pools This chapter provides instructions on how to modify dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand line pools You should have already created line pools according to the instructions in Chapter 1 The procedures for modifying line pools are similar for all three dial services To avoid repetition this chapter shows only the dial on demand co
353. t List window Choose the primary circuit you created earlier Local Phone Number Configuration Finally configure each router s phone number Path Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Lines window Click on Local Phones Site Manager displays the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window Path ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Phone Number Table B 32 Local Phone Numbers Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 S131 S12 Directory Number 4364444 4363333 SPID 50843644440000 50843633330000 Note A SPID is required for a BRI line using an NII switch Configuring Dial Backup with Standard or Frame Relay If the primary circuit uses Standard as the WAN protocol you must configure a unique value for the MAC Address parameter of the primary IP interface The router then uses this address as the value of the MAC Address parameter in the IP adjacent host entry for the remote router Routers on each end of the connection require an IP adjacent host entry that includes the other router s MAC address If the primary circuit uses Frame Relay in direct mode using A bit notification as the WAN protocol you do not need to configure the MAC address of the primary IP interface However you still need to configure an IP adjacent host entry for both routers 117353 A Rev A B 23 Appendix C Dial Services Parameter Defaults Tables C 1 through C 16 list the parameter defaults for dial
354. t Time 0 End Time 2359 Inactivity Timeout Disable Availability Mode Available Minimum Call Duration 60 seconds Inactivity Mode Both Directions Dial Optimized Routing Disabled Outbound Authentication Enable Standby Mode Demand Normal Standby Failback Mode None Manual Standby Action No Action continued 117353 A Rev A C 5 Configuring Dial Services Table C 10 Demand Circuit Parameters continued Parameter Default Standby Primary Circuit None Callback Mode Inactive Callback Server Delay Time sec O Callback Client Delay Time sec 5 seconds TimeofDay Failoack Mode Automatic Failback Time min 0 Table C 11 Demand Circuit Group Parameters Parameter Default Pool ID None Number of Circuits None Caller Name Unsecured CHAP Secret None PAP Password None IP Enable Disable Associated IP Address None 117353 A Rev A Dial Services Parameter Defaults Table C 12 Primary Backup Circuit Parameters Parameter Default Circuit Type Normal Backup Pool ID None Backup Mode Master CHAP Local Name None CHAP Secret Unsecured PAP Local ID None PAP Password Unsecured Maximum Up Time 60 minutes Max UpTime Termination Disable UpTime Term Reset 60 minutes Interface Type Normal Primary Down Time 5 minutes Use Backup Interface Filters Disabled FR Service Cont
355. t multirate service e AT amp T SESS e AT amp T 4ESS e DMS 100 For these switches you can group from 2 to 23 B channels supplying bandwidth from 128 Kb s to 1472 Kb s Placing Multirate Calls Both ends of a connection must support multirate for it to work You enable multirate and specify the transmission rate of each multirate call when you configure an outgoing phone number for a circuit Refer to Chapter 12 for specific instructions Each multirate call can operate at a different transmission rate You determine the transmission rate by specifying the number of B channels the circuit can use for a phone number The greater the number of B channels the faster the transmission rate because the circuit has more bandwidth You can place several multirate calls over the same PRI connection however the total number of B channels for each call cannot exceed the number of lines in the pool or the number of lines supported by the network switch If there are no available B channels in the line pool the call fails 117353 A Rev A 4 15 Configuring Dial Services Call setup across the D channel is simple You set up a call only once regardless of how many B channels are in use Note If you enable multirate calls across a bandwidth on demand circuit you must configure each line s external clock speed Line speed is critical to balancing traffic across a multilink bundle which is a group of dial up lines that help reduce
356. t the CHAP Secret must be the same for both sides of the connection Site Manager CHAP Local Name parameter page A 37 Site Manager CHAP Secret parameter page A 38 3 Go to the next section Specifying the Connection Mode Specifying the Connection Mode The connection mode determines which router places a call first which prevents two routers from establishing a demand circuit with each other at the same time To configure the connection mode 1 Scroll down the PPP Demand Circuits window to the Connection Mode parameter Select a value for the Connection Mode parameter Collision Master is the default If this router is set to Collision Master we recommend that you set the router at the other side of the connection to Collision Slave Site Manager Connection Mode parameter page A 28 3 Go to the next section Enabling a Protocol 1 22 117353 A Rev A Getting Started Enabling a Protocol In this section you enable the Internet Protocol IP Refer to Configuring IP Services for Site Manager windows and parameter descriptions To enable one or more protocols for a selected demand circuit 1 From the top left corner of the PPP Demand Circuits window refer to Figure 1 17 select Protocols gt Add Delete Site Manager displays the Select Protocols window Figure 1 19 Select Protocols Bridge Spanning Tree Native Mode LAN 4 C
357. ter Dhage lig Pi etere Pe Typpi Phone Pref ie Figure 1 29 Phone Number Window 4 Enter a phone number for the Phone Number parameter and an extension if any for the Phone Ext Subaddr parameter Site Manager Outgoing Phone Number parameter page A 90 Site Manager Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr parameter page A 91 5 Click on OK You return to the Outgoing Phone List window with the phone number parameters and the phone list filled in 6 Accept the defaults for Phone Number Type ISDN Numbering Type and ISDN Numbering Plan unless your service provider instructs otherwise Site Manager Outgoing Phone Number Type parameter page A 93 Site Manager ISDN Numbering Type parameter page A 94 Site Manager ISDN Numbering Plan parameter page A 94 7 Click on Done when you finish entering phone numbers 8 For ISDN configurations go to the next section otherwise go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 1 40 117353 A Rev A 1 37 Configuring Dial Services Creating the Local Phone List ISDN only A local phone number identifies the local router when it places a call to a remote router The router includes its own phone number in the ISDN outgoing call setup message This number along with Service Provider IDs SPIDs in the United States and Canada also identifies the router to the ISDN switch so that the switch can activate the circuit Your ISDN service pr
358. ter A 44 Inactivity Time parameter A 27 Inactivity Timeout parameter A 48 inbound traffic filtering 5 19 incoming call filtering 4 16 incoming call filtering description 4 16 Incoming Filter parameter A 18 Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr parameter A 100 incoming phone lists modifying 12 11 parameters Callback Demand Circuit Name A 101 Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr A 100 Incoming Phone Number parameter A 100 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Index 6 configuring logical lines 1 17 creating phone lists 12 1 description 3 1 functional groups 3 5 implementation notes 4 10 to 4 20 leased line operation 8 24 leased line operation 4 12 modifying the ISDN configuration incoming call filtering 8 19 switch type 8 18 8 19 parameters Acceptable LAPD MTUs A 22 BRI B Channel Loopback A 23 BRI Line Type A 24 BRI T3 Timer A 22 BRI T4 Timer A 23 Ext SubAddr A 87 Global Adaption Rate A 19 Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel A 19 Global X 25 over ISDN D channel A 19 Incoming Filter A 18 Pool Channel Count A 20 Pool Channel Priority A 21 Port Application Mode BRI A 15 Port Application Mode PRD A 16 Sending Complete IE A 18 SPID A 88 Switch Type A 16 TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D A 25 TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D A 25 X 25 over ISDN D Channel A 24 reference material 3 8 reference points 3 6 removing a B channel 8 28 8 29 service for dial services 2 3 standards 3 2 B channel 3 2 basic rat
359. ter receives a busy signal You define the role of a router using the Backup Mode parameter which is part of the primary circuit configuration see Chapter 10 Do not specify the same value for both sides of the circuit Bandwidth for Backup Circuits Time sensitive protocols or interactive protocols for example Telnet may not function correctly over a backup circuit that has less bandwidth than the primary circuit When user response time is critical backup circuits require the same bandwidth as the primary circuits Using Unnumbered Interfaces to Dial an Alternative Site IP unnumbered interfaces define a point to point connection for which you do not configure a specific IP address for example 128 185 35 70 Instead you configure an address of 0 0 0 0 Unnumbered interfaces are useful because the router is no longer restricted to a specific IP destination address This gives the router the flexibility to dial another site if it cannot reach the original destination If you configure unnumbered IP over a PPP primary circuit and the connection to the destination router fails the local router automatically dials each phone number in the outgoing phone list until it successfully connects to another router You can also configure unnumbered interfaces for IPX and bridging however the sample network that follows describes only IP to simplify the example For more information about unnumbered interfaces refer to Configuring IP Service
360. tgoing Phone 4363333 4364444 Number Do not use hyphens or other Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters nonnumeric characters Note The ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters default to the correct values based on the switch type you configured Do not change these parameters unless you receive explicit instructions from your service provider Caller Resolution Table Configuration Router 1 the master router does not require a caller resolution table Router 1 initiates calls to Router 2 it does not receive them therefore Router 1 does not need to verify Router 2 s identity In contrast Router 1 must have a CHAP name and secret that it places in the call setup message to identify itself to Router 2 Router 2 the slave router requires a table entry Router 2 receives calls from Router 1 and must identify the incoming caller After configuring the backup circuits you can configure the caller resolution table Path Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Caller Name and Secret Password Table B 31 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Router 2 only Parameter Router 1 Router 2 8131 S12 Caller Name N A ASN CHAP Secret N A ISDN Click on OK Site Manager displays the Local Circuit List window B 22 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Path Caller Name and Secret Password gt Local Circuit List The primary circuits are listed in the Local Circui
361. th AppleTalk Update Routing Protocol Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol Bandwidth Allocation Protocol Breath of Life Basic Rate Interface Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol channel service unit Data Link Connection Identifier Data Link Control Management Interface Digital Subscriber Loop data service unit exchange termination High level Data Link Control Internet Protocol Internet Packet Exchange Integrated Services Digital Network International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications local area network Link Access Procedure D Link Control Protocol Link Quality Report line terminator network terminator Password Authentication Protocol packet handling 117353 A Rev A xxvii Configuring Dial Services PPP Point to Point Protocol PRI Primary Rate Interface PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PVC permanent virtual circuit RADIUS Remote Access Dial In User Services RIP Routing Information Protocol SAP Service Advertising Protocol SAPI service access point identifier SPID Service Profile Identifier SVC switched virtual circuit TA terminal adapter TE terminal equipment TEI terminal endpoint identifier UNI user network interface WAN wide area network XNS Xerox Network System Ordering Bay Networks Publications To purchase additional copies of this document or other Bay Networks publications order by part number from Bay Networks
362. th Outgoing Phone List gt Phone Number Table B 13 Outgoing Phone List Parameter Number Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 Outgoing Phone 4364444 4366666 Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters Note The ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters default to the correct settings based on the switch type you configured Do not change these parameters unless you receive explicit instructions from your service provider 117353 A Rev A B 9 Configuring Dial Services Protocol Configuration Once you return to the PPP Demand Circuits window from the Outgoing Phone List window select the protocol for this application The Protocols button is located in the top left corner of the PPP Demand Circuits window Path Protocols gt Select Protocols Table B 14 IP Parameters Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 IP Address 132 132 132 3 132 132 132 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 After entering an IP address you specify an IP adjacent host address Path IP Configuration gt IP Adjacent Host Table B 15 IP Adjacent Host Parameter Parameter Router 1 Router 2 MCT1 2 ISDN1 IP Address 132 132 132 1 132 132 132 3 B 10 117353 A Rev A Configuration Examples Caller Resolution Table Configuration After configuring the demand circuits
363. the FR PVC List for Demand Services window Figure 9 6 es ath TEN Wal Les Mpa a Cira Durie Sat Multics Purid Mii Gengqgesetiion Control Compention Timar Comgemtion Courber Figure 9 6 FR PVC List for Demand Services Window 9 Click on Add to add a PVC to the service record Site Manager displays the Frame Relay PVC Add window Figure 9 7 117353 A Rev A 9 7 Configuring Dial Services ER Cancel OK Help PLCE Number C Figure 9 7 Frame Relay PVC Add Window 10 Enter a value for the DLCI Number parameter then click on OK You return to the Frame Relay PVC List for Demand Services window refer to Figure 9 6 11 Accept the defaults or modify the PVC parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A For more information about Frame Relay service records and PVCs refer to Configuring Frame Relay Services 12 Click on Done Adding Protocols to Frame Relay Demand Circuits To add protocols to a Frame Relay demand circuit 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window refer to Figure 9 1 3 Click on FR Circuits Site Manager displays the FR Demand Circuits window refer to Figure 9 3 4 Select a circuit then click on Demand Intf Site Manager displays the FR Demand Interface List window refer to Figure 9 4 5 Click on Services 9 8 117353 A Rev A Customizi
364. the fragmentation packets select a new value for the Fragmentation Trigger Size parameter Site Manager Fragmentation Trigger Size parameter page A 85 e To disable fragmentation select Prohibited for the Multilink Fragmentation parameter Site Manager Multilink Fragmentation parameter page A 85 6 Click on OK 7 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 11 9 Configuring Dial Services Enabling BAP for Bandwidth on Demand Service BAP enables you to manage the allocation of bandwidth for links in a multilink bundle that is the dial up circuits that relieve the congested bandwidth circuit Before enabling this protocol you need to configure bandwidth on demand service according to the instructions in Chapter 1 and this chapter For an overview of BAP refer to Chapter 7 To configure BAP 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Circuits gt Edit Circuits Site Manager displays the Circuit List window Figure 11 5 Configuration Peder ocni SWAP figernt LOCA FILE Circuits r T Figure 11 5 Circuit List Window 3 Select a leased circuit configured for bandwidth on demand service then click on Edit The Circuit Definition window appears Figure 11 6 11 10 117353 A Rev A Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Cont lyuration Bode Local SNAP mant LO FILE Protocols miet 5 4 J 1 l OWE Figure 11 6 Circuit Definition Window
365. this name or specify another 6 Click on OK Site Manager displays the WAN Protocols menu Figure 8 16 Standard PPP Frame Relay Cancel Figure 8 16 WAN Protocols Menu 7 Select a WAN protocol then click on OK Site Manager prompts you to select a LAN protocol 8 Select a LAN protocol then click on OK to complete the configuration 117353 A Rev A 8 25 Configuring Dial Services Modifying BRI Leased Line Configurations Although call setup is not performed on the D channel the ISDN switch uses the D channel to send and receive bits that activate and deactivate the ISDN interface Therefore you may want to edit the D channel for your leased line configuration If noise or other minor problems on the ISDN network are causing the router to deactivate the line frequently you can modify the BRI T4 Timer parameter to prevent this from happening Modify the BRI T4 timer as follows 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on an ISDN connector that is configured as a leased line Site Manager displays the ISDN Leased Line B Channels window refer to Figure 8 14 3 Click on Edit D Chan Site Manager displays the BRI Interface Configuration window Figure 8 17 BRI t4 isar Figure 8 17 BRI Interface Configuration Window for the BRI T4 Timer 4 Enter a new value for the BRI T4 Timer parameter Site Manager BRI T4 Timer parameter page A 23 8 26 117353 A Rev A
366. tion Protocol BAP Parameters page A 86 BRI Configuration Parameters page A 87 Outgoing Phone List Parameters page A 90 Incoming Phone List Parameters page A 100 Caller Resolution Table Parameters page A 102 You can use Site Manager to edit all dial service parameters You can also use the Technician Interface to modify parameters by issuing set and commit commands with the Management Information Base MIB object ID This process is the same as modifying parameters using Site Manager For more information about using the Technician Interface to access the MIB refer to Using Technician Interface Software Caution The Technician Interface does not verify that the value you enter for a parameter is valid Entering an invalid value can corrupt your configuration 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Each parameter description begins with the Site Manager path that leads to the parameter Each path assumes that you begin at the Configuration Manager window Two of the windows apply to all three dial services the names of these windows have been shortened to make the paths easier to follow see Table A 2 Table A 2 Abbreviated Site Manager Window Titles Full Name Abbreviated Name Demand Pools Backup Pools Bandwidth On Demand Pools Pools Demand Lines Definition Backup Lines Definition Bandwidth On Demand Lines Definition Lines Definition 117353 A Rev A Config
367. tions between two routers Only demand and backup service can use asynchronous PPP for connections between a router and a terminal server All protocols that can operate with PPP CHAP and PAP can operate with asynchronous PPP Asynchronous connections also support software and hardware data compression Configuring Modems for Asynchronous PPP Interfaces Site Manager simplifies modem configuration for asynchronous dial up connections that use Hayes signaling Site Manager provides the following list of commonly used modems that you can choose for your network e US Robotics Courier V Everything e Hayes Optima 288 e Cardinal MVP 288XF e Supra 288 Fax Modem e Zoom V 34X e Microcom DeskPorte Fast e BayStack ARN V 34 Modem Adapter Module e MultiTech Multimodem II MT1432 e Paradyne Comsphere 3820 e Motorola Codex 3261 e Boca V 34 Modem MV 34E When you select a modem from the list the AT initialization string is set automatically as well as the speaker volume speaker control and number of rings to answer You can modify these default settings If your modem is not on the list you can configure a custom modem and AT initialization command The AT initialization command is required for custom modems Appendix E lists the AT initialization commands for the ARN Your modem may use a different set of commands so refer to the manual for your modem 117353 A Rev A 4 7 Configuring Dial Services You configure modems for
368. to Avignon the B channel can also act as a backup line for the leased line from Rome to Florence and as a demand line from Rome to Interlaken 117353 A Rev A 2 25 Configuring Dial Services Using the Same Line for All Dial Services You can use the same physical line for dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools For example if the router is not using a line for a dial on demand connection it can use the line for a dial backup connection If there are several requests for the same line the router uses the line for the service requested first If several pools use the same line a combination of the letters D demand B backup and W bandwidth appear next to the connector name in the Configuration Manager window for example COM1DW These letters appear only next to COM and ISDN connector names 2 26 117353 A Rev A Chapter 3 ISDN Overview Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN is an internetworking technology that integrates voice data and video communication over end to end digital connections Figure 3 1 From an internetworking perspective the router can use ISDN to provide LAN interconnection services over a wide area Router Router DS0007A Figure 3 1 Sample ISDN Network Because ISDN integrates services and offers multiple communication channels it is more versatile than traditional network s
369. to Not Available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 6 117353 A Rev A A 47 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Inactivity Timeout Demand Circuits only Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Disable Enable Disable Determines whether the router uses the Inactivity Time parameter to control circuit activity during the configured start time and end time The Inactivity Time parameter defines the number of seconds that can elapse without data going across the line before the router disconnects the call Enter Enable if you want the router to use the Inactivity Time parameter and the Start Time and End Time parameters to determine when the circuit is available If there is no data going across the line the Inactivity Time parameter instructs the router to disconnect the call Accept the default Disable if you want the router to establish the connection at the start time and remain active until the configured end time regardless of data activity and regardless of the setting of the Availability Mode parameter Only the network can bring down the connection 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 7 A 48 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructi
370. tor Options 10 1 to 100 Specifies the number of consecutive times the router checks the bandwidth circuit and determines that data traffic is below the configured congestion threshold Once the router concludes that the circuit is no longer congested it returns to the leased line or bundle exclusively Enter the number of times the router should check if there is no longer a congestion condition before bringing down the secondary line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 60 A 84 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Multilink Fragmentation Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Permitted Permitted Prohibited Enables the router to split up the data packet into smaller segments for more efficient transfer across the multilink circuit Accept the default Permitted to enable fragmentation otherwise select Prohibited 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 51 Fragmentation Trigger Size Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 256 64 to 4000 Specifies the minimum packet size that the router will fragment into smaller packets Enter the packet size that will cause t
371. ts 4 Click on Apply to save your changes 5 Click on Done to return to the Configuration Manager window Table 11 2 lists ways to modify your bandwidth on demand configuration Table 11 2 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service Location in Task Site Manager Parameter Appendix A Add bandwidth circuits Circuit Type page A 77 Bandwidth On Demand Pool page A 77 ID Determine which router monitors Bandwidth Mode page A 78 congestion Modify the authentication information CHAP Local Name page A 37 CHAP Secret page A 38 PAP Local ID page A 39 PAP Password page A 40 Qutbound Authentication page A 41 Changing the Authentication Protocol CHAP is the default authentication protocol To select PAP you must specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter Refer to Configuring PPP Services for instructions 117353 A Rev A 11 3 Configuring Dial Services Monitoring Congestion on the Bandwidth or Demand Circuit To relieve congestion across the leased bandwidth or demand circuit a router on one side of the connection must monitor the traffic level on the circuit The Bandwidth Mode parameter in the Circuit Options window refer to Figure 11 8 specifies which router monitors congestion The default for this parameter is Non Monitor Changing the value to Monitor makes your router the congestion monitor You can then modify the congestion monitor parameters which determine when the
372. ts this parameter is only available if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Monitor The router uses the CHAP name when it activates the secondary line Instructions If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify a name for router identification If not ignore this parameter Do not configure this parameter for a demand circuit group MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 31 117353 A Rev A A 37 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID CHAP Secret Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Unsecured Any text string maximum of 20 characters Specifies the CHAP Secret that you assign to this interface The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the link When one router places a call to another router an authentication process takes place During this phase the routers send challenge packets back and forth that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same CHAP secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only configurable if the bandwidth mod
373. ues for the ISDN Numbering Type and Numbering Plan parameters If you have a line pool that combines ISDN V 25bis and Hayes signaling the destination phone number for some lines may be the same If this is the case you need to enter the destination phone number twice once as type ISDN and once as type Dial Sync or Dial Async The router then has two lines to dial the call 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 7 117353 A Rev A A 93 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ISDN Numbering Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Unknown Unknown International National Specific Subscriber Abbreviated This parameter indicates the standard that the phone number follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch Accept the default value Unknown unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 8 ISDN Numbering Plan Dialup gt Demand Bac
374. uits configure the caller resolution table Path Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Caller Name and Secret Password Table B 7 Caller Resolution Table Parameters Parameter Router 4 Router 7 S25 S23 Caller Name BLN2 BLN1 CHAP Secret East East Path Caller Name and Secret Password gt Local Circuit List The configured circuits are listed in the Local Circuit List window Choose the demand circuit you created earlier 117353 A Rev A B 5 Configuring Dial Services Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network Figure B 2 illustrates dial on demand configured for an ISDN network In this configuration e The BLN is using an MCT1 card Port 2 for its PRI interface The ISDN switch type is PRI SESS e The IP static route configurations are not listed for the Ethernet interfaces Typically there would be static routes Router 1 MCT1 port 2 Router 2 Ha Z ISDN 1 ASN a Local phone no 4366666 Local phone no 4364444 Switch type 5ESS Switch type Nii CHAP local name BLN CHAP local name ASN CHAP secret ISDN CHAP secret ISDN DS0024A Figure B 2 Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network Configuration of Router 1 To configure Router 1 1 Select an MCT1 Link Module 2 From the Configuration Manager window click on the MCT1 2 connector 3 Follow the path to the configuration window
375. up This option is available only if the Standby Mode parameter is Hot Standby Click on the Values button Site Manager displays a list of primary and bandwidth on demand circuits Highlight the circuit for which standby service should be provided then click on OK 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 4 117353 A Rev A A 33 Configuring Dial Services Callback Parameters PPP Demand Circuits only Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions Callback Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Inactive Inactive Server Client Server Call ID Client One Charge Server One Charge Server One Charge Call ID Note the following guidelines If the router is set to Server Client or Server Call ID the router performs CHAP or PAP authentication when it receives a call The one charge modes ensure that only the server side of the callback connection incurs phone charges When you choose any of these options the server refuses the call from the client eliminating charges for the client s initial call but charging the server for its return calls to the client To use any of the one charge modes each remote site must have a unique phone number The server must be able to identify a single circuit for each phone number that it calls back If you want to reduce your configuration work and you can purchase caller ID service select the modes that use Ca
376. up Circuit for only one PVC One Frame Relay PVC page 10 2 circuit backup Frame Relay backing up Frame Relay Creating Frame Relay Backup the entire interface Circuits for Multiple PVCs page 10 5 link backup You cannot configure a bandwidth on demand circuit as a primary circuit 117353 A Rev A 10 1 Configuring Dial Services Creating a PPP Backup Circuit for One Frame Relay PVC If your Frame Relay circuit is configured with only one PVC in the service record you must configure PPP for the backup circuit This is called circuit backup To configure a PPP backup circuit for a Frame Relay PVC 1 Configure a Frame Relay leased interface with a service record containing one PVC You need to add a new service record to the Frame Relay interface When you add a service record it automatically has only one PVC which requires a DLCI number Refer to Configuring Frame Relay Services for instructions 2 From the Configuration Manager window select Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP Site Manager displays the Primary Circuit Definition window Figure 10 1 is an example which lists the Frame Relay PVC for example DLCI 100 ry Backup Pook ID Backup Mode CHAF Looal Mae CHAP Secret Figure 10 1 Primary Circuit Definition Window 3 Select the Frame Relay circuit and click on Cct Type Site Manager displays the Circuit Options window Figure 10 2 10 2 117353
377. uring Dial Services Pool ID Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pool Configuration None 1 to 255 Identifies the line pool by assigning it a number Enter a number between 1 and 255 inclusive as the line pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 6 Demand Pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 Backup Pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 Bandwidth Pool ID WAN Serial Interface Type Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID WAN Serial Interface Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type Sync Sync Async Pasync not applicable for dial services Determines whether this interface uses synchronous communication or asynchronous communication If you are using asynchronous PPP select Async Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 109 A 4 117353 A Rev A Dial Service Parameters Sync and Async Line Media Type Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Line Media Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt
378. ust edit the PPP interface configuration and modify the Local Authentication Protocol parameter before setting up the caller resolution table Refer to Configuring PPP Services for instructions To identify remote callers you enter the caller name and CHAP secret or PAP password of each remote caller in the caller resolution table and assign a local demand primary or bandwidth circuit to each caller The authentication process starts during link negotiation The remote caller includes its CHAP name or PAP ID in the CHAP challenge or PAP authenticate request to the called router When the called router receives the call it checks its caller resolution table for a matching entry If the remote caller is authorized the called router activates the assigned circuit For more information about authentication refer to Chapter 4 Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Groups The router also uses the caller resolution table for demand circuit groups Demand circuit groups can only receive calls For a demand circuit group to accept an incoming call you configure the table and assign the demand circuit group to a remote caller After the router authorizes a remote caller it activates a circuit from the assigned demand circuit group 117353 A Rev A 13 1 Configuring Dial Services Adding Entries to the Caller Resolution Table For PPP dial up circuits using CHAP you should have already set up the caller resolution table as described i
379. uter contacts the switch for the first time using a statically configured PVC If the router sends routing updates over the static PVC they will not go over the PVCs that connect to the destination By setting the Routing Update Hold Time to a large enough value you ensure the updates are sent to the destination 5 16 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Exceptions for Sending Routing Updates Routing updates are sent independent of data transmission when An IP or IPX interface becomes active for the first time When an IP or IPX interface first initializes it sends routing updates to every node in the network If there is no data to send the connection expires in the time you specify in the Minimum Duration Time parameter The RIP Broadcast Timer IP or RIP SAP Update Interval IPX expires Each time the broadcast timer or update interval expires the protocol can request to send updates over an active connection If you enable dial optimized routing the value of the timer defaults to a high value so that connections are infrequent Reducing the value of the broadcast timer or update interval defeats the purpose of dial optimized routing If a connection is made because there is data to send the router uses this opportunity to send routing updates Consequently these timers reset instead of expiring This further reduces the frequency of connections made by a protocol request Maintaining the Routing Tab
380. uthentication Protocol 4 1 parameters See appropriate dial service Password Authentication Protocol PAP description 4 1 function for dial services 4 1 PAP IDs 4 1 phone lists creating incoming phone lists 12 9 creating local phone lists 12 12 Index 8 creating outgoing phone lists 1 36 12 3 for Hayes 12 2 for ISDN 1 36 12 2 for V 25bis 12 2 overview 12 1 Phone Number parameter V 34 modem A 13 Phone Number Type parameter A 93 phone numbers for the local router 1 38 ping command for ISDN calls 4 20 Point to Point Protocol PPP asynchronous PPP 4 6 to 4 7 multilink 2 23 5 20 bandwidth on demand 7 2 fragmentation 7 3 requirement for dial services 4 1 to 4 5 special line record for dial services 4 2 used to identify routers 4 1 Polling Interval parameter A 65 Pool Channel Count parameter A 20 Pool Channel Priority parameter A 21 Pool ID parameter A 60 Port Application Mode parameter BRI A 15 Port Application Mode parameter PRI A 16 PPP Circuit Mode parameter A 80 PPP See Point to Point Protocol PPP Preferred Bandwidth Slot parameter A 82 PRI See primary rate interface primary circuits activating backups to help 2 19 BofL messages for 2 16 creating 10 1 customizing 11 2 detecting failures 2 16 for dial backup description 2 13 Frame Relay 10 5 recovering from failure 2 16 Primary Down Time parameter A 61 primary lines See primary circuits 117353 A Rev A primary rate
381. valid options Valid DLCI numbers vary based on the Frame Relay address length The DLCI numbers that the switch provider assigns are generally in the following ranges 2 byte 16 to 1007 3 byte 1024 to 6451 4 byte 131 072 to 8 257 535 Function Specifies the PVC identification number that the Frame Relay network uses to direct data If you are running IP over Frame Relay the router uses this number as the MAC address for an adjacent host Refer to Configuring IP Services for more information about adjacent hosts Instructions Enter the decimal number that the Frame Relay provider assigns MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 2 1 4 A 72 117353 A Rev A Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Dial Service Parameters Circuit State Set Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List gt Services gt Frame Relay Demand Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt FR PVC List for Demand Service lt service no gt Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface gt Services gt Frame Relay Backup Service List gt PVCs gt Add gt Frame Relay Backup PVC List Active Invalid Active Inactive Specifies the state of the PVC
382. value from the switch dynamically when you place a call and the line becomes active Either way the switch assigns this value This parameter is available only if you enable X 25 over the D channel Select Fixed to enter the identifier assigned by the switch before placing any calls Select Auto so the router learns the identifier dynamically once the line is active 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 40 TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 1 0 to 63 Assigns a number to the X 25 DTE to identify it to the ISDN switch This parameter is available only if you enable X 25 over the D channel for a fixed TEI type If you set the TEI type to Fixed enter the TEI value that the switch provider assigned when you ordered ISDN service The value must be in the range 0 to 63 If the TEI type is set to Auto ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 41 117353 A Rev A A 25 Configuring Dial Services Demand Circuit Parameters PPP and Frame Relay Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Demand Pool ID Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits None 1 to 255 Identifies the demand pool
383. vice and a terminal adapter It is the boundary between your equipment and the ISDN network S reference point The point between the terminal equipment and the switching device at your premises T reference point The point between your switching device and the subscriber side of the local loop that is the wire between your phone and the phone company s central office Note Any device that can connect to an S reference point can connect to a T reference point because the devices are the same electrically U reference point The point between the NT1 where the phone company s line ends at your premises and the phone company s central office It is where the subscriber side and network side of the local loop meet This point is different in North America than in Europe In North America the subscriber side of the local loop includes the NT1 so the U point is further out on the network In Europe the NT1 is part of the service provider s side or network side of the local loop so the S T point is where the subscriber and the network meet 3 6 117353 A Rev A ISDN Overview Figures 3 4 and 3 5 show two ISDN networks with functional groups and reference points S T U 1 l l TE1 NT1 E Hit Digital line Router with ISDN BRI module l Figure 3 4 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Devices
384. w 2 Click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector Site Manager displays the PRI Logical Lines window refer to Figure 8 8 3 Click on Delete PRI Site Manager removes PRI service 4 Click on Done 117353 A Rev A 8 29 Chapter 9 Customizing Demand Circuits This chapter explains how to e Configure Frame Relay demand circuits e Customize PPP and Frame Relay demand circuits e Configure demand circuit groups You should have set up a demand pool in Chapter 1 and added PPP demand circuits For information about PPP and Frame Relay refer to Configuring PPP Services and Configuring Frame Relay Services respectively 117353 A Rev A 9 1 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Frame Relay Demand Circuits To configure Frame Relay demand circuits 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Demand Pools window Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 Demand Pools Window 3 Select a demand pool and click on FR Circuits Site Manager displays the FR Demand Circuits window Figure 9 2 9 2 117353 A Rev A Customizing Demand Circuits Dasani Pool IP Forma Take hisar Force Dal Inactivity Tira Patry fics Betry Delmi Figure 9 2 FR Demand Circuits Window 4 Click on Add to add a demand circuit Site Manager displays the new circuit along with its defaults Figure 9 3 The circuit uses the demand pool that you previously selected 117353 A
385. width pool and the Bandwidth Mode parameter for these lines is set to Monitor Site Manager prompts you to enter new values for the Preferred and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots For BAP If you configure BAP for dial up circuits the Bandwidth Mode parameter must be set to Dynamic Monitor This enables the router to act as the monitor or non monitor router You must then configure the Preferred and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters so that the non monitor router knows which slots to check first for available lines The non monitor router then sends the monitor router the phone number that it dials to activate the additional line 117353 A Rev A Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Modifying Multilink Fragmentation Multilink fragmentation lets the router break up data packets into smaller segments for efficient data transfer across multilink circuits Fragmentation is enabled by default To modify the size of fragmentation packets or disable fragmentation 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window refer to Figure 11 1 3 Click on Options Site Manager displays the Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window refer to Figure 11 2 4 Scroll until you see the fragmentation parameters 5 Modify the parameters as follows e To change the size of
386. witches window refer to Figure 8 11 3 Select Enable for the Incoming Filter parameter Site Manager Incoming Filter parameter page A 18 4 Click on Apply then click on Done Modifying the Adaption Rate To send and receive data transmitting at a rate of 56 Kb s across a 64 Kb s line you must modify the adaption rate Refer to Chapter 4 for more information on this feature To modify the adaption rate 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters Site Manager displays the ISDN Configured Switches window refer to Figure 8 11 3 Select 56 Kb s for the Global Adaption Rate parameter Site Manager Global Adaption Rate parameter page A 19 4 Click on Apply then click on Done The Global Adaption Rate parameter works with the Adaption Rate parameter in the outgoing phone list Refer to Chapter 12 to learn how to customize phone lists 117353 A Rev A 8 19 Configuring Dial Services Informing the Switch That Call Setup Is Complete Some switches require that the router include an information element in the call setup An information element is a number that informs the switch that call setup is complete which makes call setup more efficient To enable this feature 1 Begin at the Configuration Manager window 2 Select Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters Site Manager displays the ISDN Configured Switches window refer to Figure 8 1
387. with the BRI standard each port on the ISDN BRI module provides two 64 Kb s B channels for data transmission allowing communication with two remote locations simultaneously D Channel Support The router supports full 16 Kb s D channel signaling and call setup and teardown between the router and ISDN switch The D channel implementation complies with the ITU T formerly CCITT 1988 recommendations Q 921 and Q 931 and provides signaling support for the following countries e INS 64 KDD and NTT for Japan e TS013 for Australia e National ISDN 1 AT amp T SESS Custom and NT DMS 100 Custom for the United States and Canada e Swissnet 3 for Switzerland e NET3 for Austria Belgium Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland and the United Kingdom Bay Networks routers do not support data transmission across the D channel 117353 A Rev A 4 11 Configuring Dial Services BRI Leased Line Operation for Germany and Japan For BRI service in Germany and Japan you can configure a permanent point to point ISDN connection over a B channel without having to use the D channel to dial the call This connection operates like a leased line and is useful when ISDN service providers do not use the D channel Leased line operation supports PPP Bay Networks Standard and Frame Relay Site Manager allows you to select leased line operation when you configure the application mode for your BRI interface
388. y circuits can use the same demand pool Figure 2 3 shows an example of a PPP demand circuit over modem lines Figure 2 4 shows a Frame Relay demand circuit over ISDN lines Frame Relay network Router D switch Frame Frame Key Leased line Router C EC Relay Relay switch switch LL os Raise DTR V 25bi Ze Z aise BP is Dial up line z___ DS0033A Figure 2 4 Dial on Demand Connection over a Frame Relay Network 117353 A Rev A 2 7 Configuring Dial Services In Figure 2 4 remote Routers A B and C are connecting to the central Router D through a Frame Relay network dialing into the network across ISDN lines Router D connects to the network across a leased line The permanent virtual circuits PVCs in this network can be either fully meshed or non fully meshed allowing Routers A B C and D to connect to one another With the dial connection between the routers and the Frame Relay network each router can dial into the network and communicate with one another provided that the PVCs are set up properly and the physical and logical connections are active Configuring Frame Relay to Work Optimally with Dial on Demand How Frame Relay demand circuits operate depends on how your Frame Relay service provider defines the user network interface UNI the point between the router and the service provider The service provider defines the UNI dynamic
389. y or automatically One advantage of controlling failback is that you can delay the return of traffic to the primary circuit This lets the primary circuit stabilize before it resumes transmission of critical data The following configuration choices enable you to manage traffic between the primary circuit and the hot standby circuit RIP or OSPF precedence and cost parameters The router sends traffic across the circuit with the better cost route If the better route is the hot standby circuit traffic continues across this circuit even if the primary circuit recovers Conversely traffic will resume across the primary circuit if that is the better route Refer to Configuring IP Services for information about RIP and OSPF Standby Failback Mode parameter This parameter specifies the method that the router uses to deactivate the standby circuit and return to the primary circuit Using this parameter you can control the failback to the primary circuit automatically or manually Failback Time parameter This parameter specifies the delay before returning to the recovered primary circuit The routing level configuration takes precedence over the value of this parameter If the primary circuit has a better cost route traffic returns to the primary circuit regardless of the delay specified by this parameter If the hot standby circuit has a better cost route the router uses this circuit until the failback timer expires 117353 A Rev A
390. you can prevent the demand circuit from remaining active unnecessarily For more information about broadcast timers refer to Configuring IPX Services 5 18 117353 A Rev A Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Traffic Filters To prevent routing updates and protocol specific messages from keeping the circuit active you can configure traffic filters that specify which packets are permitted across an established dial up line and which packets are prevented from activating a dial up line Traffic filters enable the router to selectively relay or drop a packet frame or datagram based on standard protocol fields or user defined fields If you implement inbound filters the router drops unwanted packets at the interface where it receives data By filtering incoming data you can prevent unwanted packets from going to the destination interface If you implement outbound filters the router drops unwanted packets before dialing a line The router continues to filter the data so that unwanted packets do not keep the circuit active You can also filter outbound packets to prevent the inactivity time from resetting For example RIP packets can always be sent but if no other data is sent the inactivity time expires and the line is deactivated To configure traffic filters see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Data Compression Site Manager allows you to configure the Bay Networks proprietary data compressio

Avaya Configuring Dial Services User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents